Dispenza Breaking The Habit of Being Yourself

Praise for Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself
“Dr. Joe Dispenza wants to empower you to let go of negative

beliefs and embrace the positive. This intelligent, informative, practical
book will help you be your best, freest self so that, as Dr. Joe puts it, you can
‘step toward your own destiny.’”
— Judith Orloff, M.D., author of Emotional Freedom
“In Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself, Dr. Joe Dispenza explores the energetic aspects of
reality with sound science and provides the reader with the necessary tools to make important
positive changes in their life. Anyone who reads this book and applies the steps will benefit
from their efforts. Its cutting-edge content is explained in a simple language that is accessible to
anyone, and provides a user-friendly guide for sustained change from the inside out.”
— Rollin McCraty, Ph.D., Director of Research,
HeartMath Research Center
“Dr. Joe Dispenza’s entertaining and highly accessible manual for rewiring your
mental and emotional circuitry carries a simple but potent message:
what you think today determines how you live tomorrow.”
— Lynne McTaggart, best-selling author of The Field,
The Intention Experiment, and The Bond
“Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself is a powerful blend of leading-edge science

and real-life applications woven into the perfect formula for everyday living.
“The hierarchy of scientific knowledge tells us that when new discoveries change what we
know about the atom, what we know of ourselves and our brains must change as well.
Through the 14 concise chapters of this book, Dr. Joe Dispenza draws upon a lifetime
of experience to describe how subtle shifts in the way we use our brains are the
quantum key to life-affirming changes in our bodies, our lives, and our relationships.
In a responsible, well-researched, and practical manual that you’ll want at your
fingertips for your personal practice, Dr. Joe’s easy-to-use, step-by-step techniques
give everyone the opportunity to experiment with their own quantum field
to discover for themselves what works best.
“From the powerful exercises highlighting the thinking that keeps us stuck in old beliefs,
to the simple practices that catapult us beyond our limiting beliefs, this book is
the owners’ manual to a successful life we wish we’d been given in first grade.
If you’ve always known that there’s more to you than you learned in Biology 101,
but find yourself intimidated by the technical language of science, this is the
beautiful book you’ve been waiting for!”
— Gregg Braden, New York Times best-selling author
of Deep Truth and The Divine Matrix
“As a semiretired psychologist who has thought about many of these issues
for years, I have to admit that [this book] will likely change some long-held
beliefs in the field of psychology. Dr. Joe’s conclusions, which are well grounded
in neuroscience, challenge our ideas of who we think we are and what we
think is even possible. A brilliant and uplifting book.”
— Dr. Allan Botkin, clinical psychologist;
author of Induced After-Death Communication
“We’re in the midst of an unparalleled new era of personal growth, in which a

productive feedback loop has been established between the latest discoveries of
neuroscience and the ancient practices of meditation. Dr. Joe Dispenza’s new
book masterfully yet clearly explains the ‘hard science’ of how our brains and
bodies work. He then applies it practically in a four-week program of fundamental
personal change, showing how we can use a structured meditation program to
consciously rewire our neural network for creativity and joy.”
— Dawson Church, Ph.D., best-selling author of The Genie in Your Genes
(EFTuniverse.com)
“Dr. Joe Dispenza brings us the manual for becoming a divine creator! He makes
the brain science practical; he shows us how to break free of the grip of our emo-
tions to create happy, healthy, and abundant lives, and how to finally dream our
world into being. I’ve been waiting for this book for a long time!”
— Alberto Villoldo, Ph.D., author of Power Up Your Brain and
Shaman, Healer, Sage
Breaking the Habit
of Being Yourself
ALSO BY DR. JOE DISPENZA
EVOLVE YOUR BRAIN: The Science of Changing Your Mind
MEDITATIONS FOR BREAKING THE HABIT
OF BEING YOURSELF (2-CD set)
YOU ARE THE PLACEBO: Making Your
Mind Matter (available April 2014)
Please visit:
Hay House USA: www.hayhouse.com®
Hay House Australia: www.hayhouse.com.au
Hay House UK: www.hayhouse.co.uk
Hay House South Africa: www.hayhouse.co.za
Hay House India: www.hayhouse.co.in
Breaking the Habit of
Being Yourself
How to Lose Your Mind and
Create a New One
Dr. Joe Dispenza
HAY HOUSE, INC.

Carlsbad, California • New York City
London • Sydney • Johannesburg
Vancouver • Hong Kong • New Delhi
Copyright © 2012 by Joe Dispenza
Published and distributed in the United States by: Hay House, Inc.: www.hayhouse.com®
• Published and distributed in Australia by: Hay House Australia Pty. Ltd.: www.hayhouse
.com.au • Published and distributed in the United Kingdom by: Hay House UK, Ltd.: www
.hayhouse.co.uk • Published and distributed in the Republic of South Africa by: Hay House
SA (Pty), Ltd.: www.hayhouse.co.za • Distributed in Canada by: Raincoast Books: www.rain
coast.com • Published in India by: Hay House Publishers India: www.hayhouse.co.in
Interior design: Nick C. Welch • Interior illustrations: Laura S. Craig • Indexer: Jay Kreider
The following illustrations incorporate copyrighted images used with permission: Figures
1E, 3C, 7C: People figures, © Izabela Zvirinska - Fotolia.com • Figure 3B: Man silhouette,
© styleuneed - Fotolia.com • Figures 3B, 5B, 5C, 6A: Human brain, © Alila - Fotolia.com
• Figure 5B: Neurons and nucleus, © ktsdesign - Fotolia.com • Figure 6A: Human brain,
© Pavel Eltsov - Fotolia.com • Figures 7A, 7B, 7D, 7E: Hands, © lom123 - Fotolia.com • Figure
8D: Retro laser gun, © LHF Graphics - Fotolia.com • Figure 8D: Sketchy bulb, © get4net -
Fotolia.com • Figure 8K: Brain, © Oguz Aral
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced by any mechanical, pho-
tographic, or electronic process, or in the form of a phonographic recording; nor may it be
stored in a retrieval system, transmitted, or otherwise be copied for public or private use—
other than for “fair use” as brief quotations embodied in articles and reviews—without prior
written permission of the publisher.
The author of this book does not dispense medical advice or prescribe the use of any
technique as a form of treatment for physical, emotional, or medical problems without the
advice of a physician, either directly or indirectly. The intent of the author is only to offer
information of a general nature to help you in your quest for emotional and spiritual well-
being. In the event you use any of the information in this book for yourself, which is your
constitutional right, the author and the publisher assume no responsibility for your actions.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Dispenza, Joe.
Breaking the habit of being yourself : how to lose your mind and create a new one / Joe
Dispenza. -- 1st ed.
p. cm.
Includes index.
ISBN 978-1-4019-3808-6 (hbk. : alk. paper)
1. Change (Psychology) 2. Thought and thinking. 3. New Thought. I. Title.
BF637.C4D56 2012
158.1--dc23
2011042878
Tradepaper ISBN: 978-1-4019-3809-3

Digital ISBN: 978-1-4019-3810-9
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1st edition, February 2012
Printed in the United States of America

For Robi
CONTENTS
Foreword by Daniel G. Amen, M.D. .............................................................xi

Introduction: The Greatest Habit You Can Ever Break
Is the Habit of Being Yourself.................................................................. xv
PART I: The Science of You
Chapter 1: The Quantum You .............................................................. 3
Chapter 2: Overcoming Your Environment ....................................... 39
Chapter 3: Overcoming Your Body .................................................... 53
Chapter 4: Overcoming Time .............................................................. 85
Chapter 5: Survival vs. Creation ......................................................... 97
PART II: Your Brain and Meditation
Chapter 6: Three Brains: Thinking to Doing to Being ..................... 123
Chapter 7: The Gap ............................................................................ 147
Chapter 8: Meditation, Demystifying the Mystical,

and Waves of Your Future ............................................... 175
PART III: Stepping Toward Your New Destiny
Chapter 9: The Meditative Process: Introduction

and Preparation ............................................................... 219
Chapter 10: Open the Door to Your Creative State (Week One) .......... 231
Step 1: Induction
Chapter 11: Prune Away the Habit of Being Yourself
(Week Two)........................................................................ 237
Step 2: Recognizing
Step 3: Admitting and Declaring
Step 4: Surrendering
Chapter 12: Dismantle the Memory of the Old You
(Week Three) .................................................................... 259
Step 5: Observing and Reminding
Step 6: Redirecting
Chapter 13: Create a New Mind for Your New Future (Week Four)...... 271
Step 7: Creating and Rehearsing
Chapter 14: Demonstrating and Being Transparent:
Living Your New Reality .................................................. 289
Afterword: Inhabit Self ............................................................................. 299

Appendix A: Body-Part Induction (Week One)........................................... 305
Appendix B: Water-Rising Induction (Week One) ...................................... 307
Appendix C: Guided Meditation: Putting It All Together
(Weeks Two Through Four) ...............................................................309
Endnotes .................................................................................................. 315
Index ....................................................................................................... 319
Acknowledgments .................................................................................... 326
About the Author ..................................................................................... 328
FOREWORD
Your brain is involved in everything you do, including how you

think, how you feel, how you act, and how well you get along with
other people. It’s the organ of personality, character, intelligence,
and every decision you make. From my brain-imaging work with
tens of thousands of patients worldwide over the past 20 years, it is
very clear to me that when your brain works right, you work right,
and when your brain is troubled, you are much more likely to have
trouble in your life.
With a healthier brain, you are happier, physically healthier,
wealthier, wiser, and just make better decisions, which helps you be
more successful and live longer. When the brain is not healthy for
whatever reason—such as a head injury or past emotional trauma—
people are sadder, sicker, poorer, less wise, and less successful.
It is easy to understand how trauma can hurt the brain, but
researchers have also seen how negative thinking and bad pro-
gramming from our past can also affect it.
For example, I grew up with an older brother who was intent on
shoving me around. The constant tension and fear I felt then led
to a higher level of anxiety, anxious thinking patterns, and always
being on guard, never knowing when something bad was about to
happen. This fear caused long-term overactivity in my brain’s fear
centers, until I was able to work through it later on in life.
In Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself, my colleague Dr. Joe
Dispenza is your guide to optimize both the hardware and software
of your brain to help you reach a new state of mind. His new book
is based on solid science, and he continues to speak with kindness
xi
BREAKING THE HABIT OF BEING YOURSELF
and wisdom, as he did in the award-winning film What the BLEEP

Do We Know!? and in his first book, Evolve Your Brain.
Even though I think of the brain like a computer, with both
hardware and software, the hardware (the actual physical func-
tioning of the brain) is not separate from the software or the con-
stant programming and reshaping that occurs throughout our
lives. They have a dramatic impact on each other.
Most of us have had trauma of some kind in our lives and live
with the day-to-day scars that have resulted. Cleaning out those
experiences that have become part of the brain’s structure can be
incredibly healing. Of course, engaging in brain-healthy habits,
such as a proper diet and exercise and certain brain nutrients, is
critical to the brain working right. But in addition, your moment-
by-moment thoughts exert a powerful healing effect on the brain
. . . or they can work to your detriment. The same is true for past
experiences that can become wired in the brain.
The study we do at the Amen Clinics is called “brain SPECT
imaging.” SPECT (single-photon emission computed tomography)
is a nuclear-medicine study that looks at blood flow and activity
patterns. It is different from CT scans or MRI, which examine
the brain’s anatomy, because SPECT looks at how the brain func-
tions. Our SPECT work, now over 70,000 scans, has taught us so
many important life lessons about the brain, such as:
• Brain injuries can ruin people’s lives;

• Alcohol is not a health food and often shows
significant damage on SPECT scans;
• A number of the medications people routinely take,
such as some common anti-anxiety medications, are
not good for the brain; and
• Diseases like Alzheimer’s actually start in the brain
decades before people have any symptoms.
SPECT scans have also taught us that as a society, we need to have

much more love and respect for the brain, and that allowing children
to play contact sports, like football and hockey, is not a smart idea.
xii
Foreword
One of the most exciting lessons I have learned is that people

can literally change their brains and change their lives by engag-
ing in regular brain-healthy habits, such as correcting negative
beliefs and using meditative processes such as those discussed by
Dr. Dispenza.
In one series of studies we published, the practice of medita-
tion, such as what Dr. Dispenza recommends, boosted blood flow
to the prefrontal cortex, the most thoughtful part of the human
brain. After eight weeks of daily meditation, the prefrontal cortex
at rest was stronger, and the memories of our subjects were better,
too. There are so many ways to heal and optimize the brain.
My hope is that, like me, you will develop “brain envy” and
want a better-functioning brain. The brain-imaging work we do has
changed everything in my own life. Shortly after I started order-
ing SPECT scans in 1991, I decided to look at my own brain. I was
37 years old. When I saw the toxic, bumpy appearance, I knew it
was not healthy. All of my life I have been someone who rarely
drank alcohol, never smoked, and never used an illegal drug. Then
why did my brain look so bad? Before I really understood about
brain health, I’d had many bad brain habits. I ate lots of fast food,
drank diet soda like she was my best friend, often slept only four to
five hours at night, and carried unexamined hurts from the past. I
didn’t exercise, felt chronically stressed, and carried an extra 30
pounds. What I didn’t know was hurting me . . . and not just a little.
My last scan looks healthier and much younger than it did
20 years earlier. My brain has literally aged backward—that’s how
changeable your brain is, too, when you make up your mind to
take care of it properly. After seeing my original scan, I wanted my
brain to be better. This book will help yours be better, too.
I hope you enjoy reading it as much as I did.
— Daniel G. Amen, M.D.,

author of Change Your Brain, Change Your Life
}}}}
xiii
INTRODUCTION
The Greatest Habit You Can Ever Break Is
the Habit of Being Yourself
When I think about all the books on creating the life we de-
sire, I realize that many of us are still looking for approaches that
are grounded in sound scientific evidence—methods that truly
work. But already new research into the brain and body, the mind,
and consciousness—and a quantum leap in our understanding of
physics—is suggesting expanded possibilities on how to move to-
ward what we innately know is our real potential.
As a practicing chiropractor who runs a busy integrated-health
clinic and as an educator in the fields of neuroscience, brain func-
tion, biology, and brain chemistry, I have been privileged to be
at the forefront of some of this research—not just by studying
the fields mentioned above, but also by observing the effects of
this new science, once applied by common people like you and
me. That’s the moment when the possibilities of this new science
become reality.
As a consequence, I have witnessed some remarkable changes
in individuals’ health and quality of life when they truly change
their minds. Over the last several years, I have had the opportu-
nity to interview a host of people who overcame significant health
conditions that were considered either terminal or permanent.
Per the contemporary model of medicine, these recoveries were
labeled “spontaneous remissions.”
xv
However, upon my extensive examination of their inner jour-

neys, it became apparent to me that there was a strong element of
mind involved . . . and their physical changes weren’t so sponta-
neous after all. This discovery furthered my postgraduate studies
in brain imaging, neuroplasticity, epigenetics, and psychoneuro-
immunology. I simply figured that something had to be happen-
ing in the brain and body that could be zeroed in on and then
replicated. In this book, I want to share some of what I learned
along the way and show you, by exploring how mind and matter
are interrelated, how you can apply these principles not only to
your body, but to any aspect of your life.
Go Beyond Knowing . . . to Knowing How
Many readers of my first book, Evolve Your Brain: The Science of

Changing Your Mind, voiced the same honest and heartfelt request
(along with a fair amount of positive feedback), such as the person
who wrote: “I really liked your book; I read it twice. It had lots of
science and was very thorough and inspiring, but can you tell me
how to do it? How do I evolve my brain?”
In response, I began teaching a workshop series on the practi-
cal steps anyone can take to make changes at the level of mind
and body that will lead to lasting results. Consequently, I have
seen people experience unexplainable healings, release old mental
and emotional wounds, resolve so-called impossible difficulties,
create new opportunities, and experience wonderful wealth, just
to name a few. (You will meet some of those people in these pages.)
It’s not necessary that you read my first book to digest the
material in this one. But if you have been exposed to my work,
I wrote Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself to serve as a practical,
how-to companion to Evolve Your Brain. It is my earnest objective
to make this new book simple and easy to understand. There will
be times, though, that I will have to give you bits of knowledge to
act as the forerunner to a concept I want to develop. The purpose
is to build a realistic working model of personal transformation
that will help you understand how we can change.
xvi
Introduction
Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself is a product of one of my

passions—a sincere effort to demystify the mystical so that every
person understands that we have, within our reach, all we need to
make significant changes in our lives. This is a time in history when
not only do we want to “know,” but we want to “know how.” How
do we apply and personalize both emerging scientific concepts and
age-old wisdom to succeed at living a more enriched life? When
you and I can connect the dots of what science is discovering about
the nature of reality, and when we give ourselves permission to
apply those principles in our day-to-day existence, then each of us
becomes both a mystic and a scientist in our own life.
So I invite you to experiment with everything that you learn
in this book, and to objectively observe the results. What I mean is
that if you make the effort to change your inner world of thoughts
and feelings, your external environment should begin to give you
feedback to show you that your mind has had an effect on your
“outer” world. Why else would you do it?
If you take intellectual information that you learn as a philoso-
phy, and then initiate that knowledge into your life by applying it
enough times until you master it, you will ultimately move from
being a philosopher to an initiate to a master. Stay tuned . . . there
is sound scientific evidence that this is possible.
I do ask you up front to keep an open mind so that we can
build, step-by-step, the concepts I outline in this book. All of this
information is for you to do something with—otherwise it’s just
good dinner conversation, isn’t it? Once you can open your mind
to the way things really are, and let go of your conditioned beliefs
with which you are accustomed to framing reality, you should see
the fruits of your efforts. That is my wish for you.
The information in these pages is there to inspire you to prove
to yourself that you are a divine creator.
We should never wait for science to give us permission to do
the uncommon; if we do, then we are turning science into another
religion. We should be brave enough to contemplate our lives, do
what we thought was “outside the box,” and do it repeatedly. When
we do that, we are on our way to a greater level of personal power.
xvii
True empowerment comes when we start to look deeply at our

beliefs. We may find their roots in the conditioning of religion,
culture, society, education, family, the media, and even our genes
(the latter being imprinted by the sensory experiences of our cur-
rent lives, as well as untold generations). Then we weigh those old
ideas against some new paradigms that may serve us better.
Times are changing. As individuals awaken to a greater reality,
we are part of a much larger sea of change. Our current systems and
models of reality are breaking down, and it is time for something
new to emerge. Across the board, our models for politics, econom-
ics, religion, science, education, medicine, and our relationship
with the environment are all showing a different landscape than
just ten years ago.
Letting go of the outmoded and embracing the new sounds
easy. But as I pointed out in Evolve Your Brain, much of what we
have learned and experienced has been incorporated into our bio-
logical “self,” and we wear it like a garment. But we also know that
what is true today might not be true tomorrow. Just as we have
come to question our perception of atoms as solid pieces of mat-
ter, reality and our interaction with it is a progression of ideas and
beliefs.
We also know that to leave the familiar life that we have grown
accustomed to and waltz into something new is like a salmon
swimming upstream: it takes effort—and, frankly, it’s uncomfort-
able. And to top it off, ridicule, marginalization, opposition, and
denigration from those who cling to what they think they know
greet us along the way.
Who, with such an unconventional bent, is willing to meet
such adversity in the name of some concept they cannot embrace
with their senses, yet which is alive in their minds? How many
times in history have individuals who were considered heretics
and fools, and thus took the abuse of the unexceptional, emerged
as geniuses, saints, or masters?
Will you dare to be an original?
xviii
Introduction
Change as a Choice, Instead of a Reaction
It seems that human nature is such that we balk at changing

until things get really bad and we’re so uncomfortable that we can
no longer go on with business as usual. This is as true for an indi-
vidual as it is for a society. We wait for crisis, trauma, loss, disease,
and tragedy before we get down to looking at who we are, what
we are doing, how we are living, what we are feeling, and what we
believe or know, in order to embrace true change. Often it takes a
worst-case scenario for us to begin making changes that support
our health, relationships, career, family, and future. My message
is: Why wait?
We can learn and change in a state of pain and suffering, or
we can evolve in a state of joy and inspiration. Most embrace the
former. To go with the latter, we just have to make up our minds
that change will probably entail a bit of discomfort, some incon-
venience, a break from a predictable routine, and a period of not
knowing.
Most of us are already familiar with the temporary discomfort
of not knowing. We stumbled through our early efforts to read
until this skill became second nature. When we first practiced the
violin or the drums, our parents wished they could send us to a
soundproofed room. Pity the hapless patient who has his blood
drawn by a medical student who has the requisite knowledge but
still lacks the finesse that she will only gain through practice.
Absorbing knowledge (knowing) and then gaining practical ex-
perience by applying what you learned until a particular skill be-
came ingrained in you (knowing how) is probably how you acquired
most of the abilities that now feel like a part of your being (know-
ingness). In much the same way, learning how to change your life
involves knowledge and the application of that knowledge. That is
why this book is divided into three overarching sections.
Throughout Parts I and II, I will build ideas in sequence, form-
ing a bigger and broader model of understanding for you to per-
sonalize. If some ideas seem repetitive, they are there to “re-mind”
you about something that I don’t want you to forget. Repetition
xix
reinforces the circuits in your brain and forms more neural con-
nections so that in your weakest hour, you don’t talk yourself out
of greatness. When you ease into Part III of the book with a sound
knowledge base, you can experience for yourself the “truth” of
what you learned earlier.
Part I: The Science of You
Our exploration will start with an overview of philosophical

and scientific paradigms related to the latest research about the
nature of reality, who you are, why change has been so difficult
for so many, and what is possible for you as a human being. Part I
will be an easy read, I promise.
— Chapter 1: The Quantum You introduces you to a bit of
quantum physics, but don’t be alarmed. I start there because it
is important that you begin to embrace the concept that your
(subjective) mind has an effect on your (objective) world. The
observer effect in quantum physics states that where you direct
your attention is where you place your energy. As a consequence,
you affect the material world (which, by the way, is made mostly of
energy). If you entertain that idea even for a moment, you might
start focusing on what you want instead of what you don’t want.
And you might even find yourself thinking: If an atom is 99.99999
percent energy and .00001 percent physical substance,1 then I’m actually
more nothing than something! So why do I keep my attention on that
small percentage of the physical world when I am so much more? Is
defining my present reality by what I perceive with my senses the biggest
limitation I have?
In Chapters 2 through 4, we will look at what it means to

change—to become greater than the environment, the body, and
time.
— You’ve probably entertained the idea that your thoughts
create your life. But in Chapter 2: Overcoming Your Environ-
ment, I discuss how if you allow the outer world to control how
xx
Introduction
you think and feel, your external environment is patterning cir-

cuits in your brain to make you think “equal to” everything fa-
miliar to you. The result is that you create more of the same; you
hardwire your brain to reflect the problems, personal conditions,
and circumstances in your life. So to change, you must be greater
than all things physical in your life.
— Chapter 3: Overcoming Your Body continues to look

at how we unconsciously live by a set of memorized behaviors,
thoughts, and emotional reactions, all running like computer
programs behind the scenes of our conscious awareness. That’s
why it is not enough to “think positive,” because most of who we
are might reside subconsciously as negativity in the body. By the
end of this book, you will know how to enter into the operating
system of the subconscious mind and make permanent changes
where those programs exist.
— Chapter 4: Overcoming Time examines how we either

live in the anticipation of future events or repeatedly revisit past
memories (or both) until the body begins to believe it is living
in a time other than the present moment. The latest research
supports the notion that we have a natural ability to change the
brain and body by thought alone, so that it looks biologically like
some future event has already happened. Because you can make
thought more real than anything else, you can change who you
are from brain cell to gene, given the right understanding. When
you learn how to use your attention and access the present, you
will enter through the door to the quantum field, where all
potentials exist.
— Chapter 5: Survival vs. Creation illustrates the distinction

between living in survival and living in creation. Living in
survival entails living in stress and functioning as a materialist,
believing that the outer world is more real than the inner world.
When you are under the gun of the fight-or-flight nervous
system, being run by its cocktail of intoxicating chemicals, you
are programmed to be concerned only about your body, the
xxi
things or people in your environment, and your obsession with

time. Your brain and body are out of balance. You are living
a predictable life. However, when you are truly in the elegant
state of creation, you are no body, no thing, no time—you forget
about yourself. You become pure consciousness, free from the
chains of the identity that needs the outer reality to remember
who it thinks it is.
Part II: Your Brain and Meditation
— In Chapter 6: Three Brains: Thinking to Doing to Being,

you will embrace the concept that you have three “brains”
that allow you to move from thinking to doing to being. Even
better, when you focus your attention to the exclusion of your
environment, your body, and time, you can easily move from
thinking to being without having to do anything. In that state of
mind, your brain does not distinguish between what is happening
in the outer world of reality and what is happening in the inner
world of your mind. Thus, if you can mentally rehearse a desired
experience via thought alone, you will experience the emotions
of that event before it has physically manifested. Now you are
moving into a new state of being, because your mind and body are
working as one. When you begin to feel like some potential future
reality is happening to you in the moment that you are focusing
on it, you are rewriting your automatic habits, attitudes, and other
unwanted subconscious programs.
— Chapter 7: The Gap explores how to break free from the

emotions that you’ve memorized—which have become your per-
sonality—and how to close the gap between who you really are in
your inner, private world and how you appear in the outer, social
world. We all reach a certain point when we stop learning and
realize that nothing external can take away those familiar feelings
from our past. If you can predict the feeling of every experience
in your life, there is no room for anything new to occur, because
xxii
Introduction
you are viewing your life from the past instead of the future. This
is the juncture point where the soul either breaks free or falls into
oblivion. You will learn to liberate your energy in the form of
emotions, and thus narrow the gap between how you appear and
who you are. Ultimately, you will create transparency. When how
you appear is who you are, you are truly free.
— Part II concludes with Chapter 8: Meditation, Demysti-

fying the Mystical, and Waves of Your Future, in which my
purpose is to demystify meditation so that you know what you
are doing and why. Discussing brain-wave technology, made
simple, I show you how your brain changes electromagnetically
when you are focused versus when you are in an aroused state
due to stressors in your life. You will learn that the true purpose
of meditation is to get beyond the analytical mind and enter
into the subconscious mind so you can make real and permanent
changes. If you get up from meditation as the same person who
sat down, nothing has happened to you on any level. When you
meditate and connect to something greater, you can create and
then memorize such coherence between your thoughts and feel-
ings that nothing in your outer reality—no thing, no person, no
condition at any place or time—could move you from that level
of energy. Now you are mastering your environment, your body,
and time.
Part III: Stepping Toward Your New Destiny
All of the information in Parts I and II is provided in order to

equip you with the necessary knowledge so that when you dem-
onstrate (apply) this information in Part III, which supplies the
“how-to,” you will have a direct experience of what you’ve been
taught. Part III is all about applying yourself in an actual disci-
pline—a mindful exercise to use in your daily life. It’s a step-by-
step meditation process, created so you can actually do something
with the theories given to you.
xxiii
By the way, did your mind balk when I mentioned that

multistep process? If so, it’s not what you think. Yes, you will
learn a sequence of actions, but soon you will experience them as
one or two simple steps. After all, you probably perform multiple
actions every time you prepare to drive your car (for example, you
adjust the seat, put on your seat belt, check the mirrors, start the
car, turn on the headlights, look around, use a turn signal, apply
the brake, put the car in drive or reverse, apply pressure to the
gas pedal, and so on). Ever since you learned to drive, you have
executed this procedure easily and automatically. I assure you, the
same will be true once you learn each step in Part III.
You may be asking yourself, Why do I need to read Parts I and II?
I’ll just jump to Part III. I know, I’d probably be thinking the same.
I decided to offer the relevant knowledge in the first two Parts of
the text so that when you get to the third section, nothing will
be left to conjecture, dogma, or speculation. When you begin the
steps of the meditation, you’ll know exactly what you’re doing
and why. When you comprehend the what and the why, the more
you will know and thus the more you will know how when the time
comes. Therefore, you will have more power and intention behind
the practical experience of truly changing your mind.
By using the steps in Part III, you may be more prone to accept
your innate ability to change so-called impossible situations in
your life. You might even give yourself permission to entertain po-
tential realities that you never considered prior to your exposure
to these new concepts—you might just begin to do the uncommon!
That is my aim for you by the time you finish this book.
So if you can resist the temptation to jump ahead to Part III,
I promise that when you get there, you’ll be quite empowered
by what you learn. I’ve seen this approach work throughout the
world in the series of three workshops I lead. When people gain
the right knowledge, in such a way that they understand it com-
pletely, and then have the opportunity for effective instruction to
apply what they comprehend . . . then like magic, they can see the
xxiv
Introduction
fruits of their efforts in the form of changes that serve as feedback

in their lives.
Part III will give you the meditative skills to change something
within your mind and body and to produce an effect outside of
you. Once you can notice what you did inside of you that pro-
duced an outcome outside of you, you’ll do it again. When a new
experience manifests in your life, you’ll embrace the energy you
feel in the form of an elevated emotion such as empowerment,
awe, or immense gratitude; and that energy will drive you to do it
again and again. Now you are on the path to true evolution.
Each meditation step delineated in Part III is associated with
a piece of meaningful information presented earlier in the book.
Because you’ll have cultivated the meaning behind exactly what
you’re doing, there should be no ambiguity that might cause you
to lose your vision.
Like many skills you’ve learned, in the beginning it may take
all of your conscious effort to stay focused as you learn how to
meditate to evolve your brain. In the process, you must restrain
yourself from your typical behaviors and maintain your thoughts
on what you are doing, without wandering to extraneous stimuli,
so your actions are aligned with your intention.
Just as you might have experienced when you first learned to
cook Thai food, play golf, dance the salsa, or drive a stick shift, the
newness of the endeavor will require you to practice this ability
continually, training both mind and body to memorize each step.
Remember, most types of instruction are formatted in bite-size
chunks so that the mind and body can begin to work together.
Once you “get it,” all the individual steps you kept reviewing
merge into one smooth process. The methodical, linear approach
seamlessly flows into a holistic, effortless, unified demonstration.
This is the point of personal ownership. At times, the effort this
takes can be tedious. But if you persist with a certain amount of
will and energy, in time you’ll enjoy the results.
xxv
When you know that you know “how” to do something, you’re

on your way to mastering it. I am overjoyed to say that many
people around the world are already using the knowledge in this
book to make demonstrable changes in their lives. It is my sincere
passion that you, too, break the habit of being yourself and create
the new life you desire.
Let’s get started. . . .
}}}}
xxvi
PA R T I
THE
SCIENCE
OF YOU
CHAPTER ONE
THE QUANTUM YOU

Early physicists divided the world into matter and thought,
and later, matter and energy. Each member of those pairs was con-
sidered to be entirely separate from the other . . . but they’re not!
Nevertheless, this mind/matter duality shaped our early world-
view—that reality was essentially predetermined and that people
could do little to change things through their own actions, let
alone their thoughts.
Fast-forward to our current understanding—that we are part
of a vast, invisible field of energy, which contains all possible reali-
ties and responds to our thoughts and our feelings. Just as today’s
scientists are exploring the relationship between thought and
matter, we are eager to do the same in our own lives. And so we
ask ourselves, Can I use my mind to create my reality? If so, is that a
skill that we can learn and use to become who we want to be, and
create the life we want to experience?
Let’s face it—none of us is perfect. Whether we’d like to make
some change to our physical self, emotional self, or spiritual self, we
all have the same desire: we want to live life as an idealized version
of who we think and believe we can be. When we stand in front
of the mirror and look at our love handles, we don’t just see that
slightly too-pudgy vision reflected in the glass. We also see, depend-
ing on our mood that day, a slimmer, fitter version of ourselves or a
heavier, chunkier version. Which of our images is real?
3
3
When we lie in bed at night reviewing our day and our ef-
forts to be a more tolerant, less reactive person, we don’t just see
the parent who lashed out at our child for failing to quietly and
quickly submit to a simple request. We envision either an angelic
self whose patience was stretched like an innocent victim on the
rack or a hideous ogre laying waste to a child’s self-esteem. Which
of those images is real?
The answer is: all of them are real—and not just those extremes,
but an infinite spectrum of images ranging from positive to nega-
tive. How can that be? For you to better understand why none of
those versions of self is more or less real than the others, I’m going
to have to shatter the outmoded understanding about the funda-
mental nature of reality and replace it with a new one.
That sounds like a major undertaking, and in some ways it is,
but I also know this: The most likely reason why you were drawn
to this book is that your past efforts to make any lasting change
in your life—physical, emotional, or spiritual—have fallen short
of the ideal of yourself that you imagined. And why those efforts
failed has more to do with your beliefs about why your life is the
way it is than with anything else, including a perceived lack of
will, time, courage, or imagination.
Always, in order to change, we have to come to a new under-
standing of self and the world so that we can embrace new knowl-
edge and have new experiences.
That is what reading this book will do for you.
Your past shortfalls can be traced, at their root, to one major
oversight: you haven’t committed yourself to living by the truth that
your thoughts have consequences so great that they create your reality.
The fact is that we are all blessed; we all can reap the benefits
of our constructive efforts. We don’t have to settle for our pres-
ent reality; we can create a new one, whenever we choose to. We
all have that ability, because for better or worse, our thoughts do
influence our lives.
I’m sure you’ve heard that before, but I wonder whether most
people really believe this statement on a gut level. If we truly
4
The Quantum You
embraced the notion that our thoughts produce tangible effects

in our lives, wouldn’t we strive to never let one thought slip by us
that we didn’t want to experience? And wouldn’t we focus our at-
tention on what we want, instead of continually obsessing about
our problems?
Think about it: if you really knew that this principle were true,
would you ever miss a day in intentionally creating your desired
destiny?
To Change Your Life, Change Your

Beliefs about the Nature of Reality
I hope this book will shift your view of how our world oper-
ates, convince you that you are more powerful than you knew,
and inspire you to demonstrate the understanding that what you
think and believe has a profound effect on your world.
Until you break from the way you see your present reality, any
change in your life will always be haphazard and transitory. You
have to overhaul your thinking about why things happen in order
to produce enduring and desired outcomes. To do that, you’ll need
to be open to a new interpretation of what is real and true.
To help you shift into this mode of thought and begin to cre-
ate a life of your choosing, I have to begin with a bit of cosmol-
ogy (the study of the structure and dynamics of the universe).
But don’t be alarmed—we’re merely going to skim through “The
Nature of Reality 101” and how some of our views about it have
evolved to reach our present understanding. All of this is to ex-
plain (of necessity, in a brief and simple way) how it is possible
that your thoughts shape your destiny.
This chapter just might test your willingness to abandon ideas
that have in a sense been programmed into you for many years on
a conscious and subconscious level. Once you gain a new concep-
tion of the fundamental forces and elements that constitute real-
ity, it won’t fit into that old perception in which the linear and the
orderly rule the day. Be prepared to experience some fundamental
shifts in understanding.
5
In fact, as you begin to embrace this new outlook, your very

makeup as a human being will change. It is my wish that you will
no longer be the same person you were when you began.
Obviously, I’m about to challenge you, but I want you to know
that I’m entirely empathetic, because I too have had to let go of
what I thought was true and leap into the unknown. To ease into
this new way of thinking about the nature of our world, let’s see
how our worldview was shaped by the early belief that mind and
matter were separate things.
Always Matter, Never Mind?

Always Mind, Never Matter?
Connecting the dots between the outer, physical world of the

observable and the inner, mental world of thought has always pre-
sented quite a challenge to scientists and philosophers. To many
of us, even today, the mind appears to have little or no measurable
effects on the world of matter. Although we’d probably agree that
the world of matter creates consequences affecting our minds,
how can our minds possibly produce any physical changes affect-
ing the solid things in our lives? Mind and matter appear to be
separate . . . that is, unless there’s a shift in our understanding
about the way physical, solid things actually exist.
Well, there has been such a shift, and to trace its beginnings,
we don’t have to go back very far. For much of what historians
consider modern times, humanity believed that the nature of
the universe was orderly, and thus predictable and explainable.
Consider 17th-century mathematician and philosopher René
Descartes, who developed many concepts that still have great
relevance to mathematics and other fields (does I think, therefore
I am ring any bells?). In retrospect, however, one of his theories
ultimately did more harm than good. Descartes was a proponent of
the mechanistic model of the universe—a view that the universe
is controlled by predictable laws.
When it came to human thought, Descartes faced a real chal-
lenge—the human mind possessed too many variables to neatly
6
The Quantum You
fit into any laws. Since he couldn’t unify his understanding of the
physical world with that of the mind, but he had to account for
the presence of both, Descartes played a nifty mind game (pun
intended). He said that the mind was not subject to laws of the
objective, physical world, so it was completely outside the bounds
of scientific inquiry. The study of matter was the jurisdiction of
science (always matter, never mind)—whereas the mind was God’s
instrument, so the study of it fell to religion (always mind, never
matter).
Essentially, Descartes started a belief system that imposed a du-
ality between the concepts of mind and matter. For centuries, that
division stood as the accepted understanding of the nature of reality.
Helping to perpetuate Descartes’s beliefs were the experiments
and theories of Sir Isaac Newton. The English mathematician
and scientist not only solidified the concept of the universe as a
machine, but he produced a set of laws stating that human beings
could precisely determine, calculate, and predict the orderly ways
in which the physical world would operate.
According to the “classical” Newtonian physics model, all
things were considered solid. For example, energy could be ex-
plained as a force to move objects or to change the physical state
of matter. But as you will see, energy is much more than an out-
side force exerted on material things. Energy is the very fabric of
all things material, and is responsive to mind.
By extension, the work of Descartes and Newton established a
mind-set that if reality operated on mechanistic principles, then
humanity had little influence on outcomes. All of reality was pre-
determined. Given that outlook, is it any wonder that human be-
ings struggled with the idea that their actions mattered, let alone
entertained the notion that their thoughts mattered or that free
will played any part in the grand scheme of things? Don’t many
of us still labor today (subconsciously or consciously) under the
assumption that we humans are often little more than victims?
Considering that these cherished beliefs held sway for centu-
ries, it took some revolutionary thought to counter Descartes and
Newton.
7
Einstein: Not Just Rocking the Boat—

Rocking the Universe
About 200 years after Newton, Albert Einstein produced his fa-
mous equation E = mc2, demonstrating that energy and matter are
so fundamentally related that they are one and the same. Essen-
tially, his work showed that matter and energy are completely inter-
changeable. This directly contradicted Newton and Descartes, and
ushered in a new understanding of how the universe functions.
Einstein didn’t single-handedly crumble our previous view of
the nature of reality. But he did undermine its foundation, and
that eventually led to the collapse of some of our narrow, rigid
ways of thinking. His theories set off an exploration of the puz-
zling behavior of light. Scientists then observed that light some-
times behaves like a wave (when it bends around a corner, for
example), and at other times, it behaves like a particle. How could
light be both a wave and a particle? According to the outlook of
Descartes and Newton, it couldn’t—a phenomenon had to be ei-
ther one or the other.
Quickly, it became clear that the dualistic Cartesian/Newto-
nian model was flawed at the most basic level of all: the subatomic.
(Subatomic refers to the parts—electrons, protons, neutrons, and
so on—that make up atoms, which are the building blocks of all
things physical.) The most fundamental components of our so-
called physical world are both waves (energy) and particles (physi-
cal matter), depending on the mind of the observer (we’ll come
back to that). To understand how the world works, we had to look
to its tiniest components.
Thus, out of these particular experiments, a new field of sci-
ence was born, called quantum physics.
8
The Quantum You
The Solid Ground We Stand On . . . Isn’t
This change was a complete reimagining of the world we’d

thought we lived in, and it led to the proverbial rug being pulled
out from under our feet—feet we used to think were planted on
solid ground. How so? Think back to those old toothpick-and-
Styrofoam-ball models of the atom. Before quantum physics came
along, people believed that an atom was made of a relatively solid
nucleus with smaller, less substantial objects either located in or
around it. The very idea that with a powerful enough instrument
we could measure (calculate the mass of) and count (number) the
subatomic particles that made up an atom made them seem as
inert as cows grazing in a pasture. Atoms seemed to be made of
solid stuff, right?
Figure 1A. The “old-school” classical Newtonian version of an atom.

The focus is primarily on the material.
9
Nothing could be further from the truth as revealed by the

quantum model. Atoms are mostly empty space; atoms are en-
ergy. Think about this: everything physical in your life is not solid
matter—rather, it’s all fields of energy or frequency patterns of
information. All matter is more “no thing” (energy) than “some
thing” (particles).
Figure 1B. The “new-school” quantum version of an atom with an electron

cloud. The atom is 99.99999 percent energy and .00001 percent matter.
It’s just about nothing, materially.
10
The Quantum You
Figure 1C. This is the most realistic model of any atom.

It is “no thing” materially, but all things potentially.
Another Puzzle: Subatomic Particles and

Larger Objects Play by Different Rules
But this alone wasn’t enough to explain the nature of reality.

Einstein and others had another puzzle to solve—matter didn’t
always seem to behave in the same ways. When physicists began
observing and measuring the tiny world of the atom, they
noticed that at the subatomic level the fundamental elements of
the atom didn’t obey the laws of classical physics the way that
larger objects did.
Events involving objects in the “large” world were predictable,
reproducible, and consistent. When that legendary apple fell from
a tree and moved toward the center of the earth until it collided
11
with Newton’s head, its mass accelerated with a consistent force.

But electrons, as particles, behaved in unpredictable, unusual
ways. When they interacted with the nucleus of the atom and
moved toward its center, they gained and lost energy, appeared
and disappeared, and seemed to show up all over the place without
regard to the boundaries of time and space.
Did the world of the small and the world of the large operate
under very different sets of rules? Since subatomic particles like
electrons were the building blocks of everything in nature, how
could they be subject to one set of rules, and the things they made
up behave according to another set of rules?
From Matter to Energy:

Particles Pull Off the Ultimate Vanishing Act
At the level of electrons, scientists can measure energy-

dependent characteristics such as wavelength, voltage potentials,
and the like, but these particles have a mass that is so infinitesi-
mally small and exists so temporarily as to be almost nonexistent.
This is what makes the subatomic world unique. It possesses
not just physical qualities, but also energetic qualities. In truth,
matter on a subatomic level exists as a momentary phenomenon.
It’s so elusive that it constantly appears and disappears, appearing
into three dimensions—in time and space—and disappearing
into nothing—into the quantum field, in no space, no time—
transforming from particle (matter) to wave (energy), and vice
versa. But where do particles go when they vanish into thin air?
12
The Quantum You
Figure 1D. The electron exists as a wave of probability in one moment, and
then in the next moment appears as a solid particle, then disappears
into nothing, and then reappears at another location.
The Creation of Reality:

Energy Responds to Mindful Attention
Consider again that old-school toothpick-and-Styrofoam-ball

model of how atoms were constructed. Back then, weren’t we led to
believe that electrons orbited about the nucleus like planets around
the sun? If so, we could pinpoint their location, couldn’t we? The
13
answer is yes, in a manner of speaking, but the reason is not at all

what we used to think.
What quantum physicists discovered was that the person ob-
serving (or measuring) the tiny particles that make up atoms af-
fects the behavior of energy and matter. Quantum experiments
demonstrated that electrons exist simultaneously in an infinite
array of possibilities or probabilities in an invisible field of energy.
But only when an observer focuses attention on any location of
any one electron does that electron appear. In other words, a par-
ticle cannot manifest in reality—that is, ordinary space-time as we
know it—until we observe it.1
Quantum physics calls this phenomenon “collapse of the wave
function” or the “observer effect.” We now know that the moment
the observer looks for an electron, there is a specific point in time
and space when all probabilities of the electron collapse into a
physical event. With this discovery, mind and matter can no lon-
ger be considered separate; they are intrinsically related, because
subjective mind produces measurable changes on the objective,
physical world.
Are you beginning to see why this chapter is titled “The Quan-
tum You”? At the subatomic level, energy responds to your mind-
ful attention and becomes matter. How would your life change if
you learned to direct the observer effect and to collapse infinite
waves of probability into the reality that you choose? Could you
get better at observing the life you want?
An Infinite Number of Possible Realities

Await the Observer
So ponder this: Everything in the physical universe is made

up of subatomic particles such as electrons. By their very nature,
these particles, when they exist as pure potential, are in their
wave state while they are not being observed. They are potentially
“every thing” and “no thing” until they are observed. They exist
everywhere and nowhere until they are observed. Thus, everything
in our physical reality exists as pure potential.
14
The Quantum You
If subatomic particles can exist in an infinite number of pos-

sible places simultaneously, we are potentially capable of collaps-
ing into existence an infinite number of possible realities. In other
words, if you can imagine a future event in your life based on any
one of your personal desires, that reality already exists as a possi-
bility in the quantum field, waiting to be observed by you. If your
mind can influence the appearance of an electron, then theoreti-
cally it can influence the appearance of any possibility.
This means that the quantum field contains a reality in
which you are healthy, wealthy, and happy, and possess all of
the qualities and capabilities of the idealized self that you hold
in your thoughts. Stay with me and you will see that with willful
attention, sincere application of new knowledge, and repeated
daily efforts, you can use your mind, as the observer, to collapse
quantum particles and organize a vast number of subatomic
waves of probability into a desired physical event called an expe-
rience in your life.
Like clay, the energy of infinite possibilities is shaped by con-
sciousness: your mind. And if all matter is made of energy, it
makes sense that consciousness (“mind,” in this case, as New-
ton and Descartes called it) and energy (“matter,” according to
the quantum model) are so intimately related that they are one.
Mind and matter are completely entangled. Your consciousness
(mind) has effects on energy (matter) because your conscious-
ness is energy and energy has consciousness. You are powerful
enough to influence matter because at the most elementary level,
you are energy with a consciousness. You are mindful matter.
In the quantum model, the physical universe is an immate-
rial, interconnected, unified field of information, potentially every
thing but physically no thing. The quantum universe is just wait-
ing for a conscious observer (you or me) to come along and influ-
ence energy in the form of potential matter by using the mind and
consciousness (which are themselves energy) to make waves of en-
ergetic probabilities coalesce into physical matter. Just as the wave
of possibility of the electron manifests as a particle within a spe-
cific momentary event, we as observers cause a particle or groups
15
of particles to manifest physical experiences in the form of events

in our lives.
This is crucial to understanding how you can cause an effect
or make a change in your life. When you learn how to sharpen
your skills of observation to intentionally affect your destiny, you
are well on your way toward living the ideal version of your life by
becoming the idealized version of your self.
We Are Connected to Everything in the Quantum Field
Like everything else in the universe, we are, in a sense, con-

nected to a sea of information in a dimension beyond physical
space and time. We don’t need to be touching or even in close
proximity to any physical elements in the quantum field to affect
or be affected by them. The physical body is organized patterns of
energy and information, which is unified with everything in the
quantum field.
You, like all of us, broadcast a distinct energy pattern or sig-
nature. In fact, everything material is always emitting specific
patterns of energy. And this energy carries information. Your fluc-
tuating states of mind consciously or unconsciously change that
signature on a moment-to-moment basis because you are more
than just a physical body; you are a consciousness using a body
and a brain to express different levels of mind.
Another way to look at how we humans and the quantum
field are interconnected is through the concept of quantum en-
tanglement, or quantum nonlocal connection. Essentially, once two
particles can be initially linked in some way, they will always be
bonded together beyond space and time. As a result, anything that
is done to one will be done to the other even though they are spa-
tially separated from one another. This means that since we too
are made up of particles, we are all implicitly connected beyond
space and time. What we do unto others, we do unto ourselves.
Think about the implications of this. If you can wrap your
mind around this concept, then you’d have to agree that the
16
The Quantum You
“you” that exists in a probable future is already connected to the

“you” in this now, in a dimension beyond this time and space.
Stay tuned . . . by the end of this book, that idea just might seem
normal to you!
Weird Science: Can We Affect the Past?
Since we’re all interconnected across distance and time, does

this suggest that our thoughts and feelings can influence events in
our past as well as those we desire in our future?
In July 2000, Israeli doctor Leonard Leibovici conducted a
double-blind, randomized controlled trial involving 3,393 hospi-
tal patients, divided into a control group and an “intercession”
group. He set out to see whether prayer could have an effect on
their condition.2 Prayer experiments are great examples of mind
affecting matter at a distance. But stay with me here, because
everything is not always what it seems.
Leibovici selected patients who had suffered sepsis (an infec-
tion) while hospitalized. He randomly designated half the patients
to have prayers said for them, while the other half were not prayed
for. He compared the results in three categories: how long fever
lasted, length of hospital stay, and how many died as a result of
the infection.
The prayed-for benefited from an earlier decrease in fever and
a shorter hospitalization time; the difference in the number of
deaths among the prayed-for and not-prayed-for groups was not
statistically significant, although better in the prayed-for group.
That’s a powerful demonstration of the benefits of prayer and
how we can send an intention out into the quantum field through
our thoughts and feelings. However, there’s one additional ele-
ment to this story that you should know about. Did it strike you
as slightly odd that in July 2000, a hospital would have more than
3,000 cases of infection at once? Was it a very poorly sterilized
place, or was some kind of contagion running rampant?
17
Actually, those who were praying weren’t praying for patients

who were infected in 2000. Instead, unbeknownst to them, they
were praying for lists of people who had been in the hospital from
1990 to 1996—four to ten years prior to the experiment! The
prayed-for patients actually got better during the 1990s from the experi-
ment conducted years later. Let me say this another way: the patients
who were prayed for in 2000 all showed measurable changes in
health, but those changes took effect years before.
A statistical analysis of this experiment proved that these ef-
fects were far beyond coincidence. This demonstrates that our in-
tentions, our thoughts and feelings, and our prayers not only affect
our present or future, but they can actually affect our past as well.
Now, this leads to the question: if you were to pray (or focus
on an intention) for a better life for yourself, could it affect your
past, present, and future?
The quantum law says that all potentials exist simultaneously.
Our thinking and our feelings affect all aspects of life, beyond
both space and time.
Our State of Being or State of Mind:

When Mind and Body Are One
Please note: Throughout this book, I will refer interchange-

ably to your having and creating a state of being or a state of mind.
For example, we could say that how you think and how you feel
create a state of being. I want you to understand that when I use
the terms state of being and state of mind, your physical body is a
part of that state. In fact, as you will see later on, many people
exist in a state in which the body has “become” the mind, when
they are ruled almost exclusively by the body and how it feels. So
when I talk about the observer having an effect, it is not just the
brain that is at work influencing matter, but the body as well. It is
your state of being (when mind and body are one), as an observer,
which has effects on the external world.
18
The Quantum You
Thoughts + Feelings Produce Test-Tube Results
We communicate with the quantum field primarily through

our thoughts and feelings. Since our thoughts are themselves
energy—as you know, the electrical impulses the brain generates
can easily be measured by devices such as an EEG—they are one
of the primary means by which we send out signals into the field.
Before I go into greater detail on how this works, I want to share
with you a remarkable study that demonstrates how our thoughts
and feelings influence matter.
Cellular biologist Glen Rein, Ph.D., conceived of a series of ex-
periments to test healers’ ability to affect biological systems. Since
DNA is more stable than substances such as cells or bacterial cul-
tures, he decided to have healers hold test tubes containing DNA.3
This study took place at the HeartMath Research Center in Cali-
fornia. The folks there have conducted extraordinary research into
the physiology of emotions, heart-brain interactions, and much
more. Essentially, they and others have documented a specific link
between our emotional states and our heart rhythms. When we
have negative emotions (such as anger and fear), our heart rhythms
become erratic and disorganized. In contrast, positive emotions
(love and joy, for instance) produce highly ordered, coherent pat-
terns that HeartMath researchers refer to as heart coherence.
In Dr. Rein’s experiment, he first studied a group of ten indi-
viduals who were well practiced in using techniques that Heart-
Math teaches to build heart-focused coherence. They applied the
techniques to produce strong, elevated feelings such as love and
appreciation, then for two minutes, they held vials containing DNA
samples suspended in deionized water. When those samples were
analyzed, no statistically significant changes had occurred.
A second group of trained participants did the same thing,
but instead of just creating positive emotions (a feeling) of love and
appreciation, they simultaneously held an intention (a thought) to
either wind or unwind the strands of DNA. This group produced
statistically significant changes in the conformation (shape) of the
DNA samples. In some cases the DNA was wound or unwound as
much as 25 percent!
19
A third group of trained subjects held a clear intent to change

the DNA, but they were instructed not to enter into a positive emo-
tional state. In other words, they were only using thought (inten-
tion) to affect matter. The result? No changes to the DNA samples.
The positive emotional state that the first group entered did
nothing by itself to the DNA. Another group’s clearly held inten-
tional thought, unaccompanied by emotion, also had no impact.
Only when subjects held both heightened emotions and clear objectives
in alignment were they able to produce the intended effect.
An intentional thought needs an energizer, a catalyst—and
that energy is an elevated emotion. Heart and mind working to-
gether. Feelings and thoughts unified into a state of being. If a
state of being can wind and unwind strands of DNA in two min-
utes, what does this say about our ability to create reality?
What the HeartMath experiment demonstrates is that the
quantum field doesn’t respond simply to our wishes—our emo-
tional requests. It doesn’t just respond to our aims—our thoughts.
It only responds when those two are aligned or coherent—that is,
when they are broadcasting the same signal. When we combine
an elevated emotion with an open heart and a conscious intention
with clear thought, we signal the field to respond in amazing ways.
The quantum field responds not to what we want; it responds to who
we are being.
Thoughts and Feelings: Broadcasting Our

Electromagnetic Signal to the Quantum Field
Since every potential in the universe is a wave of probabil-

ity that has an electromagnetic field and is energetic in nature, it
makes sense that our thoughts and feelings are no exception.
I find it a useful model to think of thoughts as the electrical
charge in the quantum field and feelings as the magnetic charge in
the field.4 The thoughts we think send an electrical signal out into
the field. The feelings we generate magnetically draw events back
to us. Together, how we think and how we feel produces a state
20
The Quantum You
of being, which generates an electromagnetic signature that influ-

ences every atom in our world. This should prompt us to ask, What
am I broadcasting (consciously or unconsciously) on a daily basis?
All potential experiences exist as electromagnetic signatures
in the quantum field. There are an infinite number of potential
electromagnetic signatures—for genius, for wealth, for freedom,
for health—that already exist as a frequency pattern of energy.
If you could create a new electromagnetic field by changing your
state of being, which matches that potential in the quantum field
of information, is it possible that your body would be drawn to
that event or that event would find you?
Figure 1E. All potential experiences exist in the quantum field as a sea of infinite
possibilities. When you change your electromagnetic signature (by changing how
you think and feel) to match one that already exists in the field, your body
will be drawn to that event, you will move into a new line of time,
or the event will find you in your new reality.
21
To Experience Change,
Observe a New Outcome with a New Mind
Quite simply, our routine, known thoughts and feelings per-

petuate the same state of being, which creates the same behaviors,
and creates the same reality. So if we want to change some aspect of
our reality, we have to think, feel, and act in new ways; we have to
“be” different in terms of our responses to experiences. We have to
“become” someone else. We have to create a new state of mind . . .
we need to observe a new outcome with that new mind.
From a quantum standpoint, we have to create a different state
of being as an observer and generate a new electromagnetic sig-
nature. When we do, we will match a potential reality in the field
that exists only as an electromagnetic potential. Once that match
exists between who we are being/what we are broadcasting and the
electromagnetic potential in the field, we will be pulled toward that
potential reality, or it will find us.
I know that it’s frustrating when life seems to produce an end-
less succession of minor variations on the same negative outcomes.
But as long as you stay the same person, as long as your electromag-
netic signature remains the same, you can’t expect a new outcome.
To change your life is to change your energy—to make an elemental
change in your mind and emotions.
If you want a new outcome, you will have to break the habit of
being yourself, and reinvent a new self.
Change Requires Coherence:

Align Your Thoughts and Feelings
What do your state of being and a laser have in common?

I’ll make this connection to illustrate another thing you need to
know if you want to change your life.
A laser is an example of a very coherent signal. When physicists
talk about a coherent signal, they are referring to a signal made up
of waves that are “in phase”—their troughs (low points) and crests
(high points) are parallel. When those waves are coherent, they
are much more powerful.
22
The Quantum You
Figure 1F. When waves are in phase and rhythmic, they are more powerful
than when they are out of phase.
Waves in a signal are either aligned or unaligned, coherent or

incoherent. The same goes for your thoughts and feelings. How
many times have you tried to create something, thinking in your
mind that the end result was possible but feeling in your heart
that it wasn’t? What was the result of that incoherent/out-of-phase
signal that you were sending? Why is it that nothing manifested?
As you just saw with the HeartMath study, quantum creating only
works when your thoughts and feelings are aligned.
Just as the waves in a signal are much more powerful when
they are coherent, the same is true of you when your thoughts and
your feelings are aligned. When you hold clear, focused thoughts
about your purpose, accompanied by your passionate emotional
engagement, you broadcast a stronger electromagnetic signal that
pulls you toward a potential reality that matches what you want.
23
I frequently talk to my workshop audiences about my grand-

mother, a woman I adored. She was old-school Italian, as steeped
in Catholic guilt as she was in the tradition of making tomato
gravy to spoon on pasta. She prayed constantly for things and
deliberately thought about a new life, but the guilt that had been
instilled in her throughout her upbringing confused the signal
she was sending. She only manifested more reasons to feel guilty.
If your intentions and desires haven’t produced consistent re-
sults, you’ve probably been sending an incoherent, mixed mes-
sage into the field. You may want wealth, you may think “wealthy”
thoughts, but if you feel poor, you aren’t going to attract finan-
cial abundance to yourself. Why not? Because thoughts are the
language of the brain, and feelings are the language of the body.
You’re thinking one way and feeling another way. And when the
mind is in opposition to the body (or vice versa), the field won’t
respond in any consistent way.
Instead, when mind and body are working together, when our
thoughts and feelings are aligned, when we are in a new state of
being, then we are sending a coherent signal on the airwaves of
the invisible.
Why Quantum Outcomes Should Come as a Surprise
Now let’s fill in another piece of the puzzle. To change our re-
ality, those outcomes that we attract to ourselves have to surprise,
even astonish, us in the way in which they come about. We should
never be able to predict how our new creations will manifest; they
must catch us off guard. They have to wake us up from the dream
of the routine reality that we’ve grown accustomed to. These man-
ifestations should leave us with no doubt that our consciousness
made contact with the quantum field of intelligence, so we are
inspired to do this again. That is the joy of the creative process.
Why should you want a quantum surprise? If you can predict
an event, it is nothing new—it’s routine, automatic; and you have
experienced it many times before. If you can predict it, the same
24
The Quantum You
you produced the same familiar outcome. In fact, if you’re try-

ing to control how an outcome will occur, you just went “Newto-
nian.” Newtonian (classical) physics was about trying to anticipate
and predict events; it was all about cause and effect.
What does “going Newtonian” mean when applied to your abil-
ity to create? It’s when the external environment is controlling your
internal environment (thinking/feeling). That’s cause and effect.
Instead, change your internal environment—the way you
think and feel—and then see how the external environment is
altered by your efforts. Strive to create an unknown, new future
experience. Then when an unforeseen event occurs in your favor,
you will be pleasantly surprised. You just became a quantum cre-
ator. You just went from “cause and effect” to “causing an effect.”
Hold a clear intention of what you want, but leave the “how”
details to the unpredictable quantum field. Let it orchestrate an
event in your life in a way that is just right for you. If you’re going
to expect anything, expect the unexpected. Surrender, trust, and
let go of how a desired event will unfold.
This is the biggest hurdle for most to overcome, because we
human beings always want to control a future reality (unknown)
by trying to re-create how it occurred in a past reality (known).
Quantum Creating:
Giving Thanks Before Receiving an Outcome
I’ve just talked about aligning our thoughts and feelings to

produce the result we want . . . yet in the process, letting go of the
details surrounding how that event will come about. That’s a leap
of faith, and it is necessary if we are to exchange a life of hum-
drum, predictable outcomes for a joyful life of new experiences
and quantum surprises.
But we’ll need to make yet another leap of faith to bring what
we want into reality.
Under what circumstances are you typically grateful? You may
answer, I’m grateful for my family, the nice home I have, my friends, and
25
my job. What those things have in common is that they’re already

in your life.
Generally, we are grateful for something that already happened
or is already present in our lives. You and I have been conditioned
into believing that we need a reason for joy, a motivation to feel
gratitude, grounds to be in a state of love. That’s relying on external
reality to make us feel different internally; it’s Newton’s model.
The new model of reality challenges us, as quantum cre-
ators, to change something within us—in mind and body, in our
thoughts and feelings—before we can experience the physical evi-
dence with our senses.
Can you give thanks and feel the elevated emotions associated
with a desired event before it occurs? Can you imagine that reality
so completely that you begin to be in that future life now?
In terms of quantum creating, can you give thanks for some-
thing that exists as a potential in the quantum field but has not
yet happened in your reality? If so, you are moving from cause
and effect (waiting for something outside of you to make a change
inside of you) to causing an effect (changing something inside of
you to produce an effect outside of you).
When you are in a state of gratitude, you transmit a signal into
the field that an event has already occurred. Gratitude is more than
an intellectual thought process. You have to feel as though whatever
you want is in your reality at this very moment. Thus, your body
(which only understands feelings) must be convinced that it has the
emotional quotient of the future experience, happening to you now.
Universal Intelligence and the Quantum Field
I hope by now you agree on some basic underlying concepts

of the quantum model—that all physical reality is primarily en-
ergy existing in a vast web that is interconnected across space and
time. That web, the quantum field, holds all probabilities, which
we can collapse into reality through our thoughts (consciousness),
observation, feelings, and state of being.
26
The Quantum You
But is reality nothing but indifferent electromagnetic forces

acting on and in response to one another? Is the animating spirit
within us simply a function of biology and randomness? I’ve had
conversations with people who hold this view. Ultimately the dis-
cussion leads to a dialogue that goes something like this:
Where does the intelligence that keeps our heart beating

come from?
That’s a part of the autonomic nervous system.
Where is that system located?

The brain. The brain’s limbic system is part of
the autonomic nervous system.
And within the brain, are there specific tissues

that are responsible for keeping the heart beating?
Yes.
What are those tissues made up of?

Cells.
And what are those cells made up of?

Molecules.
What are those molecules made up of?

Atoms.
And what are those atoms made up of?

Subatomic particles.
And what are those subatomic particles primarily

composed of?
Energy.
When we arrive at the conclusion that our physiological ve-

hicle is made up of the same stuff as the rest of the universe, and
these folks bump up against the notion that what animates the
body is a form of energy—the same 99.99999 percent “nothing”
27
that constitutes the physical universe—they either shrug and walk

away or come to realize that there is something to this notion that
a unifying principle pervades all of physical reality.
Isn’t it ironic, then, that we keep all of our attention on the 0.00001
percent of reality that is physical? Are we missing something?
If this nothing consists of energy waves that carry informa-
tion, and this force organizes our physical structures and their
functioning, then it certainly makes sense to refer to the quantum
field as an invisible intelligence. And since energy is at the basis of
all physical reality, that intelligence I’ve just described to you has
organized itself into matter.
Think of the preceding conversation as a kind of template for
how this intelligence has constructed reality. The quantum field is
invisible potential energy that is able to organize itself from energy
to subatomic particles to atoms to molecules, and on up the line to
everything. From a physiological perspective, it organizes molecules
into cells into tissues into organs into systems, and finally into the
body as a whole. Put another way, this potential energy lowers itself
as a frequency of wave patterns until it appears as solid.
It is this universal intelligence that gives life to that field and
everything in it, including you and me. This power is the same
universal mind that animates every aspect of the material universe.
This intelligence keeps our hearts beating and our stomachs
digesting food and oversees an incalculable number of chemical
reactions per second that take place in every cell. Moreover, the
same consciousness prompts trees to grow fruit and causes distant
galaxies to form and collapse.
Because it exists in all places and times, and exerts its power
within us and all around us, this intelligence is both personal and
universal.
As an Extension of This Intelligence, We Can Emulate It
Understand that this universal intelligence possesses the

same awareness that makes us individuals—consciousness or
28
The Quantum You
mindfulness. Even though this power is universal and objective,

it does possess a consciousness—an awareness of self and its own
ability to move and act within the material universe.
It is also completely mindful on all levels—not just of itself but
of you and me. Because this consciousness notices everything, it
observes and pays attention to us. It is aware of our thoughts, our
dreams, our behaviors, and our desires. It “observes” everything
into physical form.
How can a consciousness that has created all of life, that ex-
pends the energy and will to consistently regulate every function
of our bodies to keep us alive, that has expressed such a deep and
abiding interest in us, be anything but pure love?
We’ve talked about two aspects of consciousness: the objec-
tive consciousness/intelligence of the field; and the subjective
consciousness that is a free-willed, self-aware individual. When
we emulate the properties of this awareness, we are becoming cre-
ators. When we feel resonance with this loving intelligence, we
become like it. This intelligence will orchestrate an event, an en-
ergetic response, to match whatever the subjective mind puts out
into the quantum field. When our will matches its will, when our
minds match its mind, when our love for life matches its love for
life, we are enacting this universal consciousness. We become the
elevated power that transcends the past, heals the present, and
opens doors to the future.
We Get Back What We Send Out Here’s how this orchestration
of events works in our lives. If we have experienced suffering, and
within our minds and bodies we hold that suffering and express
it through our thoughts and feelings, we broadcast that energetic
signature into the field. The universal intelligence responds by
sending into our lives another event that will reproduce the same
intellectual and emotional response.
Our thoughts send the signal out (I am suffering), and our emo-
tions (I am suffering) draw into our lives an event to match that
emotional frequency—that is, a good reason to suffer. In a very
real sense, we are asking for proof of the existence of universal
intelligence at all times, and it sends us feedback in our external
29
environment at all times. That is how powerful we are.

The question at the heart of this book is this: Why don’t we
send out a signal that will produce a positive outcome for us? How can
we change so that the signal we send out matches what we intend
to produce in our lives? We will change when we fully commit to
the belief that by choosing the thought/signal we send out, we
will produce an effect that is observable and unexpected.
With this objective intelligence, we are not punished for our
sins (that is, our thoughts, feelings, and actions), but by them.
When we project into the field a signal based on the thoughts
and feelings (such as suffering) produced by some undesirable
experience(s) in our past, is it any wonder that the field responds
in the same negative way?
How many times have you uttered these words, or very similar
ones: “I can’t believe it . . . why does this always happen to me?”
Based on your new understanding of the nature of reality, do
you now see that those statements reflect your acceptance of the
Newtonian/Cartesian model in which you are a victim of cause
and effect? Do you see that you are fully capable of causing an
effect yourself? Do you see that instead of responding in the man-
ner above, you could be asking yourself: How can I think, feel, and
behave differently to produce the effect/result that I want?
Our mission, then, is to willfully move into the state of con-
sciousness that allows us to connect to universal intelligence,
make direct contact with the field of possibilities, and send out a
clear signal that we truly expect to change and to see the results
that we want—in the form of feedback—produced in our lives.
Ask for Quantum Feedback
When you do create purposefully, request a sign from the

quantum consciousness that you have made contact with it. Dare
to ask for synchronicities related to your specific desired outcomes.
When you do, you are being bold enough to want to know that this
consciousness is real and that it is aware of your efforts. Once you
30
The Quantum You
accept this, then you can create in a state of joy and inspiration.
This principle asks us to lay down what we think we know,
surrender to the unknown, then observe the effects in the form of
feedback in our lives. And that is the best way we learn. When we
get positive indications (when we see our external circumstances
shift in a favorable direction), we know that whatever we did in-
side of us was right. Naturally, we’ll remember what we did so we
can do it again.
So when events begin to occur in your life, you can choose to
be like a scientist in a process of discovery. Why not monitor any
changes, to see that the universe is favorable to your efforts and
prove to yourself that you are that powerful?
So how can we connect with that state of consciousness?
Quantum Physics Is “Non-sense”
Newtonian physics postulated that there is always a linear se-

ries of interactions that are predictable and repeatable. You know:
if A + B = C, then C + D + E = F. But in the wacky world of the quan-
tum model of reality, everything is intercommunicating within
a higher-dimensional field of information that is holistically en-
tangled beyond space and time as we know it. Whew!
One reason why quantum physics is so elusive is that for years
we have been accustomed to thinking based on our senses. If we
measure and reaffirm reality with our senses, we are stuck in the
Newtonian paradigm.
Instead, the quantum model demands that our understanding
of reality not be based on our senses (quantum physics is non-sense).
In the process of creating future reality via the quantum model, our
senses should be the last to experience what the mind has created.
The very last thing we experience is sensory feedback. Why?
The quantum is a multidimensional reality that exists beyond
your senses, in a realm where there is no body, no thing, no time.
Thus, to move into that domain and create from that paradigm,
31
you’ll need to forget about your body for a little while. You’ll also
have to temporarily shift your awareness away from your exter-
nal environment—all those things that you identify with in your
life. Your spouse, your kids, your possessions, and your problems
are all part of your identity; through them, you identify with the
outer world. And finally, you will have to lose track of linear time.
That is, in the moment when you are intentionally observing a
potential future experience, you will have to be so present that
your mind no longer vacillates between memories of the past and
expectations of a “same as usual” future.
Isn’t it ironic that to influence your reality (environment), heal
your body, or change some event in your future (time), you have
to completely let go of your external world (no thing), you have
to release your awareness of your body (no body) . . . you have to
lose track of time (no time)—in effect, you have to become pure
consciousness.
Do that, and you have dominion over the environment, your
body, and time. (I affectionately call these the Big Three.) And since
the subatomic world of the field is made purely of consciousness,
you cannot enter any other way than via pure consciousness
yourself. You cannot walk through the door into the quantum
field as a “somebody”; you must enter as a “no body.”
Your brain has the innate ability to harness this skill (stay
tuned for more). When you understand that you are fully equipped
biologically to do all this, leave this world behind, and enter a new
reality beyond space and time, you will be naturally inspired to
apply it in your life.
Going Beyond Space and Time
What does it mean to be beyond space and time? These are

constructs that humans created to explain physical phenomena
involving location and our sense of the temporal. When we talk
about a glass sitting on a table, we reference it in terms of location
(where it is in space) and how long it has occupied that location.
32
The Quantum You
As humans we’re obsessed with these two conceptions: Where we

are. How long we’ve been there. How long we will remain. Where
we’ll go next. Even though time is not something that we can ac-
tually sense, we feel it passing in much the same way that we sense
our location in space: we “feel” the seconds, minutes, and hours
passing by, just as we feel our bodies pressed against our chairs
and our feet planted on the ground.
In the quantum field, the infinite probabilities for materializing
reality are beyond time and space, because a potential doesn’t
yet exist. If it doesn’t exist, it doesn’t have a location or occupy
a position temporally. Anything that doesn’t have material
existence—that hasn’t had its waves of probability collapsed into
particle reality—exists beyond space and time.
Since the quantum field is nothing but immaterial probability,
it is outside of space and time. As soon as we observe one of those
infinite probabilities and give it material reality, it acquires those
two characteristics.
To Enter the Field, Enter a Similar State
Great—we have the power to make material a reality of our

own choosing by selecting it from the quantum field. But we have
to somehow access that field. We’re always connected to it, but
how do we get the field to respond to us? If we’re constantly emit-
ting energy, and therefore sending information to the field and
receiving information from it, how do we communicate more
effectively with it?
In upcoming chapters I will talk at length about how to enter the
field. For now, what you need to know is that to enter the field, which
exists beyond space and time, you have to enter a similar state.
Do you ever have any experiences when time and space seem
to disappear? Think of those moments when you’re driving and
your thoughts are focused on some concern you have. When that
happens, you forget about your body (you are no longer aware
of how you feel in space), you forget about the environment (the
33
external world disappears), and you forget about time (you have
no idea how long you are “tranced out”).
At moments like these, you’ve been at the threshold of the
door that allows you to enter the quantum field and gain access
to working with universal intelligence. In essence, you’ve already
made thought more real than anything else.
Later on, I will provide instruction on how to move into that
state of consciousness regularly, to access the field and to commu-
nicate more directly with the universal intelligence that animates
all things.
Change Your Mind, Change Your Life
As this chapter has progressed, I’ve led you from the notion that
mind and matter are fully separable to the quantum model, which
states that they are inseparable. Mind is matter, and matter is mind.
So all those times in the past when you tried to change, maybe
your thinking was fundamentally limited. You likely believed that
it was always circumstances outside of you that needed to change:
If I didn’t have so many other commitments, I could lose the excess
weight, and then I’d be happy. We’ve all stated some variation on
that theme. If this, then that. Cause and effect.
What if you could change your mind, your thoughts, your
feelings, and your way of being, outside the bounds of time and
space? What if you could change ahead of time and see the effects
of those “internal” changes in your “external” world?
You can.
What has profoundly and positively changed my life, and the
lives of so many others, is the understanding that changing one’s
mind—and thereby having new experiences and gaining new in-
sights—is simply a matter of breaking the habit of being oneself.
When you overcome your senses, when you understand that you
are not bound by the chains of your past—when you live a life
that is greater than your body, your environment, and time—all
things are possible. The universal intelligence that animates the
34
The Quantum You
existence of all things will both surprise and delight you. It wants
nothing more than to provide you with access to all you want.
In short, when you change your mind, you change your life.
And a Child Shall Lead Them
Before we move on, I’d like to share a story that illustrates just
how powerful and effective being in contact with the greater in-
telligence can be in making change an integral part of your life.
My children, now young adults, have used a meditation similar
to the process I will describe to you in Part III of this book. As a result
of practicing these techniques, they’ve manifested some remarkable
adventures. Since their childhood, we’ve had an agreement that they
work on creating material things or events that they want to experi-
ence. However, our rule is that I don’t interfere or assist with produc-
ing the outcome. They have to create intended realities on their own,
using their minds and interacting with the quantum field.
My 20-something daughter studies art in college. It was spring-
time, and I asked what she wanted to manifest during an upcom-
ing summer break. She had a laundry list! Instead of the typical
college-student-home-for-the-summer job, she wanted to work in
Italy, learn and experience new things, visit at least six Italian cit-
ies, and spend one week in Florence, since she had friends there.
She wanted to work for the first six weeks of the summer, making
a decent wage, then spend the rest of the break at home.
I commended my daughter for her clear vision of what she
wanted, and reminded her that universal intelligence would orches-
trate the way her dream summer would manifest. She would take
care of the “what”; a greater consciousness would handle the “how.”
Since my daughter is practiced in the art of thinking and feel-
ing ahead of the actual experience, I merely reminded her to not
only set an intention every day with regard to what that summer
would look like—what people she would see, what events would
transpire, what places she would visit—but also to feel what it
would be like to experience these things. I asked her to create the
35
vision in her mind until it was so clear and real that the thought
she was thinking became the experience, and her brain’s synapses
began to wire that information as if it was a reality.
If she was still “being” the young woman in the dorm room
with a dream of going to Italy, then she was still the same person
living the same reality. So while it was still March, she had to
begin “being” that young woman who’d been in Italy for half the
summer.
“No problem,” she said. She’d had experiences like this before,
when she wanted to be in a music video and when she wanted to
experience an unlimited shopping spree. Both of these transpired
in perfect elegance.
I then reminded my daughter, “You can’t get up from your
mental creation of this experience as the same person you were
when you sat down. You have to get up from your seat as if you
just had the most amazing summer of your life.”
“I got it,” she said. She understood my reminder that each day,
she had to change to a new state of being. And after every mental
creation, she was to go about her day living in the elevated mood
of gratitude generated by having had that experience.
My daughter called a few weeks later. “Dad, the university is
offering an art history summer course in Italy. I can get the cost of
the program and all expenses down from $7,000 to $4,000. Can
you help pay for that?”
Well, it’s not that I’m an unsupportive parent, but this didn’t
strike me as what she had originally stated as her target. She was
trying to force and control the outcome of this possible destiny
instead of allowing the quantum field to orchestrate the events
in a way that was right for her. I advised her to really inhabit that
Italian trip and to think, feel, speak, and dream “in Italian” until
she got lost in the experience.
A few weeks later when she called again, her excitement was
palpable. She had been in the library, chatting with her art history
teacher, and they eventually slipped into speaking Italian; both
spoke the language fluently. At that point her teacher said, “I just
remembered. One of my colleagues needs someone to teach Level
36
The Quantum You
I Italian to some American students who will be studying in Italy

this summer.”
Of course, my daughter was hired. Get this: not only would she
be paid to teach (all expenses covered), but she would be in six dif-
ferent cities in Italy for six weeks, spend the last week in Florence,
and be able to be home for the second half of the summer. She
manifested her dream job and every aspect of her original vision.
This wasn’t a case of a young woman pursuing this oppor-
tunity with the traditional dogged determination to find a pro-
gram—searching the Internet, hounding professors, and so forth.
Instead of following cause and effect, my daughter changed her
state of being to the extent that she was causing an effect. She was
living by the quantum law.
As she electromagnetically connected to an intended destiny
that existed in the quantum, her body was then drawn to the
future event. The experience found her. The outcome was unpre-
dictable, it came in a way that she in no way expected, it was
synchronistic, and there was no doubt that it was the result of her
internal efforts.
Think about that for a moment. What opportunities are out
there waiting to find you? Who are you being in this moment . . .
and every other moment? Is your being that way going to attract
to you all that you desire?
Can you change your state of being? And once you inhabit a
new mind, can you observe a new destiny? The answers are what
the rest of this book is all about.
}}}}
37
C H A P T E R T WO
OVERCOM ING YOUR

ENVIRONMENT
By now, I trust that you’re beginning to accept the idea that
the subjective mind has an effect on the objective world. You
might even be keen to acknowledge that an observer can affect
the subatomic world and influence a specific event, just by collaps-
ing a single electron from a wave of energy into a particle. At this
point you may also believe the scientific experiments in quan-
tum mechanics I’ve discussed, which prove consciousness directly
controls the tiny world of atoms because those elements funda-
mentally are made of consciousness and energy. That’s quantum
physics in action, right?
But perhaps you’re still on the fence about the concept that
your mind has real, measurable effects in your life. You may be
asking yourself, How can my mind influence bigger events in order to
change my life? How can I collapse electrons into a specific event called a
new experience that I want to embrace in some future time? I wouldn’t
be surprised if you’re wondering about your ability to create life-size
experiences in the larger world of reality.
My goal is that you understand, and can see in action, how
there might be a scientific basis for accepting that your thoughts
can create your reality. For the doubter, though, I would like you
39
to entertain the possibility that the way you think directly affects
your life.
Keep Revisiting Familiar Thoughts and Feelings

and You Keep Creating the Same Reality
If you can accept this paradigm as a possibility, then by pure

reason, you would also have to agree that the following is pos-
sible: to create something different from what you’ve grown ac-
customed to in your personal world, you have to change the way
you routinely think and feel each day.
Otherwise, by repeatedly thinking and feeling the same way
you did the day before, and the day before that, you will continue
to create the same circumstances in your life, which will cause
you to experience the same emotions, which will influence you to
think “equal to” those emotions.
Going out on a limb here, permit me to compare this situ-
ation to the proverbial hamster in a wheel. As you continually
think about your problems (consciously or unconsciously), you
will only create more of the same type of difficulties for yourself.
And maybe you think about your problems so much because it was
your thinking that created them in the first place. Perhaps your
troubles feel so real because you constantly revisit those familiar
feelings that initially created the problem. If you insist on think-
ing and feeling equal to the circumstances in your life, you will
reaffirm that particular reality.
So in the next few chapters, I want to focus on what you need
to understand in order to change.
To Change, Be Greater Than

Your Environment, Your Body, and Time
Most people focus on three things in life: their environment,

their bodies, and time. They don’t just focus on those three ele-
ments, they think equal to them. But to break the habit of being
40
Overcoming Your Environment
yourself, you have to think greater than the circumstances of your

life, be greater than the feelings that you have memorized in your
body, and live in a new line of time.
If you want to change, you must have in your thoughts an
idealized self—a model that you can emulate, which is different
from, and better than, the “you” that exists today in your particu-
lar environment, body, and time. Every great person in history
knew how to do this, and you can attain greatness in your own
life once you master the concepts and techniques to come.
In this chapter, we’ll focus on how you can overcome your en-
vironment, and lay some groundwork for the two chapters that fol-
low, in which we’ll discuss how to overcome your body and time.
Our Memories Make Up Our Internal Environment
Before we begin talking about how you can break the habit of
being yourself, I want to appeal to your common sense for a few
moments. How did this habit of thinking and feeling in the same
way, over and over, begin?
I can only answer that by talking about the brain—the start-
ing point of our thoughts and feelings. Current neuroscientific
theory tells us that the brain is organized to reflect everything
we know in our environment. All the information we have been
exposed to throughout our lives, in the form of knowledge and
experiences, is stored in the brain’s synaptic connections.
The relationships with people we’ve known, the variety of things
we own and are familiar with, the places where we’ve visited and
lived at different times in our lives, and the myriad experiences we’ve
embraced throughout our years are all configured in the structures
of the brain. Even the vast array of actions and behaviors that we’ve
memorized and repeatedly performed throughout our lifetimes are
imprinted in the intricate folds of our gray matter.
Hence, all of our personal experiences with people and things at
specific times and places are literally reflected within the networks
of neurons (nerve cells) that make up our brains.
41
What do we collectively call all these “memories” of people

and things that we experienced at different places and times in
our lives? That’s our external environment. For the most part, our
brains are equal to our environment, a record of our personal past,
a reflection of the life we’ve lived.
During our waking hours, as we routinely interact with the
diverse stimuli in our world, our external environment activates
various brain circuits. As a consequence of that nearly automatic
response, we begin to think (and react) equal to our environment.
As the environment causes us to think, familiar networks of nerve
cells fire that reflect previous experiences already wired in the
brain. Essentially, we automatically think in familiar ways derived
from past memories.
If your thoughts determine your reality, and you keep think-
ing the same thoughts (which are a product and reflection of the
environment), then you will continue to produce the same reality
day after day. Thus, your internal thoughts and feelings exactly
match your external life, because it is your outer reality—with all
of its problems, conditions, and circumstances—that is influenc-
ing how you’re thinking and feeling in your inner reality.
Familiar Memories “Re-mind” Us

to Reproduce the Same Experiences
Every day, as you see the same people (your boss, for example,
and your spouse and kids), do the same things (drive to work,
perform your daily tasks, and do the same workout), go to the same
places (your favorite coffee shop, the grocery store you frequent,
and your place of employment), and look at the same objects (your
car, your house, your toothbrush . . . even your own body), your
familiar memories related to your known world “re-mind” you to
reproduce the same experiences.
We could say that the environment is actually controlling
your mind. Since the neuroscientific definition of mind is the
brain in action, you repeatedly reproduce the same level of mind
42
by “re-minding” yourself who you think you are in reference to

the outer world. Your identity becomes defined by everything out-
side of you, because you identify with all of the elements that
make up your external world. Thus, you’re observing your reality
with a mind that is equal to it, so you collapse the infinite waves
of probabilities of the quantum field into events that reflect the
mind you use to experience your life. You create more of the same.
You may not think that your environment and your thoughts
are that rigidly similar and your reality so easily reproduced. But
when you consider that your brain is a complete record of your
past, and your mind is the product of your consciousness, in one
sense you might always be thinking in the past. By responding with
the same brain hardware that matches what you remember, you’re
creating a level of mind that is identical to the past, because your
brain is automatically firing existing circuits to reflect everything
you already know, have experienced, and thus can predict. Ac-
cording to quantum law (which, by the way, is still working for
you), your past is now becoming your future.
Reason this: When you think from your past memories, you
can only create past experiences. As all of the “knowns” in your
life cause your brain to think and feel in familiar ways, thus
creating knowable outcomes, you continually reaffirm your life as
you know it. And since your brain is equal to your environment,
then each morning, your senses plug you into the same reality
and initiate the same stream of consciousness.
All of the sensory input that your brain processes from the
external world (that is, seeing, smelling, hearing, feeling, and
tasting) turns your brain on to think equal to everything familiar
in your reality. You open your eyes and you know the person
lying next to you is your spouse because of your past experiences
together. You hear barking outside your door, and you know it’s
your dog wanting to go out. There’s a pain in your back, and you
remember it’s the same pain you felt yesterday. You associate your
outer, familiar world with who you think you are, by remembering
yourself in this dimension, this particular time and space.
43
Our Routines: Plugging into Our Past Self
What do most of us do each morning after we’ve been plugged

into our reality by these sensory reminders of who we are, where
we are, and so forth? Well, we remain plugged into this past self by
following a highly routine, unconscious set of automatic behaviors.
For example, you probably wake up on the same side of the
bed, slip into your robe the same way as always, look into the
mirror to remember who you are, and shower following an auto-
matic routine. Then you groom yourself to look like everyone ex-
pects you to look, and brush your teeth in your usual memorized
fashion. You drink coffee out of your favorite mug and eat your
customary breakfast cereal. You put on the jacket you always wear
and unconsciously zip it up.
Next, you automatically drive to work along your accustomed,
convenient route. At work you do the familiar things that you
have memorized how to do so well. You see the same people, who
push your same emotional buttons, which causes you to think the
same thoughts about those people and your work and your life.
Later, you hurry up and go home, so you can hurry up and
eat, so you can hurry up and watch your favorite TV show, so you
can hurry up and go to bed, so you can hurry up and do it all over
again. Has your brain changed at all that day?
Why are you secretly expecting something different to show
up in your life, when you think the same thoughts, perform the
same actions, and experience the same emotions every single day?
Isn’t that the definition of insanity? All of us have fallen prey to
this type of limited life, one time or another. By now, you under-
stand the reason why.
In the preceding example, it is safe to say that you’re reproduc-
ing the same level of mind, every day. And if the quantum world
shows that the environment is an extension of your mind (and
that mind and matter are one), then as long as your mind remains
the same, your life will stay “status quo.”
Thus, if your environment remains the same and you react by
thinking in the same way, then according to the quantum model
44
of reality, shouldn’t you create more of the same? Think of it this

way: the input remains the same, so the output has to remain the
same. How, then, can you ever create anything new?
Hardwired to Hard Times
There is another possible consequence that I should mention,

if you keep firing the same neural patterns by living your life the
same way each day. Every time you respond to your familiar real-
ity by re-creating the same mind (that is, turning on the same
nerve cells to make the brain work in the same way), you “hard-
wire” your brain to match the customary conditions in your per-
sonal reality, be they good or bad.
There is a principle in neuroscience called Hebb’s law. It ba-
sically states that “nerve cells that fire together, wire together.”
Hebb’s credo demonstrates that if you repeatedly activate the same
nerve cells, then each time they turn on, it will be easier for them
to fire in unison again. Eventually those neurons will develop a
long-term relationship.1
So when I use the word hardwired, it means that clusters of
neurons have fired so many times in the same ways that they
have organized themselves into specific patterns with long-lasting
connections. The more these networks of neurons fire, the more
they wire into static routes of activity. In time, whatever the oft-
repeated thought, behavior, or feeling is, it will become an auto-
matic, unconscious habit. When your environment is influencing
your mind to that extent, your habitat becomes your habit.
So if you keep thinking the same thoughts, doing the same
things, and feeling the same emotions, you will begin to hardwire
your brain into a finite pattern that is the direct reflection of your
finite reality. Consequently, it will become easier and more natural
for you to reproduce the same mind on a moment-to-moment basis.
This innocent response cycle causes your brain and then your
mind to reinforce even further the particular reality that is your
external world. The more you fire the same circuits by reacting to
45
your external life, the more you’ll wire your brain to be equal to
your personal world. You’ll become neurochemically attached to
the conditions in your life. In time, you’ll begin to think “in the
box,” because your brain will fire a finite set of circuits that then
creates a very specific mental signature. This signature is called
your personality.
How You Form the Habit of Being Yourself
As an effect of this neural habituation, the two realities of the

inner mind and the outer world seem to become almost insep-
arable. For instance, if you can never stop thinking about your
problems, then your mind and your life will merge together as
one. The objective world is now colored by the perceptions of your
subjective mind, and thus reality continuously conforms. You be-
come lost in the illusion of the dream.
You could call this a rut, and we all fall into them, but it goes
much deeper than that: not just your actions, but also your at-
titudes and your feelings become repetitive. You have formed the
habit of being yourself by becoming, in a sense, enslaved to your
environment. Your thinking has become equal to the conditions
in your life, and thus you, as the quantum observer, are creating
a mind that only reaffirms those circumstances into your specific
reality. All you are doing is reacting to your external, known, un-
changing world.
In a very real way, you have become an effect of circumstances
outside of yourself. You have allowed yourself to give up control of
your destiny. Unlike Bill Murray’s character in the movie Ground-
hog Day, you’re not even fighting against the ceaseless monotony
of what you are like and what your life has become. Worse, you
aren’t the victim of some mysterious and unseen force that has
placed you in this repetitive loop—you are the creator of the loop.
The good news is that since you created this loop, you can choose
to end it.
46
The quantum model of reality tells us that to change our lives,

we must fundamentally change the ways we think, act, and feel.
We must change our state of being. Because how we think, feel,
and behave is, in essence, our personality, it is our personality that
creates our personal reality. So to create a new personal reality, a
new life, we must create a new personality; we must become some-
one else.
To change, then, is to “be” greater than our present circum-
stances, greater than our environment.
Greatness Is Holding Fast to a Dream,

Independent of the Environment
Before I begin to explore the ways in which you can think

greater than your environment and thus break the habit of being
yourself, I want to remind you of something.
It is possible to think greater than your present reality, and
history books are filled with names of people who have done so,
men and women such as Martin Luther King, Jr., William Wallace,
Marie Curie, Mahatma Gandhi, Thomas Edison, and Joan of Arc.
Every one of these individuals had a concept in his or her mind
of a future reality that existed as a potential in the quantum field.
This vision was alive in an inner world of possibilities beyond the
senses, and in time, each of these people made those ideas a real-
ity.
As a common thread, they all had a dream, vision, or objective
that was much larger than they were. They all believed in a future
destiny that was so real in their minds that they began to live as
if that dream were already happening. They couldn’t see, hear,
taste, smell, or feel it, but they were so possessed by their dream
that they acted in a way that corresponded to this potential real-
ity ahead of time. In other words, they behaved as if what they
envisioned was already a reality.
For example, the imperialist dictum that had India under co-
lonial rule in the early 1900s was demoralizing to Indians. Despite
47
that, Gandhi believed in a reality that wasn’t yet present in his

people’s lives. He wholeheartedly endorsed the concepts of equal-
ity, freedom, and nonviolence with undying conviction.
Even though Gandhi endorsed liberty for all, the reality of
tyranny and British control at that time was quite different. The
conventional beliefs of that era were in contrast to his hopes and
aspirations. Although the experience of liberty was not a reality
while he was initially engaged in changing India, he did not let
outward evidence of adversity sway him to give up this ideal.
For a long time, much of the feedback from the external world
didn’t show Gandhi that he was making a difference. But seldom
did he allow the conditions in his environment to control his way
of being. He believed in a future that he could not yet see or expe-
rience with his senses, but which was so alive in his mind that he
could not live any other way. He embraced a new future life while
physically living his present life. He understood that the way he
was thinking, acting, and feeling would change the current condi-
tions in his environment. And eventually, reality began to change
as a result of his efforts.
When our behaviors match our intentions, when our actions
are equal to our thoughts, when our minds and our bodies are
working together, when our words and our deeds are aligned . . .
there is an immense power behind any individual.
History’s Giants:
Why Their Dreams Were “Unrealistic Nonsense”
The greatest individuals in history were unwaveringly com-

mitted to a future destiny without any need for immediate feed-
back from the environment. It didn’t matter to them if they hadn’t
yet received any sensory indication or physical evidence of the
change they wanted; they must have “reminded” themselves daily
of the reality they were focused upon. Their minds were ahead of
their present environment, because their environment no longer
controlled their thinking. Truly, they were ahead of their time.
48
Another fundamental element shared by each of these cele-

brated beings was that they were clear in their minds about ex-
actly what they wanted to happen. (Remember, we leave the how
to a greater mind, and they must have known this.)
Now, some in their day might have called them unrealistic. In
fact, they were completely unrealistic, and so were their dreams. The
event they were embracing in thought, action, and emotion was
not realistic, because the reality had not yet occurred. The ignorant
and the cynical might also have said their vision was nonsense, and
such naysayers would have been right—a vision of future reality
was “non-sense”; it existed in a reality beyond the senses.
As another example, Joan of Arc was considered foolhardy,
even insane. Her ideas challenged the beliefs of her time and made
her a threat to the present political system. But once her vision
was made manifest, she was considered profoundly virtuous.
When one holds a dream independent of the environment,
that’s greatness. Coming up, we’ll see that overcoming the en-
vironment is inextricably linked with overcoming the body and
time. In Gandhi’s case, he was not swayed by what was happen-
ing in his outer world (environment), he didn’t worry about how
he felt and what would happen to him (body), and he didn’t care
how long it would take to realize the dream of freedom (time). He
simply knew that all of these elements would sooner or later bend
to his intentions.
For all of the giants in history, is it possible that their ideas
were thriving in the laboratory of their minds to such an extent
that to their brains, it was as though the experience had already
happened? Can you, too, change who you are by thought alone?
Mental Rehearsal:
How Our Thoughts Can Become Our Experience
Neuroscience has proven that we can change our brains—and

therefore our behaviors, attitudes, and beliefs—just by thinking
differently (in other words, without changing anything in our
environment). Through mental rehearsal (repeatedly imagining
49
performing an action), the circuits in the brain can reorganize

themselves to reflect our objectives. We can make our thoughts so
real that the brain changes to look like the event has already be-
come a physical reality. We can change it to be ahead of any actual
experience in our external world.
Here’s an example. In Evolve Your Brain, I discussed how re-
search subjects who mentally rehearsed one-handed piano exer-
cises for two hours a day for five days (never actually touching any
piano keys) demonstrated almost the same brain changes as peo-
ple who physically performed the identical finger movements on
a piano keyboard for the same length of time.2 Functional brain
scans showed that all the participants activated and expanded
clusters of neurons in the same specific area of the brain. In es-
sence, the group who mentally rehearsed practicing scales and
chords grew nearly the same number of brain circuits as the group
who physically engaged in the activity.
This study demonstrates two important points. Not only can
we change our brains just by thinking differently, but when we
are truly focused and single-minded, the brain does not know the
difference between the internal world of the mind and what we
experience in the external environment. Our thoughts can be-
come our experience.
This notion is critical to your success or failure in your en-
deavor to replace old habits (prune old neural connections) with
new ones (sprout new neural networks). So let’s look more closely
at how the same learning sequence took place in those people who
mentally practiced but never physically played any notes.
}}}
Whether we physically or mentally acquire a skill, there are four

elements that we all use to change our brains: learning knowledge,
receiving hands-on instruction, paying attention, and repetition.
Learning is making synaptic connections; instruction gets the
body involved in order to have a new experience, which further
enriches the brain. When we also pay attention and repeat our new
skill over and over again, our brains will change.
50
The group who physically played the scales and chords grew
new brain circuits because they followed this formula.
The participants who mentally rehearsed also followed this
formula, except that they never got their bodies physically in-
volved. In their minds they were easily able to conceive of them-
selves playing the piano.
Remember, after these subjects repeatedly mentally practiced,
their brains showed the same neurological changes as the partici-
pants who actually played the piano. New networks of neurons
(neural networks) were forged, demonstrating that in effect, they
had already engaged in practicing piano scales and chords with-
out actually having that physical experience. We could say that
their brains “existed in the future” ahead of the physical event of
playing the piano.
Because of our enlarged human frontal lobe and our unique
ability to make thought more real than anything else, the fore-
brain can naturally “lower the volume” from the external environ-
ment so that nothing else is being processed but a single-minded
thought. This type of internal processing allows us to become so
involved in our mental imaging that the brain will modify its
wiring without having experienced the actual event. When we
can change our minds independent of the environment and then
steadfastly embrace an ideal with sustained concentration, the
brain will be ahead of the environment.
That is mental rehearsal, an important tool in breaking the habit
of being ourselves. If we repeatedly think about something to the
exclusion of everything else, we encounter a moment when the
thought becomes the experience. When this occurs, the neural hard-
ware is rewired to reflect the thought as the experience. This is the
moment that our thinking changes our brains and thus, our minds.
To understand that neurological change can take place in the
absence of physical interactions in the environment is crucial to
our success in breaking the habit of being ourselves. Consider the
larger implications of the finger-exercise experiment. If we apply
the same process—mental rehearsal—to anything that we want to
do, we can change our brains ahead of any concrete experience.
51
If you can influence your brain to change before you experi-

ence a desired future event, you will create the appropriate neural
circuits that will enable you to behave in alignment with your
intention before it becomes a reality in your life. Through your
own repeated mental rehearsal of a better way to think, act, or be,
you will “install” the neural hardware needed to physiologically
prepare you for the new event.
In fact, you’ll do more than that. The brain’s hardware, as I use
the analogy in this book, refers to its physical structures, its anat-
omy, right down to its neurons. If you keep installing, reinforcing,
and refining your neurological hardware, the end result of that
repetition is a neural network—in effect, a new software program.
Just like computer software, this program (for example, a behav-
ior, an attitude, or an emotional state) now runs automatically.
Now you’ve cultivated the brain to be ready for your new ex-
perience, and frankly, you have the mind in place so that you can
handle the challenge. When you change your mind, your brain
changes; and when you change your brain, your mind changes.
So when the time comes to demonstrate a vision contrary to
the environmental conditions at hand, it is quite possible for you
to be already prepared to think and act, with a conviction that
is steadfast and unwavering. In fact, the more you formulate an
image of your behavior in a future event, the easier it will be for
you to execute a new way of being.
So can you believe in a future you cannot yet see or experience
with your senses but have thought about enough times in your
mind that your brain is actually changed to look like the experi-
ence has already happened ahead of the physical event in your
external environment? If so, then your brain is no longer a record
of the past, but has become a map to the future.
Now that you know you can change your brain by thinking
differently, is it possible to change your body to “look like” it too
has had an experience ahead of the actual intended circumstances?
Is your mind that powerful? Stay tuned.
}}}}
52
CHAPTER THREE
OVERCOMING
YOUR BODY
No one thinks in a vacuum. Every time you have a thought,
there is a biochemical reaction in the brain—you make a chemical.
And as you’ll learn, the brain then releases specific chemical
signals to the body, where they act as messengers of the thought.
When the body gets these chemical messages from the brain,
it complies instantly by initiating a matching set of reactions
directly in alignment with what the brain is thinking. Then the
body immediately sends a confirming message back up to the
brain that it’s now feeling exactly the way the brain is thinking.
To understand this process—how you typically think equal
to your body, and how to form a new mind—you first need to
appreciate the role that your brain and its chemistry plays in your
life. In the last few decades, we’ve discovered that the brain and the
rest of the body interact via powerful electrochemical signals. There
is an extensive chemical factory between our ears that orchestrates
a myriad of bodily functions. But relax, this is going to be “Brain
Chemistry 101,” and a few terms are all that you need to know.
All cells have receptor sites on their exterior surface that
receive information from outside their boundaries. When there is
53
a match in chemistry, frequency, and electrical charge between a

receptor site and an incoming signal from the outside, the cell gets
“turned on” to perform certain tasks.
Figure 3A. A cell with receptor sites that receive vital incoming
information from outside the cell. The signal can influence
the cell to perform myriad biological functions.
Neurotransmitters, neuropeptides, and hormones are the cause-

and-effect chemicals for brain activity and bodily functioning.
These three different types of chemicals, called ligands (the word
ligare means “to bind” in Latin), connect to, interact with, or
influence the cell in a matter of milliseconds.
54
Overcoming Your Body
— Neurotransmitters are chemical messengers that primarily

send signals between nerve cells, allowing the brain and nervous
system to communicate. There are different types of neurotrans-
mitters, and each is responsible for a particular activity. Some
excite the brain, others slow it down, while still others make us
sleepy or awake. They can tell a neuron to unhook from its cur-
rent connection or make it stick better to its present connection.
They can even change the message as it is being sent to a neuron,
rewriting it so that a different message is delivered to all the con-
nected nerve cells.
— Neuropeptides, the second type of ligand, make up the ma-

jority of these messengers. Most are manufactured in a structure
of the brain called the hypothalamus (recent studies show that
our immune system also makes them). These chemicals are passed
through the pituitary gland, which then releases a chemical mes-
sage to the body with specific instructions.
— As neuropeptides make their way through the bloodstream,

they attach to the cells of various tissues (primarily glands) and
then turn on the third type of ligand, hormones, which further
influence us to feel certain ways. Neuropeptides and hormones are
the chemicals responsible for our feelings.
For our purposes, think of neurotransmitters as chemical

messengers primarily from the brain and mind, neuropeptides as
chemical signalers that serve as a bridge between the brain and
the body to make us feel the way we think, and hormones as the
chemicals related to feelings primarily in the body.
55
Figure 3B. Neurotransmitters are diverse chemical messengers between neurons.

Neuropeptides are chemical couriers that signal different glands
of the body to make hormones.
For example, when you have a sexual fantasy, all three of

these factors are called to action. First, as you start to think a
few thoughts, your brain whips up some neurotransmitters that
turn on a network of neurons, which creates pictures in your
mind. These chemicals then stimulate the release of specific
neuropeptides into your bloodstream. Once they reach your sexual
glands, those peptides bind to the cells of those tissues; they turn
on your hormonal system, and—presto—things start happening.
56
You’ve made your fantasy thoughts so real in your mind that your
body starts to get prepared for an actual sexual experience (ahead
of the event). That’s how powerfully mind and body are related.
By the same means, if you start to think about confronting
your teenager over the new dent in the car, your neurotransmit-
ters would start the thought process in your brain to produce a
specific level of mind, your neuropeptides would chemically sig-
nal your body in a specific way, and you would begin to feel a bit
riled up. As the peptides find their way to your adrenal glands,
they would then be prompted to release the hormones adrenaline
and cortisol—and now you are definitely feeling fired up. Chemi-
cally, your body is ready for battle.
The Thinking and Feeling Loop
As you think different thoughts, your brain circuits fire in cor-

responding sequences, patterns, and combinations, which then
produce levels of mind equal to those thoughts. Once these spe-
cific networks of neurons are activated, the brain produces specific
chemicals with the exact signature to match those thoughts so
that you can feel the way you were just thinking.
Therefore, when you have great thoughts or loving thoughts
or joyous thoughts, you produce chemicals that make you feel
great or loving or joyful. The same holds true if you have negative,
fearful, or impatient thoughts. In a matter of seconds, you begin
to feel negative or anxious or impatient.
There’s a certain synchronicity that takes place moment by
moment between the brain and the body. In fact, as we begin to
feel the way we are thinking—because the brain is in constant
communication with the body—we begin to think the way we are
feeling. The brain constantly monitors the way the body is feeling.
Based on the chemical feedback it receives, it will generate more
thoughts that produce chemicals corresponding to the way the
body is feeling, so that we first begin to feel the way we think and
then to think the way we feel.
57
Figure 3C. The neurochemical relationship between the brain and the body. As you
think certain thoughts, the brain produces chemicals that cause you to feel exactly
the way you were thinking. Once you feel the way you think, you begin to think the
way you feel. This continuous cycle creates a feedback loop called a “state of being.”
We will delve deeper into this idea throughout the book, but
consider that thoughts are primarily related to the mind (and the
brain), and feelings are connected to the body. Therefore, as the
feelings of the body align to thoughts from a particular state of
mind, mind and body are now working together as one. And as
you’ll recall, when the mind and body are in unison, the end
product is called a “state of being.” We could also say that the pro-
cess of continuously thinking and feeling and feeling and think-
ing creates a state of being, which produces effects on our reality.
A state of being means we have become familiar with a mental-
emotional state, a way of thinking and a way of feeling, which has
58
become an integral part of our self-identity. And so we describe

who we are by how we are thinking (and thus feeling) or being in
the present moment. I am angry; I am suffering; I am inspired; I am
insecure; I am negative. . . .
But years of thinking certain thoughts, and then feeling the
same way, and then thinking equal to those feelings (the ham-
ster in the wheel) creates a memorized state of being in which we
can emphatically declare our I am statement as an absolute. That
means we’re now at the point when we define ourselves as this state
of being. Our thoughts and feelings have merged.
For example, we say: I have always been lazy; I am an anxious per-
son; I am typically uncertain of myself; I have worthiness issues; I am short-
tempered and impatient; I am really not that smart; and so on. And those
particular memorized feelings contribute to all our personality traits.
Warning: when feelings become the means of thinking, or if
we cannot think greater than how we feel, we can never change.
To change is to think greater than how we feel. To change is to act
greater than the familiar feelings of the memorized self. It is to be
greater than the body.
As a practical example, let’s say you’re driving to work this
morning and you begin to think about the heated encounter you
had a few days ago with a co-worker. As you think the thoughts
associated with that person and that particular experience, your
brain starts releasing chemicals that circulate through your body.
Very quickly, you begin to feel exactly the way you were thinking.
You probably become angry.
Your body sends a message back to your brain, saying, Yup,
I’m feeling really ticked off. Of course, your brain, which constantly
communicates with the body and monitors its internal chemical
order, is influenced by the sudden change in the way you’re feel-
ing. As a result, you begin to think differently. (The moment you
begin to feel the way you think, you begin to think the way you
feel.) You unconsciously reinforce the same feeling by continuing
to think angry and frustrated thoughts, which then make you feel
more angry and frustrated. In effect, your feelings are now con-
trolling your thinking. Your body is now driving your mind.
59
As the cycle goes on, your angry thoughts produce more chem-
ical signals to your body, which activate the adrenal chemicals as-
sociated with your angry feelings. Now you become enraged and
aggressive. You feel flushed, your stomach is twisted into a knot,
your head pounds, and your muscles start to clench. As all those
heightened feelings flood the body and change its physiology, this
chemical cocktail fires up a set of circuits in the brain, causing you
to think equal to those emotions.
Now you’re telling your associate off ten different ways in the
privacy of your own mind. You indignantly conjure up a litany
of past events that validate your present upset, brainstorming
through a letter recounting all those complaints you’ve always
wanted to lodge. In your mind, you’ve already forwarded it to your
boss before you even arrive at work. You exit the car dazed and
crazed and a breath away from homicidal. Hello, walking, talking
model of an angry person . . . and all of this started with a sin-
gle thought. In this moment, it seems impossible to think greater
than you feel—and that’s why it’s so hard to change.
The result of this cyclic communication between your brain
and body is that you tend to react predictably to these kinds of
situations. You create patterns of the same familiar thoughts and
feelings, you unconsciously behave in automatic ways, and you are
mired in these routines. This is how the chemical “you” functions.
Does Your Mind Control Your Body?

Or Does Your Body Control Your Mind?
Why is it so hard to change?

Imagine that your mother loved to suffer, and through long
observation, you unconsciously saw that this behavior pattern en-
abled her to get what she wanted in life. Let’s also say that you’ve
had a few tough experiences in your own life, which created quite
a bit of suffering for you. Those memories still elicit an emotional
reaction, centered around a specific person at a particular place
at a certain time in your life. You’ve thought about the past often
60
enough, and somehow, those memories are easy to recall, even

automatic. Now imagine that for more than 20 years, you’ve prac-
ticed thinking and feeling, feeling and thinking, about suffering.
Actually, you no longer need to think about the past event to
create the feeling. You can’t seem to think or act any other way
than how you always feel. You’ve memorized suffering by your
recurrent thoughts and feelings—those related to that incident, as
well as other events in your life. Your thoughts about yourself and
your life tend to be colored by feelings of victimization and self-
pity. Repeating the same thoughts and feelings you’ve courted for
more than 20 years has conditioned your body to remember the
feeling of suffering without much conscious thought. This seems
so natural and normal now. It’s who you are. And anytime you try
to change anything about yourself, it’s like the road turns back on
you. You’re right back to your old self.
What most people don’t know is that when they think about a
highly charged emotional experience, they make the brain fire in
the exact sequences and patterns as before; they are firing and wir-
ing their brains to the past by reinforcing those circuits into ever
more hardwired networks. They also duplicate the same chemicals
in the brain and body (in varying degrees) as if they were experi-
encing the event again in that moment. Those chemicals begin to
train the body to further memorize that emotion. Both the chemi-
cal results of thinking and feeling, feeling and thinking, as well as
the neurons firing and wiring together, condition the mind and
the body into a finite set of automatic programs.
We are capable of reliving a past event over and over, perhaps
thousands of times in one lifetime. It is this unconscious repeti-
tion that trains the body to remember that emotional state, equal
to or better than the conscious mind does. When the body re-
members better than the conscious mind—that is, when the body
is the mind—that’s called a habit.
Psychologists tell us that by the time we’re in our mid-30s,
our identity or personality will be completely formed. This means
that for those of us over 35, we have memorized a select set of
61
behaviors, attitudes, beliefs, emotional reactions, habits, skills, as-

sociative memories, conditioned responses, and perceptions that
are now subconsciously programmed within us. Those programs
are running us, because the body has become the mind.
This means that we will think the same thoughts, feel the same
feelings, react in identical ways, behave in the same manner, be-
lieve the same dogmas, and perceive reality the same ways. About
95 percent of who we are by midlife1 is a series of subconscious
programs that have become automatic—driving a car, brushing
our teeth, overeating when we’re stressed, worrying about our fu-
ture, judging our friends, complaining about our lives, blaming
our parents, not believing in ourselves, and insisting on being
chronically unhappy, just to name a few.
Often We Only Appear to Be Awake
Since the body becomes the subconscious mind, it’s easy to see
that in situations when the body becomes the mind, the conscious
mind no longer has much to do with our behavior. The instant we
have a thought, feeling, or reaction, the body runs on automatic
pilot. We go unconscious.
Take, for example, a mother driving a minivan to drop her
kids off at school. How is she able to navigate traffic, break up
arguments, drink her coffee, shift gears, and help her son blow
his nose . . . all at once? Much like a computer program, these ac-
tions have become automatic functions that can run very fluidly
and easily. Mom’s body is skillfully doing everything because it
has memorized how to do all these deeds through much repeti-
tion. She no longer has any conscious thought about how she does
them; they are habitual.
Think about that: 5 percent of the mind is conscious, strug-
gling against the 95 percent that is running subconscious auto-
matic programs. We’ve memorized a set of behaviors so well that
we have become an automatic, habitual body-mind. In fact, when
the body has memorized a thought, action, or feeling to the extent
62
that the body is the mind—when mind and body are one—we are
(in a state of) being the memory of ourselves. And if 95 percent of
who we are by age 35 is a set of involuntary programs, memorized be-
haviors, and habitual emotional reactions, it follows that 95 percent
of our day, we are unconscious. We only appear to be awake. Yikes!
So a person may consciously want to be happy, healthy, or
free, but the experience of hosting 20 years of suffering and the
repeated cycling of those chemicals of pain and pity have subcon-
sciously conditioned the body to be in a habitual state. We live by
habit when we’re no longer aware of what we’re thinking, doing,
or feeling; we become unconscious.
The greatest habit we must break is the habit of being ourselves.
When the Body Is Running the Show

Here are some practical illustrations of the body being in a habitual
state. Have you ever been unable to consciously remember a phone
number? Try as you may, you can’t even recall three digits out of the
string of numbers required to make the call. And yet, you can pick up
the phone and watch as your fingers dial the number. Your conscious,
thinking brain can’t remember the number, but you’ve practiced this
action so many times with your fingers that your body now knows and
remembers better than your brain. (That example was for those of us
who grew up before speed dial or cell phones came along; perhaps
you’ve had the same experience with typing your PIN into an ATM or
entering a password online.)
Similarly, I can recall times when I worked out at a gym and had a
locker with a combination lock. I was so tired after the workout that I
couldn’t remember the combination. I’d stare at that dial, trying to recall
the sequence of three numbers, and they wouldn’t surface. However,
when I started to twirl the dial, the combination would come back to me,
almost as if by magic. Again, this happens because we practiced something
so many times that our bodies know better than our conscious minds.
The body subconsciously has become the mind.
Remember that 95 percent of who we are by age 35 sits in the same
subconscious memory system, in which the body automatically runs a
programmed set of behaviors and emotional reactions. In other words,
the body is running the show.
63
When the Servant Becomes the Master
In truth, the body is the servant of the mind. It follows that if

the body has become the mind, the servant has become the mas-
ter. And the former master (the conscious mind) has gone to sleep.
The mind might think it’s still in charge, but the body is influenc-
ing decisions equal to its memorized emotions.
Now, let’s say the mind wants to get back in control. What do
you think the body is going to say?
Where have you been? Go back to sleep. I’ve got it together here.
You don’t have the will, the persistence, or the awareness to do what I
have been doing all this time while you were unconsciously following
my orders. I even modified my receptor sites over the years in order to
serve you better. You thought you were running things, while I have been
influencing you all along and urging you to make all of your decisions
equal to what feels right and familiar.
And when the 5 percent that is conscious is going against
95 percent that is running subconscious automatic programs, the
95 percent is so reflexive that it only takes one stray thought or a
single stimulus from the environment to turn on the automatic
program again. Then we’re back to same old, same old—think-
ing the same thoughts, performing the same actions, but expecting
something different to happen in our lives.
When we try to regain control, this is when the body signals
the brain to begin talking us out of our conscious goals. Our in-
ternal chatter comes up with a battery of reasons why we should
not attempt to do anything out of the ordinary, not break out of
the habituated state of being that we’re used to. It will pick up all
of our weaknesses, which it knows and fosters, and hurl them at
us one by one.
We create worst-case scenarios in our minds so that we don’t
have to rise above those familiar feelings. Because when we try
to break the internal chemical order we have made so second na-
ture, the body goes into chaos. Its internal badgering feels nearly
irresistible—and plenty of times, we succumb.
64
Enter into the Subconscious to Change It
The subconscious mind only knows what you have programmed

it to do. Have you ever been typing along on your laptop, and all
of a sudden your computer starts running automatic programs that
you have no control over? When you try to use the conscious mind
to stop the automatic, subconscious programs stored in your body,
it’s like yelling at a computer that’s gone rogue, with several pro-
grams running while windows are popping up and showing more
than you can handle. Hey! Stop that! The computer isn’t even going
to register that. It’s going to keep doing what it does until there is
some sort of intervention—until you get into its operating system
and change some settings.
In this book, you will learn how to get into the subconscious,
and reprogram it with a new set of strategies. In effect, you have
to deprogram, or unwire, your old thinking and feeling patterns
and then reprogram, or rewire, your brain with new patterns of
thinking and feeling, based on who you want to be instead. When
you condition the body with a new mind, the two can no longer
work in opposition, but must be in harmony. This is the point of
change . . . of self-creation.
Guilty Until Proven Innocent
Let’s use a real-life situation to illustrate what happens when

we decide to break from some memorized emotional state and
change our minds. I think we can all relate to one common state
of being: guilt. So I’m going to use that to illustrate in practical
terms how this cycle of thinking and feeling works against us.
Then we’ll identify some of the efforts the brain-body system is
going to make to remain in control and preserve that negative
state of being.
Imagine that you frequently feel guilty about one thing or
another. If something goes wrong in a relationship—a simple
miscommunication, someone unreasonably misplacing his or her
anger on you, or whatever—you wind up taking the blame and
65
feeling bad. Picture yourself as one of those people who repeatedly

say or think, It was my fault.
After 20 years of doing this to yourself, you feel guilty and
think guilty thoughts automatically. You have created an environ-
ment of guilt for yourself. Other factors have contributed to this,
but for now, let’s stay with this notion of how your thinking and
feeling have created your state of being and your environment.
Every time you think a guilty thought, you’ve signaled your
body to produce the specific chemicals that make up the feeling
of guilt. You’ve done this so often that your cells are swimming in
a sea of guilt chemicals.
The receptor sites on your cells adapt so that they can better
take in and process this particular chemical expression, that of
guilt. The enormous amount of guilt bathing the cells begins to
feel normal to them, and eventually, what the body perceives as
normal starts to be interpreted as pleasurable. It’s like living for
years near an airport. You get so used to the noise that you no
longer hear it consciously, unless one jet flies lower than usual and
the roar of its engines is so much louder that it gets your atten-
tion. The same thing happens to your cells. As a result, they liter-
ally become desensitized to the chemical feeling of guilt; they will
require a stronger, more powerful emotion from you—a higher
threshold of stimuli—to turn on the next time. And when that
stronger “hit” of guilt chemicals gets the body’s attention, your
cells “perk up” at that stimulation, much like that first cup of java
feels to a coffee drinker.
And when each cell divides at the end of its life and makes a
daughter cell, the receptor sites on the outside of the new cell will
require a higher threshold of guilt to turn them on. Now the body
demands a stronger emotional rush of feeling bad in order to feel
alive. You become addicted to guilt by your own doing.
When anything goes wrong or is awry in your life, you automat-
ically assume that you’re the guilty party. But that seems normal to
you now. You don’t even have to think about feeling guilty—you
just are that way. Not only is your mind not conscious of how you
express your guilty state by way of the things you say and do, but
66
your body wants to feel its accustomed level of guilt, because that’s
what you have trained it to do. You have become unconsciously
guilty most of the time—your body has become the mind of guilt.
Only when, say, a friend points out that you needn’t have
apologized to the store clerk for giving you the wrong change
do you realize how pervasive this aspect of your personality
has become. Let’s say that this triggers one of those moments of
enlightenment—an epiphany—and you think, She’s right. Why do
I apologize all the time? Why do I take responsibility for everyone else’s
missteps? After you reflect on your history of constantly “pleading
guilty,” you say to yourself, Today I’m going to stop blaming myself
and making excuses for other people’s bad behavior. I’m going to change.
Because of your decision, you’re no longer going to think the
same thoughts that produce the same feelings, and vice versa. And
if you falter, you’ve made a deal with yourself that you’re going to
stop and remember your intention. Two hours go by and you feel
really good about yourself. You think, Wow, this is actually working.
Unfortunately, your body’s cells aren’t feeling so good. Over
the years, you’ve trained them to demand more molecules of emo-
tion (guilt, in this case) in order to fulfill their chemical needs.
You had trained your body to live as a memorized chemical con-
tinuity, but now you’re interrupting that, denying it its chemical
needs and going contrary to its subconscious programs.
The body becomes addicted to guilt or any emotion in the
same way that it would get addicted to drugs.2 At first you only
need a little of the emotion/drug in order to feel it; then your body
becomes desensitized, and your cells require more and more of it
just to feel the same again. Trying to change your emotional pat-
tern is like going through drug withdrawal.
Once your cells are no longer getting the usual signals from
the brain about feeling guilty, they begin to express concern. Be-
fore, the body and the mind were working together to produce
this state of being called guilt; now you are no longer thinking
and feeling, feeling and thinking, in the same way. Your inten-
tion is to produce more positive thoughts, but the body is still all
revved up to produce feelings of guilt based on guilty thoughts.
67
Think of this as a kind of highly specialized assembly line. Your

brain has programmed the body to expect one part that will fit into
this larger assembly. All of a sudden, you’ve sent it another part
that doesn’t fit into the space where the old “guilty” part once did.
An alarm goes off, and the whole operation comes to a standstill.
Your cells are always spying on what is happening in the brain
and the mind; your body is the best mind reader ever. So they all
stop what they are doing, look up toward the brain, and think:
What are you doing up there? You insisted on being guilty, and we
loyally followed your commands for years! We subconsciously memo-
rized a program of guilt from your repetitive thoughts and feelings. We
changed our receptor sites to reflect your mind—modified our chemistry
so that you could automatically feel guilty. We have maintained your
internal chemical order, independent of any external circumstances in
your life. We are so used to the same chemical order that your new state
of being feels uncomfortable, unfamiliar. We want the familiar, the pre-
dictable, and what feels natural. All of a sudden you’re going to change?
We can’t have that!
So the cells huddle up and say: Let’s send a protest message to the
brain. But we have to be sneaky, because we want her to think that she’s
actually responsible for these thoughts. We don’t want her to know they
came from us. So now the cells send a message marked URGENT right
up the spinal cord to the surface of the thinking brain. I call that
the “fast track,” because the message goes straight up the central
nervous system in a matter of seconds.
At the same time this is happening, the chemistry of the
body—the chemistry of guilt—is now at a lower level, because
you’re not thinking and feeling the same way. But this drop does
not go unnoticed. A thermostat in the brain called the hypothala-
mus also sends out an alarm that says: Chemical values are going
down. We’ve got to make more!
So the hypothalamus signals the thinking brain to revert back
to its old habitual ways. This is the “slow track,” because it takes
longer for the chemicals to circulate through the bloodstream.
The body wants you to return to your memorized chemical self, so
it influences you to think in familiar, routine ways. So it activates
68
the corresponding networks of neurons that have fired and wired

for years, which are equal to the mind of that feeling.
These “fast track” and “slow track” cellular responses occur si-
multaneously. And the next thing you know, you start to hear the
chatter of thoughts like these in your head: You’re too tired today.
You can start tomorrow. Tomorrow’s a better day. Really, you can do it
later. And my favorite: This doesn’t feel right.
If that doesn’t work, a second sneak attack occurs. The body-
mind wants to be in control again, so it starts picking on you a bit:
It’s okay for you to feel a little bad right now. It’s your father’s fault. Don’t
you feel bad about what you did in your past? In fact, let’s take a look at
your past so we can remember why you are this way. Look at you—you’re
a mess, a loser. You’re pathetic and weak. Your life is a failure. You’ll never
change. You’re too much like your mother. Why don’t you just quit. As you
continue this “awfulizing,” the body is tempting the mind to return
to the state it has unconsciously memorized. On a rational level, that
is absurd. But obviously, on some level it feels good to feel bad.
The moment we listen to those subvocalizations, believe those
thoughts, and respond by feeling the same familiar feelings, men-
tal amnesia sets in and we forget our original aim. The funny
thing is that we actually begin to believe what the body is telling
the brain to say to us. We immerse ourselves back into that auto-
matic program and return to being our old self.
Most of us can relate to this little scenario. It’s no different
from any habit we’ve tried to break. Whether we’re addicted to
cigarettes, chocolate, alcohol, shopping, gambling, or biting our
nails, the moment we cease the habitual action, chaos rages be-
tween the body and the mind. The thoughts we embrace are in-
timately identified with the feelings of what it would be like to
experience the indulgence. When we give in to the cravings, we
will keep producing the same outcomes in our lives, because the
mind and body are in opposition. Our thoughts and feelings are
working against each other, and if the body has become the mind,
we will always fall prey to how we feel.
As long as we use familiar feelings as a barometer, as feed-
back on our efforts to change, we’ll always talk ourselves out of
69
new possibilities. We will never be able to think greater than our

internal environment. We will never be able to see a world of pos-
sible outcomes other than the negative ones from our past. Our
thoughts and feelings have that much power over us.
Help Is Only a Thought Away
The next step in breaking the habit of being ourselves is un-

derstanding how important it is to get the mind and body work-
ing together and to break the chemical continuity of our guilty,
ashamed, angry, depressed state of being. Resisting the body’s de-
mand to restore that old unhealthy order isn’t easy, but help is
only a thought away.
You will learn in the following pages that for true change to occur,
it is essential to “unmemorize” an emotion that has become part of
your personality, and then to recondition the body to a new mind.
It’s easy to feel hopeless when we realize that the chemistry
of our emotions has habituated our bodies to a state of being that
is too often a product of anger, jealousy, resentment, sadness, and
so forth. After all, I’ve said that these programs, these propensities,
are programmed in our subconscious.
The good news is that we can become consciously aware of
these tendencies. I’ll deal more with this concept in the pages
ahead. For now, I hope you can accept that to change your person-
ality, you need to change your state of being, which is intimately
connected to feelings that you’ve memorized. Just as negative
emotions can become embedded in the operating system of your
subconscious, so can positive ones.
By Itself, Conscious Positive Thinking Cannot

Overcome Subconscious Negative Feelings
At one time or another, we’ve all consciously declared: I want

to be happy. But until the body is instructed otherwise, it’s going to
continue expressing those programs of guilt or sadness or anxiety.
70
The conscious, intellectual mind may reason that it wants joy, but
the body has been programmed to feel otherwise for years. We
stand on a soapbox proclaiming change to be in our best interests,
but on a visceral level we can’t seem to bring up the feeling of true
happiness. That’s because mind and body aren’t working together.
The conscious mind wants one thing, but the body wants another.
If you’ve been devoted to feeling negatively for years, those feel-
ings have created an automatic state of being. We could say that you
are subconsciously unhappy, right? Your body has been conditioned
to be negative; it knows how to be unhappy better than your conscious
mind knows otherwise. You don’t even have to think about how to be
negative. You just know that it’s how you are. How can your conscious
mind control this attitude in the subconscious body-mind?
Some maintain that “positive thinking” is the answer. I want
to be clear that by itself, positive thinking never works. Many so-
called positive thinkers have felt negative most of their lives, and
now they’re trying to think positively. They are in a polarized
state in which they are trying to think one way in order to override
how they feel inside of them. They consciously think one way, but
they are being the opposite. When the mind and body are in opposi-
tion, change will never happen.
Memorized Feelings Limit Us to Re-creating the Past
By definition, emotions are the end products of past experi-

ences in life.
When you’re in the midst of an experience, the brain receives
vital information from the external environment through five dif-
ferent sensory pathways (sight, smell, sound, taste, and touch). As
that cumulative sensory data reaches the brain and is processed,
networks of neurons arrange themselves into specific patterns re-
flecting the external event. The moment those nerve cells string
into place, the brain releases chemicals. Those chemicals are called
an “emotion” or a “feeling.” (In this book, I use the words feelings
and emotions interchangeably because they are close enough for our
understanding.)
71
When those emotions begin to chemically flood your body,

you detect a change in your internal order (you’re thinking and
feeling differently than you were moments before). Naturally,
when you notice this change in your internal state, you’ll pay
attention to whoever or whatever in your external environment
caused that change. When you can identify whatever it was in
your outer world that caused your internal change, that event in
and of itself is called a memory. Neurologically and chemically,
you encode that environmental information into your brain and
body. Thus you can remember experiences better because you re-
call how they felt at the time they happened—feelings and emo-
tions are a chemical record of past experiences.
For example, your boss arrives for your performance review.
You notice immediately that he looks red faced, even irritated. As
he starts speaking in a loud voice, you smell garlic on his breath.
He accuses you of undermining him in front of other employees,
and says he has passed you over for a promotion. In this moment
you feel jittery, weak in the knees, and queasy; and your heart is
racing. You feel fearful, betrayed, and angry. All of the cumulative
sensory information—everything you’re smelling, seeing, feeling,
and hearing—is changing your internal state. You associate that
external experience with a change in how you’re feeling inter-
nally, and it brands you emotionally.
You go home and repeatedly review this experience in your
mind. Every time you do, you remind yourself of the accusing,
intimidating look on your employer’s face, how he yelled at you,
what he said, and even how he smelled. Then you once again feel
fearful and angry; you produce the same chemistry in your brain
and body as if the performance review is still happening. Because
your body believes it is experiencing the same event again and
again, you are conditioning it to live in the past.
Let’s reason this a bit further. Think of your body as the un-
conscious mind, or as an objective servant that takes orders from
your consciousness. It is so objective that it doesn’t know the dif-
ference between the emotions that are created from experiences
72
in your external world and those you fabricate in your internal

world by thought alone. To the body, they are the same.
What if this cycle of thinking and feeling that you were be-
trayed continues for years on end? If you keep dwelling on that
experience with your boss or reliving those familiar feelings, day
in and day out, you continually signal your body with chemical
feelings that it associates with the past. This chemical continu-
ity fools the body into believing that it is still reexperiencing the
past, so the body keeps reliving the same emotional experience.
When your memorized thoughts and feelings consistently force
your body to “be in” the past, we could say that the body becomes
the memory of the past.
If those memorized feelings of betrayal have been driving
your thoughts for years, then your body has been living in the
past 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 52 weeks a year. In time, your
body is anchored in the past.
You know that when you repeatedly re-create the same emo-
tions until you cannot think any greater than how you feel, your
feelings are now the means of your thinking. And since your feel-
ings are a record of previous experiences, you’re thinking in the
past. And by quantum law, you create more of the past.
Bottom line: Most of us live in the past and resist living in a
new future. Why? The body is so habituated to memorizing the
chemical records of our past experiences that it grows attached
to these emotions. In a very real sense, we become addicted to
those familiar feelings. So when we want to look to the future and
dream of new vistas and bold landscapes in our not-too-distant
reality, the body, whose currency is feelings, resists the sudden
change in direction.
Accomplishing this about-face is the great labor of personal
change. So many people struggle to create a new destiny, but find
themselves unable to overcome the past memory of who they feel
they are. Even if we crave unknown adventures and dream of new
possibilities ahead in the future, we seem to be compelled to re-
visit the past.
73
Feelings and emotions are not bad. They are the end products
of experience. But if we always relive the same ones, we can’t
embrace any new experiences. Have you known people who
always seem to talk about “the good old days”? What they’re really
saying is: Nothing new is happening in my life to stimulate my feelings;
therefore I’ll have to reaffirm myself from some glorious moments in the
past. If we believe that our thoughts have something to do with
our destiny, then as creators, most of us are only going in circles.
Controlling Our Inner Environment:

The Genetic Myth
So far, in discussing how the quantum model of reality relates

to change, I’ve spent most of the time talking about our emotions,
the brain, and the body. We’ve seen that overcoming the recur-
ring thoughts and feelings that the body memorizes is a must if we
are to break the habit of being ourselves.
Another major aspect of breaking this habit has to do with our
physical health. Certainly, in the hierarchy of things that most of
us want to change about our lives, health issues rank way up there.
And when it comes to what we’d like to change about our health,
there is one set of dogmas that we’re going to have to examine
and dispel—the myth that genes create disease and the fallacy of
genetic determinism. We will also look at a scientific understand-
ing that may be new to you, called epigenetics: the control of genes
from outside the cell, or more precisely, the study of changes in
gene function that occur without a change in DNA sequence.3
Just as we can create new experiences for ourselves, like my
daughter did, we can also gain control of a very important part
of our lives—what we commonly think of as our genetic destiny.
As we go along, you will see that knowing something about your
genes and what signals them to be expressed or not is crucial to
understanding why you have to change from the inside out.
Scientific dictum used to declare that our genes were respon-
sible for most diseases. Then a couple of decades ago, the scientific
74
community casually mentioned that they had been in error, and

announced that the environment, by activating or deactivating
particular genes, is the most causative factor in producing disease.
We now know that less than 5 percent of all diseases today stem
from single-gene disorders (such as Tay-Sachs and Huntington’s
chorea), whereas around 95 percent of all illnesses are related to life-
style choices, chronic stress, and toxic factors in the environment.4
Yet factors in the outer environment are only part of the picture.
What explains why two people can be exposed to the same toxic en-
vironmental conditions for years and one gets sick or diseased while
the other doesn’t? How is it that when someone has multiple person-
ality disorder, one personality can demonstrate a severe allergy to
something, while another personality in that same body can be im-
mune to the same antigen or stimulus? Why, when most health-care
providers are exposed to pathogens on a daily basis, aren’t doctors
and others in the medical community continually ill?
There are also numerous case studies documenting identical
twins (who share the same genes) who have had very different
experiences when it came to their health and longevity. For exam-
ple, if both shared a family history of a particular disease, that ill-
ness often manifested in one twin but not the other. Same genes,
different outcomes.5
In all these cases, could the person who remains healthy have
such a coherent, balanced, vital internal order that even when his
or her body is exposed to the same hazardous environmental con-
ditions, the external world does nothing to his or her gene expres-
sion, and so doesn’t signal the genes to create disease?
It’s true that the external environment influences our internal
environment. However, by changing our internal state of being,
can we overcome the effects of a stressful or toxic environment so
that certain genes do not become activated? We may not be able
to control all the conditions in our external environment, but we
certainly have a choice in controlling our inner environment.
75
Genes: Memories of the Past Environment
To explain how we can control our inner environment, I need

to talk a bit about the nature of genes, which are expressed in
the body when cells manufacture specific proteins, the building
blocks of life.
The body is a protein-producing factory. Muscle cells make
muscle proteins that are called actin and myosin, skin cells make
skin proteins called collagen and elastin, and stomach cells make
stomach proteins called enzymes. Most of the cells of the body
make proteins, and genes are the way we make them. We express
particular genes via certain cells making particular proteins.
The way most organisms adapt to conditions in their environ-
ment is through gradual genetic modifications. For example, when
an organism is faced with tough environmental conditions such
as temperature extremes, dangerous predators, fast prey, destruc-
tive winds, strong currents, and so on, it is forced to overcome
the adverse aspects of its world in order to survive. As organisms
record those experiences, in the wiring in their brains and the
emotions in their bodies, they will change over time. If lions are
chasing prey that can outrun them, then by actively engaging the
same experiences for generations, they will develop longer legs,
sharper teeth, or bigger hearts. All of these changes are the result
of genes making proteins that modify the body to adapt to its
environment.
Let’s stay with the animal world to look at how this works in
terms of adaptation or evolution. A hypothetical group of mam-
mals migrated to an environment in which the temperature ranged
from −15 to 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The genes in those mammals,
over many generations of living under extremely cold conditions,
would eventually be triggered to produce a new protein, which
would produce thicker and greater amounts of fur (hair and fur
are proteins).
Numerous insect species have evolved the ability to cam-
ouflage themselves. Some that live in trees or other foliage have
adapted to look like twigs or thorns, enabling them to escape the
notice of birds. The chameleon is probably the best known of the
76
“camouflagers,” and it owes its color-changing abilities to the ge-

netic expression of proteins. In these processes, genes encode the
conditions of the external world. That’s evolution, right?
Epigenetics Suggests That We Can Signal

Our Genes to Rewrite Our Future
Our genes are as changeable as our brains. The latest research

in genetics shows that different genes are activated at different
times—they are always in flux and being influenced. There are ex-
perience-dependent genes that are activated when there is growth,
healing, or learning; and there are behavioral-state- dependent
genes that are influenced during stress, emotional arousal, or
dreaming.6
One of the most active areas of research today is epigenetics
(literally, “above genetics”), the study of how the environment
controls gene activity. Epigenetics flies in the face of the conven-
tional genetic model, which stated that DNA controls all of life
and that all gene expression takes place inside the cell. This old
understanding doomed us to a predictable future in which our
destiny fell prey to our genetic inheritance, and all cellular life was
predetermined, like an automatic “ghost in the machine.”
In fact, epigenetic changes in DNA expression can be passed
on to future generations. But how do they get passed on if the
DNA code stays the same?
While a scientific explanation is beyond the scope of this
book, we can use an analogy. Let’s compare a genetic sequence to
a blueprint. Imagine that you start with a blueprint for a house,
and scan it into your computer. Then, using Photoshop, you could
alter its appearance on the screen, changing a number of charac-
teristics without changing the blueprint. For example, you could
change the expression of variables such as color, size, scale, di-
mensions, materials, and so on. Thousands of people (represent-
ing environmental variables) could produce different images, but
they would all be expressions of that same blueprint.
77
Epigenetics empowers us to think about change more pro-

foundly. The epigenetic paradigm shift gives us free will to acti-
vate our own gene activity and modify our genetic destiny. For the
sake of example and simplification, when I talk about activating
a gene by expressing it in different ways, I will refer to “turning
it on.” In reality, genes don’t turn on or off; they are activated by
chemical signals, and they express themselves in specific ways by
making various proteins.
Just by changing our thoughts, feelings, emotional reactions,
and behaviors (for example, making healthier lifestyle choices
with regard to nutrition and stress level), we send our cells new
signals, and they express new proteins without changing the ge-
netic blueprint. So while the DNA code stays the same, once a cell
is activated in a new way by new information, the cell can create
thousands of variations of the same gene. We can signal our genes
to rewrite our future.
Perpetuating Old States of Being Sets Us

Up for an Undesirable Genetic Destiny
Just as certain areas of the brain are hardwired, whereas

other areas are more plastic (able to be changed by learning and
experience), I believe genes are the same way. There are certain
parts of our genetics that are more easily turned on; while other
genetic sequences are somewhat more hardwired, which means
they are harder to activate, because they have been around longer
in our genetic history. At least, that’s what science says right now.
How do we keep certain genes turned on and others turned off?
If we stay in the same toxic state of anger, the same melancholy
state of depression, the same vigilant state of anxiety, or the same
low state of unworthiness, those redundant chemical signals we
have talked about keep pushing the same genetic buttons, which
ultimately cause the activation of certain diseases. Stressful
emotions, as you will learn, actually pull the genetic trigger,
dysregulating the cells (dysregulation refers to impairment of a
physiological regulatory mechanism) and creating disease.
78
When we think and feel in the same ways for most of our lives
and memorize familiar states of being, our internal chemical state
keeps activating the same genes, meaning that we keep making
the same proteins. But the body cannot adapt to these repeated
demands, and it begins to break down. If we do that for 10 or 20
years, the genes begin to wear out, and they start making “cheaper”
proteins. What do I mean? Think about what happens when we
age. Our skin sags because its collagen and elastin come to be made
of cheaper proteins. What happens to our muscles? They atrophy.
Well, no surprise there—actin and myosin, too, are proteins.
Here’s an analogy. When a metal part for your car is manu-
factured, it is produced in a die or a mold. Each time that mold
or die is used, it is subjected to certain forces, including heat and
friction, which begin to wear it down. As you might guess, car
parts are built to very close tolerances (referring to the permitted
variation in a workpiece’s dimensions). Over time, that die or mold
wears to the point that it produces parts that won’t fit properly
to other parts. This is similar to what happens to the body. As
a result of stress or a habit of being repeatedly and consistently
angry, fearful, sad, and so on, the DNA that the peptides use to
produce proteins will start to malfunction.
What is the genetic impact if we stay in routine, familiar
conditions—creating the same emotional reactions by doing the
same things, thinking the same thoughts, seeing the same people,
and memorizing our lives into a predictable pattern? We are now
headed for an undesirable genetic destiny; we are locked into the
same patterns as generations before us, which confronted the same
or similar situations. And if we are only reliving our emotional
memories of the past, then we are headed for a predictable end—
our bodies will begin to create the same genetic conditions that
previous generations faced.
Thus, the body will stay the same as long as we are feeling the
same way, day in and day out. And if science tells us that it is the
environment that signals the genes involved in evolution, what if
our environment never changes? What if we’ve memorized the same
79
conditions in our outer world and we’re living by the same thoughts,
behaviors, and feelings? What if everything in our lives stays the same?
}}}
You just learned that the external environment chemically

signals genes through the emotions of an experience. So if the ex-
periences in your life aren’t changing, the chemical signals going
to your genes aren’t changing. No new information from the outer
world is reaching your cells.
The quantum model asserts that we can signal the body emo-
tionally and begin to alter a chain of genetic events without first
having any actual physical experience that correlates to that emo-
tion. We don’t need to win the race, the lottery, or the promotion
before we experience the emotions of those events. Remember, we
can create an emotion by thought alone. We can experience joy
or gratitude ahead of the environment to such an extent that the
body begins to believe that it is already “in” that event. As a result,
we can signal our genes to make new proteins to change our bod-
ies to be ahead of the present environment.
Can Elevated States of Mind Produce

Healthier Expression of Genes?
Here’s an example of how we can signal new genes in new

ways when we begin to emotionally embrace an event in the fu-
ture before it is made manifest.
In Japan, a study was conducted to find out what effect one’s
state of mind might have on disease. The subjects were two groups
of patients with type 2 diabetes, all of whom were dependent on
insulin. Keep in mind that most diabetics medicate with insulin
to remove sugar (glucose) out of the bloodstream and deposit it in
the cells, where it can be used for energy. At the time of this study,
the people involved were being treated with insulin pills or injec-
tions to help control their elevated blood-sugar levels.7
Each group had their fasting blood-sugar level tested to estab-
lish a baseline. Next, one set of subjects watched a comedy show
80
for an hour, while the control group watched a boring lecture. The
test subjects then ate a delicious meal, after which their blood-
glucose levels were checked again.
There was a significant discrepancy between the subjects who
enjoyed the comedy show and those who viewed the unevent-
ful lecture. On average, those who watched the lecture had their
blood-sugar levels rise 123 mg/dl—high enough that they would
need to take insulin to keep themselves out of the danger zone.
In the joyful group, who had laughed for one hour, their after-
dinner blood-sugar values rose about half that amount (slightly
outside of normal range).
Initially, the researchers who performed the experiment
thought that the lighthearted subjects had lowered their sugar lev-
els by contracting their abdominal and diaphragm muscles when
they laughed. They reasoned that when a muscle contracts, it uses
energy—and circulating energy is glucose.
But the research went further. They examined the gene sequenc-
es of the jovial individuals and discovered that these diabetics had
altered 23 different gene expressions just by laughing at the com-
edy show they’d seen. Their elevated state of mind apparently trig-
gered their brains to send new signals to their cells, which turned
on those genetic variations that allowed their bodies to naturally
begin to regulate the genes responsible for processing blood sugar.
Our emotions can turn on some gene sequences and turn off
others, this study clearly showed. Just by signaling the body with
a new emotion, the laughing subjects altered their internal chem-
istry to change the expression of their genes.
Sometimes a change in genetic expression can be sudden and
dramatic. Have you ever heard of people, after being subjected to
extremely stressful conditions, whose hair turned gray overnight?
That’s an example of genes at work. They experienced such a
strong emotional reaction that their altered body chemistry both
turned on the gene for the expression of gray hair and shut off the
genetic expression for their normal hair color, within a matter of
hours. They signaled new genes in new ways by emotionally, and
thus chemically, altering their internal environment.
81
As I discussed in the last chapter, when you’ve “experienced”

an event numerous times by mentally rehearsing every aspect of
it in your mind, you feel what that event would feel like, before it
unfolds. Then as you change the circuitry in your brain by think-
ing in new ways, and you embrace the emotions of an event ahead
of its physical manifestation, it’s possible that you can change
your body genetically.
Can you pick a potential from the quantum field (every po-
tential already exists, by the way) and emotionally embrace a fu-
ture event before the actual experience? Can you do this so many
times that you emotionally condition the body to a new mind,
thus signaling new genes in new ways? If you can, it is highly pos-
sible that you will begin to shape and mold your brain and body
into a new expression . . . so that they physically change before the
desired potential reality is made manifest.
Changing Your Body: Why Lift a Finger?
We may believe that we can change our brains by thinking,

but what effects, if any, will this have on the body? Through the
simple process of mentally rehearsing an activity, we can derive
great benefits without lifting a finger. Here’s an example of how
that literally happened.
As described in an article published in the 1992 Journal of
Neurophysiology,8 subjects were divided into three groups:
• The first group was asked to exercise by contracting

and relaxing one finger on their left hand, for five
one-hour training sessions per week for four weeks.
• A second group mentally rehearsed the same exercises,
on the same timetable, without physically activating
any muscles in the finger.
• People in a control group exercised neither their
fingers nor their minds.
82
At the end of the study, the scientists compared the findings.

The first set of participants had their finger strength tested against
the control group. A no-brainer, right? The group who did the
actual exercises exhibited 30 percent greater finger strength than
those in the control group. We all know that if we repeatedly put
a load on a muscle, we will increase the strength of that muscle.
What we probably wouldn’t anticipate is that the group who men-
tally rehearsed the exercises demonstrated a 22 percent increase in
muscle strength! The mind, then, produced a quantifiable physi-
cal effect on the body. In other words, the body changed without
having an actual physical experience.
Just as researchers have worked with test subjects who men-
tally rehearsed finger exercises and others who imagined playing
piano scales, experiments have compared practical experience
versus mental rehearsal for individuals doing bicep curls. The
results were the same. Whether the participants physically per-
formed bicep curls or mentally rehearsed those activities, they
all increased their bicep strength. The mental exercisers, though,
demonstrated physiological changes without ever having the
physical experience.9
When the body has changed physically/biologically to look
like an experience has happened just by thought or mental ef-
forts alone, then from a quantum perspective, this offers evidence
that the event has already transpired in our reality. If the brain
upgrades its hardware to look like the experience physically oc-
curred and the body is changed genetically or biologically (it is
showing evidence that it happened), and both are different with-
out our “doing” anything in three dimensions, then the event has
occurred both in the quantum world of consciousness and in the
world of physical reality.
When you have thoughtfully rehearsed a future reality until
your brain has physically changed to look like it has had the ex-
perience, and you have emotionally embraced a new intention so
many times that your body is altered to reflect that it has had the
experience, hang on . . . because this is the moment the event
finds you! And it will arrive in a way that you least expect, which
83
leaves no doubt that it came from your relationship to a greater

consciousness—so that it inspires you to do it again and again.
}}}}
84
CHAPTER FOUR
OVERCOM ING TIME

So much has been written about the importance of staying
present. I could cite statistics on everything from distracted driv-
ing to divorce to support the notion that people have a really hard
time staying in the present moment. Let me add to that body of
knowledge by expressing this concept in quantum terms. In the
present, all potentials exist simultaneously in the field. When we
stay present, when we are “in the moment,” we can move beyond
space and time, and we can make any one of those potentials a
reality. When we are mired in the past, however, none of those
new potentials exist.
You’ve learned that when human beings try to change, we
react much like addicts, because we become addicted to our famil-
iar chemical states of being. You know that when you have an ad-
diction, it is almost as if your body has a mind of its own. As past
events trigger the same chemical response as the original incident,
your body thinks it is reexperiencing the same event. Once con-
ditioned to be the subconscious mind through this process, the
body has taken over for the mind—it has become the mind and
therefore can, in a sense, think.
I just touched upon how the body becomes the mind by the
cycle of thinking and feeling, feeling and thinking. But there is
another way in which this occurs, based on past memories.
85
Here is how it works: You have an experience, which has an

emotional charge. Then you have a thought about that particular
past event. The thought becomes a memory, which then reflexively
reproduces the emotion of the experience. If you keep thinking
about that memory repeatedly, the thought, the memory, and the
emotion merge as one, and you “memorize” the emotion. Now
living in the past becomes less of a conscious process and more of
a subconscious one.
Figure 4A. The thought produces a memory, which creates an emotion. In

time, the thought becomes the memory, and an emotion follows. If this
process is repeated enough times, the thought is the memory,
which is the emotion. We memorize the emotion.
The subconscious comprises most physical and mental pro-

cesses that take place below our conscious awareness. Much of its
activity is involved in keeping the body functioning. Scientists
refer to this regulatory system as the autonomic nervous system.
We don’t have to consciously think about breathing, keeping our
86
Overcoming Time
hearts beating, raising and lowering our body temperature, or any

of the other millions of processes that help the body maintain
order and heal itself.
I think that you can see how potentially dangerous it is for us
to cede control over our daily emotional responses to our mem-
ories and environment—to this automatic system. This subcon-
scious set of routine responses has been variously compared to an
autopilot system and to programs running in the background of a
computer. What those analogies are trying to convey is the sense
that there is something below the surface of our awareness that is
in control of how we behave.
Here’s an example to reinforce these points. Imagine that in
your youth, you came home one day and discovered your favorite
pet lying dead on the floor. Every sensory impression of that ex-
perience would be, as the expression goes, burned into your brain.
That experience would scar you.
With traumatic experiences like that, it’s easy to understand
how those emotions can become unconscious, memorized re-
sponses to reminders from your environment that you lost a loved
one. You know by now that when you think about that experi-
ence, you create the same emotions in your brain and body as
if the event was occurring all over again. All it takes is one stray
thought, or one reaction to some event in the external world, to
activate that program—and you start feeling the emotion of your
past grief. The trigger could be seeing a dog that looks like yours,
or visiting a place you once took him as a puppy. Regardless of the
sensory input, it activates an emotion. Those emotional triggers
can be obvious or subtle, but they all affect you at a subconscious
level, and before you can process what has happened, you’re back
in that emotional/chemical state of grief, anger, and sadness.
Once that happens, the body runs the mind. You can use your
conscious mind to try to get out of that emotional state, but in-
variably you feel like you’re out of control.
Think of Pavlov and his dogs. In the 1890s, the young Russian
scientist strapped a few dogs to a table, rang a bell, and then fed
the canines a hearty meal. Over time, after repeatedly exposing
87
the dogs to the same stimulus, he simply rang the bell, and the
dogs automatically salivated in anticipation.
This is called a conditioned response, and the process occurs
automatically. Why? Because the body begins to respond auto-
nomically (think of our autonomic nervous system). The cascade of
chemical reactions that is triggered within moments changes the
body physiologically, and it happens quite subconsciously—with
little or no conscious effort.
This is one of the reasons why it is so hard to change. The
conscious mind may be in the present, but the subconscious body-
mind is living in the past. If we begin to expect a predictable fu-
ture event to occur in reference to a memory of the past, we are
just like those canines. One experience of a particular person or
thing at a specific time and place from the past automatically (or
autonomically) causes us to respond physiologically.
Once we break the emotional addictions rooted in our past,
there will no longer be any pull to cause us to return to the same
automatic programs of the old self.
It begins to make sense that although we “think” or “believe”
we are living in the present, there is a good possibility that our
bodies are in the past.
Emotions to Moods to Temperaments to Personality Traits:

Conditioning the Body to Live in the Past
Unfortunately for most of us, because the brain always works

by repetition and association, it doesn’t take a major trauma to pro-
duce the effect of the body becoming the mind.1 The most minor
triggers can produce emotional responses that feel as though they
are beyond our control.
For instance, you’re driving to work and you stop at your usual
coffee shop, which is all out of your favorite, hazelnut coffee. Dis-
appointed, you grumble to yourself why a major enterprise like
this one can’t keep in stock such a very popular flavor. At work,
you’re irritated to see another car in your preferred parking spot.
88
Overcoming Time
Stepping into an empty elevator, you are exasperated to discover

that someone ahead of you pushed all the buttons.
When you finally walk into the office, someone comments,
“What’s up? You seem kind of down.”
You tell your story, and the person sympathizes. You sum it
up: “I’m in a bad mood. I’ll get over it.”
The thing is, you don’t.
A mood is a chemical state of being, generally short-term, that
is an expression of a prolonged emotional reaction. Something in
your environment—in this case, the failure of your barista to meet
your needs, followed by a few other minor annoyances—sets off an
emotional response. The chemicals of that emotion don’t get used
up instantly, so their effect lingers for a while. I call that the refrac-
tory period—the time after their initial release and until the effect
diminishes.2 The longer the refractory period, obviously, the longer
you experience those feelings. When the chemical refractory pe-
riod of an emotional reaction lasts for hours to days, that’s a mood.
What happens when that recently triggered mood lingers?
You’ve been in a bit of a funk since that day, and now you look
around the room during a staff meeting and all you think of is
that this person’s tie is hideous, and the nasally tone of your boss
is worse than nails on a chalkboard.
At this point, you’re not just in a mood. You’re reflecting a tem-
perament, a tendency toward the habitual expression of an emo-
tion through certain behaviors. A temperament is an emotional
reaction with a refractory period that lasts from weeks to months.
Eventually, if you keep the refractory period of an emotion
going for months and years, that tendency turns into a personality
trait. At that point others will describe you as “bitter” or “resent-
ful” or “angry” or “judgmental.”
Our personality traits, then, are frequently based in our past
emotions. Most of the time, personality (how we think, act, and
feel) is anchored in the past. So to change our personalities, we
have to change the emotions that we memorize. We have to move
out of the past.
89
Figure 4B. The progression of different refractory periods. An experience

creates an emotional reaction, which then can turn into a mood, then into
a temperament, and finally into a personality trait. We, as personalities,
memorize our emotional reactions and live in the past.
We Can’t Change When Living in the Predictable Future
There is yet another way that we get stuck and keep ourselves
from changing. We may also train the body to be the mind in
order to live in a predictable future, based on the memory of the
known past—and thus we miss the precious “now” moment again.
As you know, we can condition the body to live in the future.
Of course, that can be a means to change our lives for the better,
when we make a conscious choice to focus on a desired new ex-
perience, as my daughter did when she created her summer job in
Italy. As her story demonstrates, if we focus on an intended future
90
Overcoming Time
event and then plan how we will prepare or behave, there will
be a moment when we are so clear and focused on that possible
future that the thoughts we are thinking will begin to become
the experience itself. Once the thought becomes the experience,
its end product is an emotion. When we begin to experience the
emotion of that event ahead of its possible occurrence, the body
(as the unconscious mind) begins to respond as though the event
is actually unfolding.
On the other hand, what happens if we begin to anticipate
some unwanted future experience, or even obsess about a worst-
case scenario, based on a memory from our past? We are still pro-
gramming the body to experience a future event before it occurs.
Now the body is no longer in the moment or in the past; it is living
in the future—but a future based on some construct of the past.
When this occurs, the body does not know the difference be-
tween the actual event transpiring in reality and what we are en-
tertaining mentally. Because we are priming it to be juiced up for
whatever we think might be coming, the body begins to get ready.
And in a very real way, the body is in the event.
Here’s an example of living in the future, based on the past.
Imagine that you’ve been asked to give a lecture in front of 350
people, but you fear being onstage, based on memories of previous
public-speaking disasters from your distant past. Whenever you
think about the coming talk, you envision yourself standing there
stammering and losing your train of thought. Your body begins to
respond as if that future event is unfolding now; your shoulders
tense, your heart races, and you perspire heavily. As you anticipate
that dreaded day, you cause your body to already be living in that
stressful reality.
Caught up in and obsessed with the possibility of failing again,
you are so intent on that expected reality that you can’t concen-
trate on anything else. Your mind and body are polarized, moving
from the past to the future and back again. As a result, you deny
yourself the novelty of a wonderful future outcome.
As a more universal example of living in a predictable future,
let’s say that for many years you wake up to each new day, only
91
to slide automatically into the same old set of unconscious ac-

tions. The body is so used to anticipating performing your daily
behaviors that it goes almost mechanically from one task to the
next. There’s feeding the dog, brushing your teeth, putting on
your clothes, making tea, taking the garbage out, getting the mail
. . . you get the idea. Although you may wake up with a thought
to do something different, somehow you find yourself doing those
same-old, same-old things as if you are just along for the ride.
After you have memorized these types of actions for a de-
cade or two, your body has been trained to continuously “look
forward” to doing these things. In fact, it’s been subconsciously
programmed to live in the future and thus allow you to go to
sleep behind the wheel . . . we could even say that you’re no longer
even driving the car. Now your body cannot exist in the present
moment. It is primed to control you by running a host of uncon-
scious programs while you sit back and allow it to head toward
some humdrum, known destiny.
Overcoming your nearly automatic habits, and no longer an-
ticipating the future, requires the ability to live greater than time.
(More on that to come.)
Living in the Past, Which Is Your Future
Here’s another example that demonstrates how familiar

emotions create a corresponding future. You are invited to a co-
worker’s 4th of July barbecue. Everyone from your department is
expected to attend. You don’t like the host. He’s always number
one, and he doesn’t mind letting everyone know it.
Every time he’s hosted an event before, you’ve wound up hav-
ing a miserable time, with this guy pushing every single one of
your buttons. As you’re driving to his place now, all you can think
about is how at the last party, he interrupted everyone’s meal so he
could present his wife with a new BMW. You’re certain, as you’ve
told your partner the whole week leading up to the cookout, that
this is going to be one miserable day. And it becomes exactly that.
92
Overcoming Time
You run a stop sign and get a ticket. One of your co-workers spills
a beer on your pants and shirt. The hamburger that you requested
be done medium-well comes to you barely beyond raw.
Given your attitude (your state of being) going in, how could
you have expected things to turn out any other way? You woke
up anticipating that this day was slated to be a horror show, and
it turned out that way. You alternated between obsessing about an
unwanted future (anticipating what would come next) and living
in the past (comparing stimuli you were receiving to what you
received previously), so you created more of the same.
If you start keeping track of your thoughts and write them
down, you’ll find that most of the time, you are either thinking
ahead or looking back.
Live Your Desired New Future in the Precious Present
So here’s another of those big questions: If you know that by

staying present and severing or pruning your connections with
the past, you can have access to all the possible outcomes in the
quantum field, why would you choose to live in the past and keep
creating the same future for yourself? Why wouldn’t you do what
is already in your power to do—to mentally alter the physical
makeup of your brain and body so that you can be changed ahead
of any actual desired experience? Why wouldn’t you opt for living
in the future of your choice—now, ahead of time?
Instead of obsessing about some traumatic or stressful event
that you fear is in your future, based on your experience of the
past, obsess about a new, desired experience that you haven’t yet
embraced emotionally. Allow yourself to live in that potential new
future now, to the extent that your body begins to accept or be-
lieve that you’re experiencing the elevated emotions of that new
future outcome in the present moment. (You’re going to learn how
to do this.)
Remember when I said that my daughter needed to live her
present life like she’d already had the experiences of the great
93
summer in Italy? By doing that, she was broadcasting into the

quantum field that the event had already physically occurred.
The greatest people in the world have demonstrated this, thou-
sands of so-called ordinary people have done it, and you can as
well. You have all the neurological machinery to transcend time,
to make this a skill. What some might call miracles, I describe as
cases of individuals working toward changing their state of being,
so that their bodies and minds are no longer merely a record of
their past but become active partners, taking steps to a new and
better future.
Transcending the Big Three: Peak Experiences

and Ordinary Altered States of Consciousness
At this point, you understand that the main obstacle to break-

ing the habit of being yourself is thinking and feeling equal to your
environment, your body, and time. Obviously, then, learning to
think and feel (be) greater than the “Big Three” is your first goal as
you prepare for the meditation process you will learn in this book.
I’d bet that at some point in your life (perhaps even frequent-
ly) you’ve already been able to think greater than your environ-
ment, your body, and time. These moments when you transcend
the Big Three are what some people call being “in the flow.” There
are a number of ways to describe what happens when our sur-
roundings, our bodies, and our sense of time’s passage disappear
and we are “lost” to the world. In speaking to groups across the
globe, I’ve asked audience members to describe creative moments
when they were so consumed by what they were doing, or were so
relaxed and at ease, that they seemed to enter an altered state of
consciousness.
These experiences generally fall into two categories. The first
of these are the so-called peak experiences, what we think of as
transcendent moments, when we attain a state of being that we
associate with monks and mystics. Compared to those highly
spiritual events, the others may be more mundane, ordinary, and
94
Overcoming Time
prosaic—but that doesn’t mean that they are any less important.
These ordinary moments happened to me many times (al-
though not as often as I would like) while in the process of writ-
ing this book. When I first sit down to write, I often have many
other things on my mind—my busy travel schedule, my patients,
my kids, my staff, how hungry/sleepy/happy I am. On good days,
when the words seem to flow out of me, it is as though my hands
and my keyboard are an extension of my mind. I’m not conscious-
ly aware of my fingers moving or my back resting against the
chair. The trees swaying in the breeze outside my office disappear,
that bit of stiffness in my neck no longer nudges for my attention,
and I am completely focused on and absorbed by the words on my
computer screen. At some point, I realize that an hour or more has
gone by in what seemed an instant.
This kind of thing has likely happened to you—perhaps while
you were driving, watching a movie, enjoying a dinner with good
company, reading, knitting, practicing piano, or simply sitting in
a quiet spot in nature.
I don’t know about you, but I often feel amazingly refreshed
after experiencing one of those moments when my environment,
my body, and time seemed to disappear. They don’t always hap-
pen when I’m writing, but after completing my second book, I
find that they occur with greater frequency. With practice, I’ve
been able to take control so that these experiences of being in the
flow are not as accidental or serendipitous as they were at first.
Overcoming the Big Three to facilitate the occurrence of such
moments is essential for losing your mind and creating a new one.
}}}}
95
CHAPTER FIVE
SURVIVAL VS. CREATION

In the last chapter, I purposely used the example of my writing
to illustrate my point about transcending the Big Three, because
when you write, you are creating words (whether on the physical
page or in a digital document). The same creativity is operating
when you paint, play a musical instrument, turn wood on a lathe,
or engage in any other activity that has the effect of breaking the
bonds that the Big Three hold over you.
Why is it so hard to live in these creative moments? If we focus
on an unwanted past or a dreaded future, that means that we live
mostly in stress—in survival mode. Whether we’re obsessing over
our health (the survival of the body), paying our mortgage (the
survival need for shelter from our external environment), or not
having enough time to do what we need to do to survive, most of
us are much more familiar with the addictive state of mind we’ll
call “survival” than we are with living as creators.
In my first book, I went into great detail about the difference
between living in creation versus living in survival. So for a fuller
explanation of this difference, you may want to read Chapters 8
through 11 in Evolve Your Brain. In the pages that follow, I’m going
to briefly outline the difference between the two.
}}}
97
Think of life in survival mode by picturing an animal, such

as a deer contentedly grazing in the forest. Let’s assume that it is
in homeostasis, in perfect balance. But if it perceives some danger
in the outside world—say, a predator—its fight-or-flight nervous
system gets turned on. This sympathetic nervous system is part of
the autonomic nervous system, which maintains the body’s auto-
matic functions such as digestion, temperature regulation, blood-
sugar levels, and the like. To prepare the animal to deal with the
emergency it has detected, the body is chemically altered—the
sympathetic nervous system automatically activates the adrenal
glands to mobilize enormous amounts of energy. If the deer is
chased by a pack of coyotes, it utilizes that energy to flee. If it is
nimble enough to get away unharmed, then perhaps after 15 to 20
minutes when the threat is no longer present, the animal resumes
grazing, its internal balance restored. That’s short-term stress. All
organisms are designed for short-term stress.
We humans have the same system in place. When we perceive
danger, our sympathetic nervous system is turned on, energy is mo-
bilized, and so on, in much the same way as the deer. During early
human history, this wonderfully adaptive response helped us con-
front threats from predators and other risks to our survival. Those
animal qualities served us well for our evolution as a species.
Thought Alone Can Trigger the Human Stress Response—

and Keep It Going
Unfortunately, there are several differences between Homo sapi-

ens and our planetary cohabitants in the animal kingdom that don’t
serve us as well. Every time we knock the body out of chemical bal-
ance, that’s called “stress.” The stress response is how the body innate-
ly responds when it’s knocked out of balance, and what it does to
return back to equilibrium. Whether we see a lion in the Serengeti,
bump into our not-so-friendly ex at the grocery store, or freak out in
freeway traffic because we’re late for a meeting, we turn on the stress
response because we are reacting to our external environment.
98
Survival vs. Creation
Unlike animals, we have the ability to turn on the fight-or-flight

response by thought alone. And that thought doesn’t have to be
about anything in our present circumstances. We can turn on that
response in anticipation of some future event. Even more disadvan-
tageous, we can produce the same stress response by revisiting an
unhappy memory that is stitched in the fabric of our gray matter.
So either we anticipate stress-response-producing experiences
or we recollect them; our bodies are either existing in the future
or in the past. To our detriment, we turn short-term stressful situ-
ations into long-term ones.
On the other hand, as far as we can tell, animals don’t have the
ability (or should I say disability) to turn on the stress response so
frequently and so easily that they can’t turn it off. That deer, back
to happily grazing, isn’t consumed with thoughts about what just
happened a few minutes ago, let alone the time a coyote chased
it two months ago. This kind of repetitive stress is harmful to us,
because no organism was designed with a mechanism to deal with
negative effects on the body when the stress response is turned
on with great frequency and for long duration. In other words, no
creature can avoid the consequences of living in long-term emer-
gency situations. When we turn on the stress response and can’t
turn it off, we’re headed for some type of breakdown in the body.
Let’s say you keep turning on the fight-or-flight system due
to some threatening circumstance in your life (real or imagined).
As your racing heart pumps enormous amounts of blood to your
extremities and your body is knocked out of homeostasis, you’re
becoming prepared by the nervous system to run or fight. But let’s
face it: you can’t flee to the Bahamas, nor can you throttle your
fellow employee—that would be primitive. So as a consequence,
you condition your heart to race all the time, and you may be
headed for high blood pressure, arrhythmias, and so on.
And what’s in store when you keep mobilizing all that en-
ergy for some emergency situation? If you’re putting the bulk of
your energy toward some issue in your external environment,
there will be little left for your body’s internal environment. Your
99
immune system, which monitors your inner world, can’t keep up

with the lack of energy for growth and repair. Therefore, you get
sick, whether it be from a cold, cancer, or rheumatoid arthritis.
(All are immune-mediated conditions.)
When you think about it, the real difference between animals
and ourselves is that although we both experience stress, humans
reexperience and “pre-experience” traumatic situations. What is
so harmful about having our stress response triggered by pressures
from the past, present, and future? When we get knocked out of
chemical balance so often, eventually that out-of-balance state be-
comes the norm. As a result, we are destined to live out our genetic
destiny, and in most cases that means suffering from some illness.
The reason is clear: The domino effect from the cascade of
hormones and other chemicals we release in response to stress
can dysregulate some of our genes, and that may create disease. In
other words, repeated stress pushes the genetic buttons that cause
us to begin to head toward our genetic destiny. So what was once
very adaptive behavior and a beneficial biochemical response
(fight or flight) has become a highly maladaptive and harmful set
of circumstances.
For instance, when a lion was chasing your ancestors, the
stress response was doing what it was designed to do—protect
them from their outer environment. That’s adaptive. But if, for
days on end, you fret about your promotion, overfocus on your
presentation to upper management, or worry about your mother
being in the hospital, these situations create the same chemicals
as though you were being chased by a lion.
Now, that’s maladaptive. You’re staying too long in emergency
mode. Fight-or-flight is using up the energy your internal envi-
ronment needs. Your body is stealing this vital energy from your
immune, digestive, and endocrine systems, among others, and di-
recting it to the muscles that you’d use to fight a predator or run
from danger. But in your situation, that’s only working against you.
From a psychological perspective, overproduction of stress
hormones creates the human emotions of anger, fear, envy, and
hatred; incites feelings of aggression, frustration, anxiety, and
100
insecurity; and causes us to experience pain, suffering, sadness,

hopelessness, and depression. Most people spend the majority of
their time preoccupied with negative thoughts and feelings. Is it
likely that most of the things that are happening in our present
circumstances are negative? Obviously not. Negativity runs so
high because we are either living in anticipation of stress or re-
experiencing it through a memory, so most of our thoughts and
feelings are driven by those strong hormones of stress and sur-
vival.
When our stress response is triggered, we focus on three
things, and they are of highest importance:
• The body. (It must be taken care of.)

• The environment. (Where can I go to escape this
threat?)
• Time. (How much of it do I have to use in order to evade
this threat?)
Living in survival is the reason why we humans are so domi-

nated by the Big Three. The stress response and the hormones that
it triggers force us to focus on (and obsess about) the body, the
environment, and time. As a result, we begin to define our “self”
within the confines of the physical realm; we become less spiri-
tual, less conscious, less aware, and less mindful.
Put another way, we grow to be “materialists”—that is, habitu-
ally consumed by thoughts of things in the external environment.
Our identity becomes wrapped up in our bodies. We are absorbed
by the outer world because that is what those chemicals force us
to pay attention to—things we own, people we know, places we
have to go, problems we face, hairstyles we dislike, our body parts,
our weight, our looks in comparison to others, how much time we
have or don’t have . . . you get the picture. And we remember who
we are based primarily on what we know and the things we do.
Living in survival causes us to focus on the .00001 percent
instead of the 99.99999 percent of reality.
101
Survival: Living as a “Somebody”
Most of us embrace the traditional notion of ourselves as a

“somebody.” But who we really are has nothing to do with the Big
Three. Who we are is a consciousness connected to a quantum
field of intelligence.
When we become this somebody, this materialistic physical
self living in survival, we forget who we truly are. We become
disconnected and feel separate from the universal field of intel-
ligence. The more we live impacted by stress hormones, the more
their chemical rush becomes our identity.
If we fancy ourselves solely physical beings, we limit ourselves
to perceiving only with our physical senses. The more we use our
senses to define our reality, the more we allow our senses to deter-
mine our reality. We slip into that Newtonian mode of thinking,
which locks us into trying to predict the future based on some
past experience. If you recall, the Newtonian model of reality is
all about predicting an outcome. Now we are trying to control
our reality instead of surrendering to something greater. All we’re
doing is trying to survive.
If the quantum model of reality ultimately defines everything
as energy, why do we experience ourselves more as physical beings
than as beings of energy? We could say that the survival-oriented
emotions (emotions are energy in motion) are lower-frequency or
lower-energy emotions. They vibrate at a slower wavelength and
therefore ground us into being physical. We become denser, heavi-
er, and more corporeal, because that energy causes us to vibrate
more slowly. The body quite literally becomes composed of more
mass and less energy . . . more matter, less mind.1
102
Figure 5A. The higher-frequency waves at the top are vibrating faster and there-
fore are closer to the vibratory rate of energy and less to that of matter. Moving
down the scale, you can see that the slower the wavelength, the more “material”
the energy becomes. Thus, the survival emotions ground us to be more like mat-
ter and less like energy. Emotions such as anger, hatred, suffering, shame, guilt,
judgment, and lust make us feel more physical, because they carry a frequency
that is slower and more like that of physical objects. However, the more elevated
emotions such as love, joy, and gratitude are higher in frequency. As a result,
they are more energy-like and less physical/material.
So it might make sense that if we inhibit our more primitive

survival emotions and begin to break our addiction to them, our
energy will be higher in frequency, and less likely to root us to
the body. In a way, we can liberate energy from the body, when
the body has “become” the mind, into the quantum field. As our
emotions become more elevated, we will naturally ascend to a
higher level of consciousness, closer to Source . . . and feel more
connected to universal intelligence.
103
Addicted to Being a Somebody
When the stress response is turned on, whether in response to

a real or conjured-up threat, a powerful cascade of chemicals rushes
into our system and gives us a strong jolt of energy, momentarily
“waking up” our bodies and certain parts of the brain to put all of
our attention on the Big Three. This is very addictive to us because
it’s like drinking a triple espresso—we get turned “on” for a few
moments.
In time, we unconsciously become addicted to our problems, our
unfavorable circumstances, or our unhealthy relationships. We keep
these situations in our lives to feed our addiction to survival-oriented
emotions, so that we can remember who we think we are as a some-
body. We just love the rush of energy we get from our troubles!
Moreover, we also associate this emotional high with every
person, thing, place, and experience in our outer world that is
known and familiar. We become addicted to these elements in our
environment as well; we embrace our environment as our identity.
If you agree that we can turn on the stress response just by
thinking, then it stands to reason that we can get the same rush of
addictive stress chemicals as if we were being chased by a predator.
As a consequence, we become addicted to our very thoughts; they
begin to give us an unconscious adrenaline high, and we find it
very hard to think differently. To think greater than how we feel
or to think outside of the proverbial box becomes just too uncom-
fortable. The moment we begin to deny ourselves the substance
we are addicted to—in this case, the familiar thoughts and feel-
ings associated with our emotional addiction—there are cravings,
withdrawal pains, and a host of inner subvocalizations urging us
not to change. And so we remain chained to our familiar reality.
Thus, our thoughts and feelings, which are predominantly
self-limiting, hook us back to all the problems, conditions, stress-
ors, and bad choices that produced the fight-or-flight effect in the
first place. We keep all these negative stimuli around us so that we
can produce the stress response, because that addiction reinforces
the idea of who we are, only serving to reaffirm our own personal
identity. Simply put, most of us are addicted to the problems and
104
conditions of our lives that produce stress. No matter whether

we’re in a bad job or a bad relationship, we hold our troubles close
to us because they help reinforce who we are as a somebody; they
feed our addictions to low-frequency emotions.
Most harmful of all, we live in fear that if those problems were
taken away, we wouldn’t know what to think and how to feel, and
we wouldn’t get to experience the rush of energy that causes us
to remember who we are. For most of us, God forbid we not be a
somebody. How awful would it be to be a “nobody,” to not have
an identity?
The Selfish Self
As you can see, what we identify as our self exists within the
context of our collective emotional association with our thoughts
and feelings, our problems, and all those elements of the Big Three.
Is it any wonder that people find it so hard to go within and leave
this self-produced reality behind? How would we know who we
are if it weren’t for our environment, our bodies, and time? That’s
why we are so dependent upon the external world. We limit our-
selves to using our senses to define and cultivate emotions, so that
we can receive the physiological feedback that reaffirms our own
personal addictions. We do all this to feel human.
When our survival response is way out of proportion to what
is happening in our outer world, that excess of stress-response hor-
mones causes us to become fixated within the parameters of self.
So we become overly selfish. We obsess about our bodies or a par-
ticular aspect of our environment, and we live enslaved to time.
We’re trapped in this particular reality, and we feel powerless to
change, to break the habit of being ourselves.
These excessive survival emotions tip the scales of a healthy
ego (the self we consciously refer to when we say “I”). When the
ego is in check, its natural job is to make sure we are protected and
safe in the outer world. As an example, the ego makes sure we stay
far away from a bonfire or a few steps away from the cliff’s edge.
105
When the ego is balanced, its natural instinct is self-preservation.

There’s a healthy balance between its needs and those of others,
its attention to itself and to others.
When we’re in survival mode in an emergency situation, it
makes sense that the self should take priority. But when chronic,
long-term stress chemicals push the body and brain out of bal-
ance, the ego becomes overfocused on survival and puts the self
first, to the exclusion of anything else—we’re selfish all the time.
Thus, we become self-indulgent, self-centered, and self-important,
full of self-pity and self-loathing. When the ego is under constant
stress, it’s got a “me first” priority.
Under those conditions, the ego is primarily concerned with
predicting every outcome of every situation, because it is overfo-
cused on the outer world and feels completely separated from the
99.99999 percent of possibility. In fact, the more we define reality
through our senses, the more this reality becomes our law. And
material reality as law is the very opposite of the quantum law.
Whatever we place our awareness on is our reality. Consequently,
if our attention is focused on the body and our physical realm,
and if we become locked into a particular line of linear time, then
this becomes our reality.
To forget about the people we know, the problems we have,
the things we own, and the places we go; to lose track of time; to
go beyond the body and its need to feed its habituations; to give
up the high from emotionally familiar experiences that reaffirm
the identity; to detach from trying to predict a future condition
or review a past memory; to lay down the selfish ego that is only
concerned with its needs; to think or dream greater than how we
feel, and crave the unknown—this is the beginning of freedom
from our present lives.
If Our Thoughts Can Make Us Sick,

Can They Make Us Well?
Let’s go one step further. I explained earlier that we can turn

on the stress response by thought alone. I also mentioned the
106
scientific fact that the chemicals associated with stress pull the ge-
netic trigger by creating a very harsh environment outside of our
cells and thus creating disease. So by pure reason, our thoughts
can actually make us sick. If our thoughts can make us sick, might
they also make us well?
Let’s say that a person had some experiences within a short time
frame that caused him to feel resentful. As a result of his unconscious
reactions to those occurrences, he held on to his bitterness.
Chemicals corresponding to this emotion flooded his cells. Over
weeks, his emotion turned into a mood, which continued for
months and changed into a temperament, which was sustained for
years and formed a strong personality trait called resentment. In fact,
he memorized this emotion so well that the body knew resentment
better than the conscious mind, because he remained in a cycle of
thinking and feeling, feeling and thinking, that way for years.
Based on what you learned about emotions as the chemical
signature of an experience, wouldn’t you agree that as long as this
person clings to resentment, his body will react as though it is still
experiencing the long-ago events that first caused him to embrace
this emotion? Moreover, if the body’s reaction to those chemicals
of resentment disrupted the function of certain genes, and this
sustained reaction kept signaling the same genes to respond in the
same way, might the body eventually develop a physical condition
such as cancer?
If so, is it possible that once he unmemorized the emotion of
continuous resentment—by no longer thinking the thoughts that
created the feelings of resentment, and vice versa—his body (as the
unconscious mind) would be free from that emotional enslave-
ment? In time, would he stop signaling the genes the same way?
And finally, let’s say he began thinking and feeling in new
ways, to such a degree that he invented a new ideal of himself re-
lated to a new personality. As he moved into a new state of being,
might he signal his genes in beneficial ways and condition the
body into an elevated emotional state, ahead of the actual experi-
ence of good health? Could he do this to the extent that the body
would begin to change by thought alone?
107
What I just described in simple terms happened to a student

in one of my seminars, who overcame cancer.
}}}
Bill, 57, was a roofing contractor. A lesion had appeared on

his face, and a dermatologist diagnosed malignant melanoma. Al-
though Bill underwent surgery, radiation, and chemotherapy, the
cancer recurred in his neck, then his side, and finally his calf.
Each time, he underwent a similar course of treatment.
Naturally, Bill experienced “Why me?” moments. He under-
stood that his excessive sun exposure was a risk factor, but he
knew others who had been similarly exposed and didn’t develop
cancer. He fixated on that unfairness.
After treatment for the same cancer on his left flank, Bill pon-
dered whether his own thoughts, emotions, and behaviors had
contributed to his condition. In a moment of self-reflection, he
realized that for more than 30 years, he had been stuck in resent-
ment, thinking and feeling that he always had to give up what he
wanted for the sake of others.
For example, he had wanted to become a professional musician
after high school. But when an injury left his father unable to work,
Bill had to join his family’s roofing company. He habitually reex-
perienced his feelings upon being told he had to give up his aspira-
tions, to the extent that his body still lived in that past. This also set
up a pattern of dreams deferred. Whenever something didn’t go his
way, such as the housing market collapsing just after he expanded
the business, he always found someone or something to blame.
Bill had so memorized the emotional response pattern of bit-
terness that it dominated his personality and became an uncon-
scious program. His state of being had signaled the same genes for
so long that they had created the disease that now afflicted him.
No longer could Bill allow his environment to control him:
the people, places, and influences in his life had always dictated
how he thought, felt, and behaved. He sensed that to break the
bonds with his old self and reinvent a new one, he would have to
leave his familiar environment. So for two weeks in Baja, Mexico,
he retreated from his familiar life.
108
The first five mornings, Bill contemplated how he thought

when he felt resentment. He became a quantum observer of his
thoughts and feelings; he became conscious of his unconscious
mind. Next, he paid attention to his previously unconscious be-
haviors and actions. He decided to halt any thought, behavior, or
emotion that was unloving toward himself.
After the first week of this vigilance, Bill felt free, because he
had liberated his body from its emotional addiction to resent-
ment. By inhibiting the familiar thoughts and feelings that had
driven his behaviors, in a sense he impeded the signals of the sur-
vival emotions from conditioning his body to the same mind. His
body then released energy, which was available to use to design a
new destiny for himself.
For the next week, Bill became so uplifted that he thought
about the new self he wanted to be, and how he would respond
to the people, places, and influences that previously controlled
him. For instance, he decided that whenever his wife and kids
expressed a wish or need, he would respond with kindness and
generosity instead of making them feel like a burden. In short, he
focused on how he wanted to think, act, and feel when presented
with situations that had challenged him in the past. He was creat-
ing a new personality, a new mind, and a new state of being.
Bill began to put into practice what he’d placed in his mind
while sitting on that Baja beach. Shortly after his return, he noticed
that the tumor on his calf had fallen off. In a week or so, when he
went to his doctor, he was cancer free. He has remained that way.
By firing his brain in new ways, Bill changed biologically and
chemically from his previous self. As a result, he signaled new
genes in new ways; and those cancer cells couldn’t coexist with
his new mind, new internal chemistry, and new self. Once trapped
by the emotions of the past, he now lives in a new future.
A new personality manifested a new personal reality. In Bill’s
case, the cancer belonged to the old persona. He literally became
someone else.
109
Creation: Living as a Nobody
At the end of the previous chapter, I briefly described what it is

like to live in creative mode. Those are the moments of being fully
engaged and in flow so that the environment, the body, and time
all seem immaterial and don’t invade our conscious thoughts.
Living in creation is living as a nobody. Ever notice that when
you’re truly in the midst of creating anything, you forget about
yourself? You dissociate from your known world. You are no longer
a somebody who associates your identity with certain things you
own, particular people you know, certain tasks you do, and differ-
ent places you lived at specific times. You could say that when you
are in a creative state, you forget about the habit of being you. You
lay down your selfish ego and become self-less.
You have moved beyond time and space and become pure, im-
material awareness. Once you’re no longer connected to a body;
no longer focused on people, places, or things in your external
environment; and beyond linear time, you’re entering the door
of the quantum field. You cannot enter as a somebody, you must
do so as a nobody. You have to leave the self-centered ego at the
door and enter the realm of consciousness as pure consciousness.
And as I said in Chapter 1, in order to change your body (to foster
better health), something in your external circumstances (a new
job or relationship, perhaps), or your timeline (toward a possible
future reality), you have to become no body, no thing, no time.
Thus, here is the grand hint: to change any aspect of your life
(body, environment, or time), you must transcend it and detach
from your present familiar reality. You must leave behind the Big
Three in order to control the Big Three.
The Frontal Lobe: Domain of Creation and Change
When we are in creation, we are activating the brain’s creative

center, the frontal lobe (part of the forebrain and comprising the
prefrontal cortex). This is the newest, most evolved part of our
human nervous system and the most adaptable part of the brain.
110
It tends to be the creative center of who we are, and the brain’s

CEO or decision-making apparatus. The frontal lobe is the seat of
our attention, focused concentration, awareness, observation, and
consciousness. It is where we speculate on possibilities, demon-
strate firm intention, make conscious decisions, control impulsive
and emotional behaviors, and learn new things.
For the sake of our understanding, the frontal lobe performs
three essential functions. These will all come into play as you
learn and practice the how-to meditative steps for breaking the
habit of being yourself in Part III of this book.
1. Metacognition: Becoming Self-Aware to Inhibit

Unwanted States of Mind and Body
If you want to create a new self, you first have to stop being the
old self. In the process of creation, the first function of the frontal
lobe is to become self-aware.
Because we have metacognitive capabilities—the power to ob-
serve our own thoughts and self—we can decide how we no longer
want to be . . . to think, act, and feel. This ability to self-reflect allows
us to scrutinize ourselves and then make a plan to modify our be-
haviors so we can produce more enlightened or desirable outcomes.2
Your attention is where you place your energy. To use attention
to empower your life, you will have to examine what you’ve already
created. This is where you begin to “know thyself.” You look at your
beliefs about life, yourself, and others. You are what you are, you are
where you are, and you are who you are because of what you believe
about yourself. Your beliefs are the thoughts you keep consciously
or unconsciously accepting as the law in your life. Whether you are
aware of them or not, they still affect your reality.
So if you truly want a new personal reality, start observing all
aspects of your present personality. Since they primarily operate
below the level of conscious awareness, much like automatic software
programs, you’ll have to go within and look at these elements you
probably haven’t been aware of before. Given that your personality
comprises how you think, act, and feel, you must pay attention to your
111
unconscious thoughts, reflexive behaviors, and automatic emotional

reactions—put them under observation to determine if they are true
and whether you want to continue to endorse them with your energy.
To become familiar with your unconscious states of mind and
body takes an act of will, intention, and heightened awareness. If you
become more aware, you will become more attentive. If you become
more attentive, you will be more conscious. If you grow to be more
conscious, you will notice more. If you notice more, you have a great-
er ability to observe self and others, both inner and outer elements of
your reality. Ultimately, the more you observe, the more you awaken
from the state of the unconscious mind into conscious awareness.
The purpose of becoming self-aware is so that you no longer
allow any thought, action, or emotion you don’t want to experience
to pass by your awareness. Thus, in time, your ability to consciously
inhibit those states of being will stop the same firing and wiring of
the old neural networks that are related to the old personality. And
as a result of no longer re-creating the same mind on a daily basis,
you prune away the hardware that is related to the old self. In ad-
dition, by interrupting the feelings that are associated with those
thoughts, you are no longer signaling genes in the same way. You
are stopping the body from reaffirming itself as the same mind.
This process is whereby you quite simply begin to “lose your mind.”
So as you develop the skill of becoming familiar with all as-
pects of your old self, you will ultimately become more conscious.
Your goal here is to unlearn who you used to be, so that you can
free up energy to create a new life, a new personality. You can’t
create a new personal reality as the same personality. You have to be-
come someone else. Metacognition is your first task in moving
from your past to creating a new future.
2. Creating a New Mind to Think about

New Ways of Being
The second function of the frontal lobe is to create a new

mind—to break out of the neural networks produced by the ways
112
that your brain has been firing for years on end, and influence it
to rewire in new ways.
When we set aside time and private space to think about a new
way of being, that is when the frontal lobe engages in creation. We
can imagine fresh possibilities and ask ourselves important ques-
tions about what we really want, how and who we want to be, and
what we want to change about ourselves and our circumstances.
Because the frontal lobe has connections to all other parts of
the brain, it is able to scan across all the neural circuits to seam-
lessly piece together stored bits of information in the form of net-
works of knowledge and experience. Then it picks and chooses
among those neural circuits, combining them in a variety of ways
to create a new mind. In doing that, it creates a model or internal
representation that we see as a picture of our intended result. It
makes sense, then, that the more knowledge we have, the greater
the variety of neural networks we’ve wired, and the more capable
we are of dreaming of more complex and detailed models.
To initiate this step of creation, it is always good to move into
a state of wonder, contemplation, possibility, reflection, or specu-
lation by asking yourself some important questions. Open-ended
inquiries are the most provocative approach to producing a fluent
stream of consciousness:
• What would it be like to . . . ?

• What is a better way to be . . . ?
• What if I was this person, living in this reality?
• Who in history do I admire, and what were his/her
admirable traits?
The answers that come will naturally form a new mind, be-
cause as you sincerely respond to them, your brain will begin to
work in new ways. By beginning to mentally rehearse new ways of
being, you start rewiring yourself neurologically to a new mind—
and the more you can “re-mind” yourself, the more you’ll change
your brain and your life.
113
Whether you want to be wealthy or a better parent—or a great

wizard, for that matter—it might not be a bad idea to fill your
brain with knowledge on your chosen subject, so you have more
building blocks to make a new model of the reality you want to
embrace. Every time you acquire information, you’re adding new
synaptic connections that will serve as the raw materials to break
the pattern of your brain firing the same way. The more you learn,
the more ammo you have to unseat the old personality.
Figure 5B. When the frontal lobe is working in creative mode, it looks out over
the landscape of the entire brain and gathers all of the brain’s information to
create a new mind. If compassion is the new state of being that you want to
create, then once you ask yourself what it would be like to be compassionate,
the frontal lobe would naturally combine different neural networks together
in new ways to create a new model or vision. It might take stored information
from books you read, DVDs you saw, personal experiences, and so forth to
make the brain work in new ways. Once the new mind is in place, you see a
picture, hologram, or vision of what compassion means to you.
114
3. Making Thought More Real Than Anything Else
During the creative process, the frontal lobe’s third vital role
is to make thought more real than anything else. (Stay tuned for
the how-to in Part III.)
When we’re in a creative state, the frontal lobe becomes high-
ly activated and lowers the volume on the circuits in the rest of
the brain so that little else is being processed but a single-minded
thought.3 Since the frontal lobe is the executive that mediates the
rest of the brain, it can monitor all of the “geography.” So it low-
ers the volume on the sensory centers (responsible for “feeling” the
body), motor centers (responsible for moving the body), association
centers (where our identity exists), and the circuits that process time
. . . in order to quiet them all down. With very little neural activity,
we could say that there is no mind to process sensory input (remem-
ber that mind is the brain in action), no mind to activate movement
within the environment, and no mind to associate activities with
time; then we have no body, we have become “no thing,” we are no
time. We are, in that moment, pure consciousness. With the noise
shut off in those areas of the brain, the state of creativity is one in
which there is no ego or self as we have known it.
When you are in creation mode, the frontal lobe is in control.
It becomes so engaged that your thoughts become your reality and
your experience. Whatever you’re thinking about in those mo-
ments is all there is for the frontal lobe to process. As it “lowers the
volume” from other areas of the brain, it shuts out distractions.
The inner world of thought becomes as real as the outer world
of reality. Your thoughts are captured neurologically and branded
into your brain’s architecture as an experience.
If you effectively execute the creative process, this experience
produces an emotion, as you know, and you begin to feel like that
event is actually happening to you in the present. You are one
with the thoughts and feelings associated with your desired real-
ity. You are now in a new state of being. You could say that in that
moment, you are now rewriting the subconscious programs by re-
conditioning the body to a new mind.
115
Figure 5C. When the thought that you are attending to becomes the experience,
the frontal lobe quiets down the rest of the brain so that nothing else is being pro-
cessed but that single-minded thought. You become still, you no longer feel your
body, you no longer perceive time and space, and you forget about yourself.
Lose Your Mind, Liberate Your Energy
In the act of creation, when we become that nobody or no thing

in no time, we no longer create our customary chemical signature,
because we are not the same identity; we don’t think and feel in the
same way. Those neural networks our survival thinking had wired
are turned off, and the personality that was addicted to continually
signaling the body to produce stress hormones is . . . gone.
116
In short, the emotional self that lived in survival mode is no

longer functioning. The moment that happens, our former identity,
the “state of being” bound by survival-based thinking and feeling,
is no more. Since we are no longer “being” the same being, emo-
tional energy that had been bound to the body is now free to move.
So where does the energy go that once fed that emotional self?
It has to go somewhere, so it moves to a new place. That energy in
the form of emotion moves up the body from the lower hormonal
centers (sexual, digestive, and adrenal) to the heart area (on its
way to the brain) . . . and all of a sudden we feel great, joyful,
expanded. We fall in love with our creation. That’s when we ex-
perience our natural state of being. Once we stop energizing that
emotional self powered by the stress response, we have moved
from being selfish to selfless.4
With that old energy transmuted into a higher-frequency emo-
tion, the body is liberated from its emotional bondage. We are lifted
above the horizon to behold a whole new landscape. No longer per-
ceiving reality through the lenses of those past survival emotions,
we see new possibilities. We are now quantum observers of a new
destiny. And that release heals the body and frees the mind.
}}}
Let’s revisit the chart of energy and frequencies from the survival
emotions to the elevated emotions (see Figure 5A). When anger or
shame or lust are released from the body, they will be transmuted
into joy, love, or gratitude. On this journey to broadcasting higher
energy, the body (which we conditioned to be the mind) becomes
less “of the mind” and becomes more coherent energy; the matter
that makes up the body expresses a higher vibratory rate, and we feel
more connected to something greater. We are more wave and less
particle. In short, we are demonstrating more of our divine nature.
When you’re living in survival, you’re trying to control or
force an outcome; that’s what the ego does. When you’re living in
the elevated emotion of creation, you feel so lifted that you would
never try to analyze how or when a chosen destiny will arrive. You
trust that it will happen because you have already experienced it
117
in mind and body—in thought and feeling. You know that it will,
because you feel connected to something greater. You are in a state
of gratitude because you feel like it’s already happened.
You may not know all the specifics of your desired outcome—
when it will take place, where, and under what circumstances—
but you trust in a future that you can’t see or otherwise perceive
with your senses. To you it has already occurred in no space, no
time, no place, from which all things material spring forth. You
are in a state of knowingness; you can relax into the present and
no longer live in survival.
To anticipate or analyze when, where, or how the event will
occur would only cause you to return to your old identity. You are in
such joy that it’s impossible to try to figure it out; that’s only what
human beings do when they are living in limited states of survival.
As you linger in this creative state where you are no longer
your identity, the nerve cells that once fired together to form that
old self are no longer wiring together. That’s when the old person-
ality is being biologically dismantled. Those feelings connected
to that identity, which conditioned the body to the same mind,
are no longer signaling the same genes in the same ways. And the
more you overcome your ego, the more the physical evidence of
the old personality is changed. The old you is gone.
118
Figure 5D. Survival mode versus creation mode.
By completing Part I of this book, you have intentionally ac-

quired a knowledge base that will help you create your new self.
Now let’s build on that base.
We’ve covered a lot of possibilities: the concept that your
subjective mind can affect your objective world; your potential
to change your brain and body by becoming greater than your
environment, your body, and time; and the prospect that you can
119
move out of the reactive, stressful mode of living in survival, as

though only the outer world is real, and enter the inner world of
the creator. It is my hope that you can now view these possibilities
as possible realities.
If you can, then I invite you to continue on to Part II, where
you will gain specific information about the role of your brain and
the meditative process that will prepare you to create real and last-
ing change in your life.
}}}}
120
PA R T I I
YOUR BRAIN
AND
MEDITATION
CH AP TER SIX
THREE BR AINS:
THINKING TO
DOING TO BEING
It’s often useful to compare one’s brain to a computer, and it’s
true that yours already has all the hardware you’ll need to change
your “self” and your life. But do you know how best to use that
hardware to install new software?
Picture two computers with identical hardware and soft-
ware—one in the hands of a tech novice, and the other being
used by an experienced computer operator. The beginner knows
little about what kinds of things a computer can do, let alone
how to do them.
The intention behind Part II, simply put, is to provide perti-
nent information about the brain so that when you, as its opera-
tor, begin to use the meditative process to change your life, you
will know what needs to happen in your brain and in your medi-
tations, and why.
123
Change Entails New Ways of

Thinking, Doing, and Being
If you know how to drive a car, then you’ve already experi-

enced probably the most elementary example of thinking, doing,
and being. At first, you had to think about every action you took,
and about all those rules of the road. Later, you became fairly profi-
cient at driving, as long as you paid conscious attention to what you
were doing. Eventually, you were being a driver; your conscious mind
slid over and became a passenger, and ever since, your subconscious
mind has probably occupied the driver’s seat most of the time; driv-
ing has become automatic and second nature to you. Much of what
you learn is via this progression from thinking to doing to being,
and three areas of the brain facilitate this mode of learning.
But did you know that you can also go directly from thinking
to being—and it’s likely that you’ve already experienced this in
your life? Through the meditation that is at the heart of this book
(this chapter will give you a prelude), you can go from thinking
about the ideal self you want to become, straight to being that new
self. That is the key to quantum creating.
Change all begins with thinking: we can immediately form
new neurological connections and circuits that reflect our new
thoughts. And nothing gets the brain more excited than when
it’s learning—assimilating knowledge and experiences. These are
aphrodisiacs for the brain; it “fondles” every signal it receives from
our five senses. Every second, it processes billions of bits of data;
it analyzes, examines, identifies, extrapolates, classifies, and files
information, which it can retrieve for us on an “as needed” basis.
Truly, the human brain is this planet’s ultimate supercomputer.
As you’ll recall, the basis for understanding how you can actu-
ally change your mind is the concept of hardwiring—how neurons
engage in long-term, habitual relationships. I’ve talked about Heb-
bian learning, which states: “Nerve cells that fire together, wire
together.” (Neuroscientists used to think that after childhood,
brain structure was relatively immutable. But new findings reveal
124
Three Brains: Thinking to Doing to Being
that many aspects of the brain and nervous system can change
structurally and functionally—including learning, memory, and
recovery from brain damage—throughout adulthood.)
But the opposite is also true: “Nerve cells that no longer fire to-
gether, no longer wire together.” If you don’t use it, you lose it. You
can even focus conscious thought to disconnect or unwire unwanted
connections. Thus, it is possible to let go of some of the “stuff” you’ve
been holding on to that colors the way you think, act, and feel. The
rewired brain will no longer fire according to the circuitry of the past.
The gift of neuroplasticity (the brain’s ability to rewire and cre-
ate new circuits at any age as a result of input from the environ-
ment and our conscious intentions) is that we can create a new
level of mind. There’s a sort of neurological “out with the old,
in with the new,” a process that neuroscientists call pruning and
sprouting. It’s what I call unlearning and learning, and it creates
the opportunity for us to rise above our current limitations and to
be greater than our conditioning or circumstances.
In creating a new habit of being ourselves, we are essentially
taking conscious control over what had become an unconscious
process of being. Instead of the mind working toward one goal
(I’m not going to be an angry person) and the body working toward
another (Let’s stay angry and keep bathing in those familiar chemicals),
we want to unify the mind’s intent with the body’s responses. To
do this, we must create a new way of thinking, doing, and being.
Given that to change our lives, we first have to change our
thoughts and feelings, then do something (change our actions or
behaviors) to have a new experience, which in turn produces a
new feeling, and then we must memorize that feeling until we
move into a state of being (when mind and body are one), at least
we’ve got a few things going for us. Along with the brain being
neuroplastic, we could say that we have more than one brain to
work with. In effect, we have three of them.
(For our purposes, this chapter will limit its focus to those func-
tions of the “three brains” that relate specifically to breaking the
habit of being ourselves. On a personal note, I find that studying
125
what the brain and the other components of the nervous system do
for us is an endlessly fascinating exploration. My first book, Evolve
Your Brain, covered this topic in more detail than would serve our
purposes here; there are additional resources for study on my web-
site, www.drjoedispenza.com; and of course, many other excel-
lent publications and websites are available for those who want to
learn more about the brain, the mind, and the body.)
Figure 6A. The “first brain,” the neocortex or thinking brain (in white). The “second
brain” is the limbic or emotional brain, responsible for creating, maintaining,
and organizing chemicals in the body (in gray). The “third brain,” the
cerebellum, is the seat of the subconscious mind (in charcoal).
126
From Thinking to Doing: The Neocortex Processes

Knowledge, Then Prompts Us to Live What We Learned
Our “thinking brain” is the neocortex, the brain’s walnut-like

outer covering. Humanity’s newest, most advanced neurological
hardware, the neocortex is the seat of the conscious mind, our
identity, and other higher brain functions. (The frontal lobe,
discussed in earlier chapters, is one of four parts of the neocortex.)
Essentially, the neocortex is the brain’s architect or designer.
It allows you to learn, remember, reason, analyze, plan, create,
speculate on possibilities, invent, and communicate. Since this
area is where you log sensory data such as what you see and hear,
the neocortex plugs you into external reality.
In general, the neocortex processes knowledge and experi-
ence. First, you gather knowledge in the form of facts or semantic
information (philosophical or theoretical concepts or ideas that
you learn intellectually), prompting the neocortex to add new
synaptic connections and circuits.
Second, once you decide to personalize or apply knowledge
you have acquired—to demonstrate what you learned—you will
invariably create a new experience. This causes patterns of neu-
rons called neural networks to form in the neocortex. These net-
works reinforce the circuitry of what you learned intellectually.
If the neocortex had a motto, it might be: Knowledge is for the
mind.
Simply put, knowledge is the precursor to experience: Your
neocortex is responsible for processing ideas that you have not yet
experienced, which exist as a potential for you to embrace at some
future time. As you entertain new thoughts, you begin to think
about modifying your behavior so that you can do something
differently when the opportunity presents itself, in order to have
a new outcome. As you then alter your routine actions and typical
behaviors, something different from the norm should happen,
which will produce a new event for you to experience.
127
From New Events to New Emotions: The Limbic Brain

Produces Chemicals to Help Us Remember Experiences
The limbic brain (also known as the mammalian brain), located

under the neocortex, is the most highly developed and specialized
area of the brain in mammals other than humans, dolphins, and
higher primates. Just think of the limbic brain as the “chemical
brain” or the “emotional brain.”
When you’re in the midst of that new experience, and your
senses send a rush of corresponding information from the exter-
nal world to your neocortex, its neural networks organize them-
selves to reflect the event. Thus, experience enriches the brain
even further than new knowledge.
The moment those networks of neurons fire with a pattern spe-
cific to that new experience, the emotional brain manufactures and
releases chemicals in the form of peptides. This chemical cocktail has
a specific signature that reflects the emotions you are experiencing in
the moment. As you now know, emotions are the end products of ex-
perience; a new experience creates a new emotion (which signals new
genes in new ways). Thus, emotions signal the body to record the
event chemically, and you begin to embody what you are learning.
In the process, the limbic brain assists in forming long-term
memories: you can remember any experience better because you
can recall how you felt emotionally while the event was occur-
ring. (The neocortex and limbic brain together enable us to form
declarative memories, meaning that we can declare what we’ve
learned or experienced.1 See Figure 6B[1] for more information on
declarative and nondeclarative memories.)
You can see, then, how we are marked emotionally by highly
charged experiences. All people who have been married can tell
you where they were and what they were doing when they or their
beloved proposed. Perhaps they were eating a great meal on the
patio of their favorite restaurant, feeling the balmy breezes of that
summer night and enjoying the sunset while the strains of Mozart
played softly in the background, when their dinner partner got
down on one knee and held out a little black box.
128
The combination of everything they were experiencing in

that moment made them feel very different from their normal
self. The typical internal chemical balance that their identity self
had memorized got knocked out of order by what they saw, heard,
and felt. In a sense, they woke up from the familiar, routine en-
vironmental stimuli that typically bombard the brain and cause
us to think and feel in predictable ways. Novel events surprise us
to the point that we become more aware in the present moment.
If the limbic brain had a motto, it might be: Experience is for
the body.
If knowledge is for the mind, and experience is for the body,
then when you apply knowledge and create a new experience, you
teach the body what the mind has intellectually learned. Knowl-
edge without experience is merely philosophy; experience without
knowledge is ignorance. There’s a progression that has to take place.
You have to take knowledge and live it—embrace it emotionally.
If you’re still with me as I’ve been discussing how to change your
life, you’ve learned about gaining knowledge, and then taking action
to have a new experience, which produces a new feeling. Next, you
have to memorize that feeling and move what you’ve learned from
the conscious mind to the subconscious mind. You’ve already got the
hardware to do that in the third brain area we’ll discuss.
From Thinking and Doing to Being: The Cerebellum

Stores Habitual Thoughts, Attitudes, and Behaviors
Do you remember my talking about the common experience

when we can’t consciously remember a phone number, ATM PIN,
or lock combination, but we’ve practiced it so often that the body
knows better than the brain, and our fingers automatically get the
job done? That may seem like a small thing. But when the body
knows equal to or better than the conscious mind, when you can
repeat an experience at will without much conscious effort, then
you have memorized the action, behavior, attitude, or emotional
reaction until it has become a skill or a habit.
129
When you reach this level of ability, you have moved into a
state of being. In the process, you’ve activated the third brain area
that plays a major role in changing your life—the cerebellum, seat
of the subconscious.
The most active part of the brain, the cerebellum is located at
the back of the skull. Think of it as the brain’s microprocessor and
memory center. Every neuron in the cerebellum has the poten-
tial to connect with at least 200,000—and up to a million—other
cells, to process balance, coordination, awareness of the spatial
relation of body parts, and execution of controlled movements.
The cerebellum stores certain types of simple actions and skills,
along with hardwired attitudes, emotional reactions, repeated ac-
tions, habits, conditioned behaviors, and unconscious reflexes and
skills that we have mastered and memorized. Possessing amazing
memory storage, it easily downloads various forms of learned in-
formation into programmed states of mind and body.
When you are in a state of being, you begin to memorize a new
neurochemical self. That’s when the cerebellum takes over, making
that new state an implicit part of your subconscious programming.
(Scientific studies in habit formation include an additional part of the
brain called the basal ganglia, which works along with programming.
For our intents and purposes, we will simply note it here.) The cerebel-
lum is the site of nondeclarative memories, meaning that you’ve done or
practiced something so many times that it becomes second nature and
you don’t have to think about it; it’s become so automatic that it’s hard
to declare or describe how you do it. When that happens, you will ar-
rive at a point when happiness (or whatever attitude, behavior, skill, or
trait you’ve been focusing on and rehearsing mentally or physically)
will become an innately memorized program of the new self.
Let’s use a true-to-life example to take a practical look at how
these three brains take us from thinking to doing to being. First, we’ll
see how through conscious mental rehearsal, the thinking brain (neo-
cortex) uses knowledge to activate new circuits in new ways to make
a new mind. Then, our thought creates an experience, and via the
emotional (limbic) brain, that produces a new emotion. Our think-
ing and feeling brains condition the body to a new mind. Finally, if
130
we reach the point where mind and body are working as one, the
cerebellum enables us to memorize a new neurochemical self, and
our new state of being is now an innate program in our subconscious.
A Real-Life Example of the Three Brains in Action
As a practical look into these ideas, suppose that you recently

read a few thought-provoking books about compassion, including
one written by the Dalai Lama, a biography of Mother Teresa, and
an account of the work of Saint Francis of Assisi.
This knowledge allowed you to think outside the box. Reading this
material would have forged new synaptic connections in your think-
ing brain. Essentially, you learned about the philosophy of compas-
sion (through other people’s experiences, not yours). Moreover, you’ve
sustained those neural connections by reviewing what you learned on
a daily basis: You’re so enthusiastic that you are solving all of your
friends’ problems by offering advice and holding court. You have be-
come the great philosopher. Intellectually, you know your stuff.
As you’re driving home from work, your spouse calls to say that
you’ve been invited to dinner with your mother-in-law in three
days. You pull off the road, and already you’re thinking about how
you have disliked your MIL intensely ever since she hurt your feel-
ings ten years ago. Soon you’ve got a mental laundry list: you never
liked her opinionated way of talking; how she interrupts others;
how she smells; even how she cooks. Whenever you’re around her,
your heart races, your jaw tightens, your face and body are tense,
you feel jittery, and you just want to jump up and leave.
Still sitting in your car, you remember those books on the phi-
losophy of compassion, and you think about what you learned
theoretically. It occurs to you, Maybe if I try to apply what I read in
those books, I might have a new experience of my mother-in-law. What
did I learn that I can personalize to change the outcome of this dinner?
When you contemplate applying that understanding with your
MIL, something wonderful begins to happen. You decide not to
react to her with your typical set of automatic programs. Instead,
131
you begin to think about who you no longer want to be, and who
you want to be instead. You ask yourself, How do I not want to feel,
and how am I not going to act, when I see her? Your frontal lobe begins
to “cool off” the neural circuits that are connected to the old you;
you’re starting to unwire or prune away that old you from function-
ing as an identity. You could say that because your brain isn’t firing
in the same way, you’re no longer creating the same mind.
Then you review what those books said to help you plan how
you want to think, feel, and act toward your MIL. You ask yourself,
How can I modify my behavior—my actions—and my reactions so my
new experience leads to a new feeling? So you picture yourself greet-
ing and hugging her, asking her questions about things you know
she is interested in, and complimenting her on her new hairdo or
glasses. Over the next few days, as you mentally rehearse your new
ideal of self, you continue to install more neurological hardware
so you’ll have the proper circuits in place (in effect, a new software
program) when you actually interact with your MIL.
For most of us, to go from thinking to doing is like inspiring
snails to pick up the pace. We want to stay in the intellectual,
philosophical realm of our reality; we like to identify with the
memorized, recognizable feeling of our familiar self.
Instead, by surrendering old thought patterns, interrupting ha-
bitual emotional reactions, and forgoing knee-jerk behaviors, then
planning and rehearsing new ways of being, you are putting yourself
into the equation of that knowledge you learned, and beginning to
create a new mind—you are reminding yourself who you want to be.
But there is another step that we must address here.
What happened as you began to observe your “old-personality
self” related to the familiar thoughts, habitual behaviors, and
memorized emotions that you previously connected with your
mother-in-law? In a way, you were going into the operating sys-
tem of the subconscious mind, where those programs exist, and
you were the observer of those programs. When you can become
aware of or notice who you are being, you are becoming conscious
of your unconscious self.
132
As you began to psychologically project yourself into a poten-

tial situation ahead of the actual experience (the impending din-
ner), you began to rewire your neural circuitry to look as though the
event (being compassionate toward your MIL) had already taken
place. Once those new neural networks began to fire in unison,
your brain created a picture, vision, model, or what I will call a ho-
logram (a multidimensional image) representing the ideal self that
you were focused on being. The instant this happened, you made
what you were thinking about more real than anything else. Your
brain captured the thought as the experience, and “upscaled” its
gray matter to look as though the experience had already occurred.
Embodying Knowledge Through Experience:

Teaching the Body What the Mind Has Learned
Soon it’s game time, and you find yourself sitting at dinner,
face-to-face with “good ol’ Mom.” Instead of knee-jerking when
her typical behaviors manifest, you stay conscious, remember
what you learned, and decide to try it out. Rather than judging,
attacking, or feeling animosity toward her, you do something
completely different for you. Like the books encouraged, you stay
in the present moment, open your heart, and really listen to what
she’s saying. You no longer hold her to her past.
Lo and behold, you modify your behavior and restrain your im-
pulsive emotional reactions, thereby creating a new experience with
your MIL. That activates the limbic brain to cook up a new blend of
chemicals, which generates a new emotion, and all of a sudden, you
truly start to feel compassion for her. You see her for who she is; you
even see aspects of yourself in her. Your muscles relax, you feel your
heart opening, and you breathe deeply and freely.
You had such a great feeling that day that it lingers. Now you’re
inspired and open-minded, and you find that you truly love your
mother-in-law. As you couple your new, internal feeling of goodwill
and love with this person in your external reality, you connect com-
passion with your mother-in-law. You form a new associative memory.
133
Once you began to feel the emotion of compassion, in a sense

you (chemically) instructed your body what your mind (philosoph-
ically) knew, and that activated and modified some of your genes.
Now you’ve gone from thinking to doing: your behaviors match
your conscious intentions; your actions are equal to your thought;
mind and body are aligned and working together. You did exactly
what those people did in those books. So by intellectually learning
compassion with your brain and mind, then demonstrating this
ideal in your environment through experience, you embodied this
elevated feeling. You just conditioned your body to a new mind of
compassion. Your mind and body were working together. You em-
bodied compassion. In a sense, the word has become flesh.
Two Brains Have Taken You from Thinking to Doing,

but Can You Create a State of Being?
From your efforts to embody compassion, you now have your

neocortex and limbic brain working together. You’re out of the box
of the familiar, habitual memorized self, which operates within a
set of automatic programs, and you’re in a new thinking and feeling
cycle. You have experienced how compassion feels; and you like it
better than covert hostility, rejection, and suppressed anger.
Hold on, though, you are not yet ready for sainthood! It’s not
enough to have mind and body working together one time. That
got you from thinking to doing, but can you reproduce that feel-
ing of compassion at will? Can you repeatedly embody compassion
independent of conditions in your environment, so that no person
or situation could ever create that old state of being in you again?
If not, you haven’t yet mastered compassion. My definition of
mastery is that our internal chemical state is greater than anything in
our external world. You are a master when you’ve conditioned your-
self with chosen thoughts and feelings, you’ve memorized desired
emotional/chemical states, and nothing in your external life deters
you from your aims. No person, no thing, and no experience at any
time or place should disrupt your internal chemical coherence. You
can think, act, and feel differently whenever you choose.
134
If You Can Master Suffering,

You Can Just as Easily Master Joy
You probably know someone who has mastered suffering, right? So
you call her and ask, “How are you?”
So-so.
“Listen, I’m going to go out with some friends to a new art gallery,
and then eat at this restaurant that has really healthy desserts. Afterward,
we’re going to listen to some live music. Would you like to come with us?”
No. I don’t feel like it.
But if she said what she actually meant, she’d say, I’ve memorized
this emotional state, and nothing in my environment—no person,
no experience, no condition, no thing—is going to move me from
my internal chemical state of suffering. It feels better to be in pain
than to let go and be happy. I am enjoying my addiction for now,
and all these things that you want to do might distract me from my
emotional dependency.
But guess what? We can just as easily master an internal chemical
state such as joy or compassion.
In the preceding example with your mother-in-law, if you prac-

ticed your thoughts, behaviors, and feelings enough times, “being”
compassionate would become rather natural. You would evolve
from just thinking about it, to doing something about it, to being it.
“Being” means that it’s easy, natural, second nature, routine, and
unconscious. Compassion and love would be as automatic and fa-
miliar to you as those self-limiting emotions you just changed.
So now you need to replicate this experience of thinking,
feeling, and acting out of compassion. If you do, you will break
the addiction of your past emotional state and neurochemically
condition your body and mind to memorize the internal
chemical state called compassion better than your conscious
mind. Ultimately, if you repeatedly re-create the experience of
compassion at will, practicing it independent of any circumstance
in your life, your body would become the mind of compassion.
You would memorize compassion so well that nothing from your
outside world could move you from this state of being.
135
Now all three brains are working together; and you are bio-
logically, neurochemically, and genetically in a state of compas-
sion. When compassion becomes unconditionally ordinary and
familiar for you, you have progressed from knowledge to experi-
ence to wisdom.
Progressing to a State of Being:

The Role of Our Two Memory Systems
We have three brains that allow us to evolve from thinking to doing
to being. Take a look at this chart:
Figure 6B(1). Declarative and nondeclarative memories.
136
There are two memory systems in the brain:
— The first system is called declarative or explicit memories.

When we remember and can declare what we have learned or experienced,
those are declarative memories. There are two types of declarative
memories: knowledge (semantic memories derived from philosophical
knowledge) and experience (episodic memories derived from sensory
experiences, identified as events in our lives with particular people,
animals, or objects, while we were doing or witnessing a certain thing at a
particular time and place). Episodic memories tend to imprint longer in
the brain and body than semantic memories.
— The second memory system is called nondeclarative or

implicit memories. When we practice something so many times
that it’s become second nature—we no longer have to think about it;
it’s like we almost can’t declare how we do it—the body and mind are
one. This is the seat of our skills, habits, automatic behaviors, associative
memories, unconscious attitudes, and emotional reactions.
Figure 6B(2). Three brains: thinking to doing to being.
137
Thus, when we take what we learn intellectually (neocortex), and

apply it, personalize it, or demonstrate it, we will modify our behavior
in some way. When we do, we will create a new experience, which
will produce a new emotion (limbic brain). If we can repeat, replicate,
or experience that action at will, we will move into a state of being
(cerebellum).
Wisdom is accumulated knowledge that has been gained

through repeated experience. And when “being” compassionate
is as natural as suffering; judging; blaming; or being frustrated,
negative, or insecure, now we are wise. We are liberated to seize
new opportunities, because somehow life seems to organize itself
equal to how or who we are being.
138
Figure 6C. This chart shows the progression of how the three brains align
to correlate different avenues of personal evolution.
139
Going from Thinking Straight to Being:

A Prelude to Meditation
Going from thinking to doing to being is a progression that

we’ve all experienced many times, whether it was when we learned
to be a driver, a skier, a knitter, or a person to whom speaking a
second language has become second nature.
Now, let’s talk about one of evolution’s great gifts to us as hu-
mans: the ability to go from thinking to being—without taking
any physical action. Said another way, we can create a new state of
being ahead of having an actual material experience.
We do this all the time, and it’s not a case of “Fake it till you
make it.” For example, you have a sexual fantasy in which you in-
wardly experience all the thoughts, feelings, and actions you look
forward to when your partner returns from a trip. You’re so pres-
ent with your internal experience that your body is chemically
altered and responds as if that future event is already upon you
in that exact moment. You have moved into a new state of being.
Similarly, whether you’re mentally rehearsing the speech you’re
going to give, reminding yourself how you’re going to handle the
confrontation that you need to have with your co-worker, or imag-
ining what you want to eat when you’re really hungry but stuck in
traffic—and in each case you’re thinking about that to the exclu-
sion of everything else—your body will begin to physiologically
move into a state of being just by thought alone.
Okay, but how far can you take this? Through thinking and
feeling alone, can you finally be the person you want to be? Can
you create and live a chosen reality, as my daughter did when she
experienced the summer job of her dreams?
That’s where meditation comes in. People use meditative tech-
niques for a lot of reasons, as you know. In this book, you will
learn a special meditation designed for a specific purpose—to help
you overcome the habit of being yourself and become that ideal
self you desire. Through the remainder of this chapter, we’ll con-
nect some of the knowledge we’ve covered up to now with the
meditation you will soon learn. (Whenever I discuss meditation or
140
the meditative process, I will be referring to the process that will

be our focus in Part III.)
Meditation allows us to change our brains, bodies, and state of
being. Most important, we can make these changes without having
to take any physical action or have any interaction with the external
environment. Through meditation, we can install the necessary neu-
rological hardware (which will become a software program), just as
those piano players did. We can also influence the body like the finger
exercisers, who made changes through mental rehearsal. (Those re-
search subjects used mental rehearsal alone, but for our purposes, it is
one component of the meditative process, albeit a very important one.)
If I asked you to think about the qualities that your ideal
self would possess, or if I suggested that you contemplate what it
would feel like to be a person of greatness such as Mother Teresa or
Nelson Mandela, then just by contemplating a new way of being,
you would begin firing your brain in new ways and making a new
mind. That’s mental rehearsal in action. I’m now asking you to
reflect on what it would feel like to be happy, content, satisfied,
and at peace. What would you envision for yourself if you were to
create a new ideal of you?
Essentially, the meditative process allows you to answer this
question by bringing together all of the information, learned and
wired synaptically into your brain, about what it means to be
happy, content, satisfied, and at peace. In meditation, you take
that knowledge and then place yourself in the equation. Instead of
merely asking what it would mean to be happy, you put yourself in
the position of practicing, and thus living in, a state of happiness.
After all, you know what happiness looks and feels like. You’ve
had past experiences with it yourself; you’ve seen other people’s
versions of it. Now, you get to pick and choose from that knowl-
edge and experience to create a new ideal of yourself.
I’ve talked about how, through the frontal lobe, you activate
new circuits in new ways to create a new mind. Once you expe-
rience that new mind, your brain creates a kind of holographic
image that gives you a model to follow in creating your future
reality. Because you have installed new neural circuits ahead of
141
any real experience, you don’t have to carry out a nonviolent revo-
lution, as Gandhi did; you don’t have to lead your people and be
burned at the stake, as Joan of Arc was. You simply have to use
your knowledge and experience of those qualities of courage and
conviction to produce an emotional effect within you. The result
will be a state of mind. By repeatedly producing that state of mind,
it will become familiar to you, and you will be wiring new circuits.
The more often you produce that state of mind, the more those
thoughts will become the experience.
Once that thought-experience transformation takes place,
the end product of that experience will be a feeling, an emotion.
When this occurs, your body (as the unconscious mind) does not
know the difference between an event that takes place in physical
reality and the emotions you created by thought alone.
As someone who is conditioning the body to a new mind,
you’ll find that your thinking brain and the emotional brain are
now working in concert. Remember that thoughts are for the
brain, and feelings are for the body. When you are both thinking
and feeling in a specific way as a part of the meditative process,
you are different from when you started out. The newly installed
circuits, the neurological and chemical changes that have been
produced by those thoughts and emotions, have altered you in
such a way that there is physical evidence in the brain and body
that shows those changes.
At that point, you’ve moved into a state of being. You’re no
longer just practicing happiness or gratitude or whatever; you are
being grateful or happy. You can produce that state of mind and
body every day; you can continually reexperience an event and
produce the emotional response to that experience of how you
would feel if you were that new, ideal self.
If you can get up from your meditative session and be in that
new state of being—altered neurologically, biologically, chemi-
cally, and genetically—you have activated those changes ahead of
any experience, and you will be more prone to acting and think-
ing in ways equal to who you are being. You have broken the habit
of being yourself!
142
Figure 6D. You can go from thinking to being without having to do anything.
If you are mentally rehearsing a new mind, there will come a moment that the
thought you are thinking about will become the experience. When this occurs,
the end product of that inward experience is an emotion or feeling. Once you
can feel what it would feel like to be that person, your body (as the unconscious
mind) begins to believe it is in that reality. Now your mind and body begin to
work as one, and you are “being” that person without having to do anything
yet. As you move into a new state of being by thought alone, you will be
more prone to do things and think things equal to how you are being.
As a reminder, when you are in a new state of being—a new

personality—you also create a new personal reality. Let me repeat
that. A new state of being creates a new personality . . . a new personal-
ity produces a new personal reality.
How will you know whether this meditative practice has ac-
tivated your three brains to produce the intended effect? Simple:
you will feel different as a result of investing in the process. If you
feel exactly as you did before, if the same catalysts produce the
same reactions in you, then nothing has happened in the quan-
tum field. Your same thoughts and feelings are reproducing the
143
same electromagnetic signal in the field. You haven’t changed

chemically, neurologically, genetically, or in any other way. But if
you eventually get up after your meditation sessions and feel dif-
ferent from when you began them, and if you can maintain that
modified state of mind and body, then you have changed.
What you’ve changed inside of you—the new state of being that
you created—should now produce an effect outside of you. You’ve
moved beyond the cause-and-effect model of the universe, that old
Newtonian concept of something external to you controlling your
thoughts, actions, and emotions. I’ll return to this point in a bit.
You will also know that your meditation has been fruitful if
something unexpected and new serendipitously shows up in your
life as a result of your efforts. Remember: the quantum model tells
us that if you have created a new mind and a new state of being,
you have an altered electromagnetic signature. Because you are
thinking and feeling differently, you are changing reality. To-
gether, thoughts and feelings can do this; separately they cannot.
Let me remind you again: You can’t think one way and feel another
and expect anything in your life to change. The combination of your
thoughts and feelings is your state of being. Change your state of
being . . . and change your reality.
Here’s where coherent signals really come into play. If you
can send into the quantum field a signal coherent in thought and
feeling (state of being), independent of the external world, then
something different will show up in your life. When it does, you’ll
no doubt experience a powerful emotional response, which will
inspire you to create a new reality once again—and you can use
that emotion to generate an even more wonderful experience.
Let me get back to Newton. We are all conditioned by the
Newtonian notion that life is dominated by cause and effect.
When something good happens to us, we express gratitude or joy.
So we go through life waiting for someone or something outside
ourselves to regulate our feelings.
Instead, I’m asking you to take control and to invert the pro-
cess. Rather than waiting for an occasion to cause you to feel a
certain way, create the feeling ahead of any experience in the
144
physical realm; convince your body emotionally that a “gratitude-

generating” experience has already taken place.
To do this, you can pick a potential in the quantum field and
get in touch with how it would feel if you were experiencing it. I’m
asking you to use thought and feeling to put yourself in the shoes
of that future self, that possible you, so vividly that you begin to
emotionally condition your body to believe that you are that per-
son now. When you open your eyes after your meditative session,
who do you want to be? What would it feel like to be this ideal self,
or to have this desired experience?
To fully break the habit of being yourself, say good-bye to cause
and effect and embrace the quantum model of reality. Choose a
potential reality that you want, live it in your thoughts and feel-
ings, and give thanks ahead of the actual event. Can you accept
the notion that once you change your internal state, you don’t
need the external world to provide you with a reason to feel joy,
gratitude, appreciation, or any other elevated emotion?
When your body experiences that the event is occurring in
that moment and it feels real to you, based solely on what you’re
focused on mentally and are feeling emotionally, then you are
experiencing the future now. The moment you are in that state of
being, in that now moment and present in that experience, that’s
when you are connected to all possible realities that exist in the
quantum field. Remember that if you are in the past or the future,
based on your familiar emotions or anticipation of some effect,
you don’t have access to all possibilities the quantum field holds.
The only way to access the quantum field is by being in the now.
Keep in mind that this cannot be just an intellectual process.
Thoughts and feelings must be coherent. In other words, this
meditation requires that you drop down about ten inches out of
your head and move into your heart. Open your heart and think
about how it would feel if you embodied a combination of all the
traits that you admire and that make up your ideal self.
You may object that you can’t know how it would feel, because
you’ve never experienced what it’s like to have those traits and to
be that ideal self. My response is that your body can experience
145
this before you have any physical evidence, ahead of your senses:
If a future desire that you’ve never experienced actually does man-
ifest in your life, you’d have to agree that you would experience an
elevated emotion such as joy, excitement, or gratitude . . . so those
emotions are what you can naturally focus on. Instead of being
enslaved to emotions that are only the residue of the past, you are
now using elevated emotions to create the future.
The elevated emotions of gratitude, love, and so forth all have
a higher frequency that will help you move into a state of being
where you can feel as though the desired events have actually
occurred. If you are in a state of greatness, then the signal you
send into the quantum field is that the events have already come
to pass. Giving thanks allows you to emotionally condition your
body to believe that what is producing your gratitude has already
happened. By activating and coordinating your three brains, med-
itation allows you to move from thinking to being—and once you
are in a new state of being, you are more prone to act and think
equal to who you are being.
Perhaps you’ve wondered why it may be hard to move into a
state of gratitude or to give thanks ahead of the actual experience.
Is it possible that you’ve been living by a memorized emotion that
has become so much a part of your identity, on a subconscious
level, that now you cannot feel any other way than you’re accus-
tomed to? If so, maybe your identity has become a matter of how
you appear to the world on the outside, to distract you and change
how you feel on the inside.
In the next chapter, we’re going to examine how to close that
gap and bring about true liberation. When you can readily feel grat-
itude or joy, or fall in love with the future—without needing any
person, thing, or experience to cause you to feel that way—then
these elevated emotions will be available to fuel your creations.
}}}}
146
CHAPTER SEVEN
THE GAP
I was sitting on my couch one day, thinking about what
it means to be happy. As I contemplated my utter lack of joy, I
thought about how most people who were important to me would
have given me a pep talk right on the spot. I imagined it verbatim:
You’re so incredibly lucky. You have a wonderful family, which includes
beautiful kids. You are a successful chiropractor. You lecture to thou-
sands of people, you travel the world going to unusual places, you were
featured in What the BLEEP Do We Know!?, and many people loved
your message. You even wrote a book, and it is doing well. They would
have hit all of the right emotional and logical notes. But to me,
something wasn’t right.
I was at a point in my life where I was traveling from city to
city every weekend doing lectures; sometimes I was in two cities
within three days. It occurred to me that I was so busy that I had
no time to actually practice what I was teaching.
This was an unnerving moment, because I began to see that all
of my happiness was created from outside of me, and that the joy I
experienced when I was traveling and lecturing had nothing to do
with real joy. It appeared to me that I needed everyone, everything,
and everyplace outside of me in order to feel good. This image that
I was projecting to the world was dependent on external factors.
147
And when I was not out lecturing or doing interviews or treating

patients, and I was home, I felt empty.
Don’t get me wrong; in some ways those things outside of me
were great. If you had asked anyone who saw me lecturing, deeply
engrossed in working on a presentation during a flight, or answer-
ing dozens of e-mails while in an airport or hotel lounge, such an
observer would have said that I appeared to be pretty happy.
The sad truth is that if you had asked me at one of those mo-
ments, I would have probably responded in much the same way:
Yes, things are great. I’m doing well. I’m a lucky guy.
But if you had caught me in a quiet moment, when all those
other stimuli weren’t bombarding me, I would have responded in
a completely different manner: Something’s not right. I feel unsettled.
Everything feels like the same old, same old. Something is missing.
On the day I recognized the core reason for my unhappiness,
I also realized that I needed the external world to remember who
I was. My identity had become the people I talked to, the cities
I visited, the things I did while I was traveling, and the experi-
ences I needed in order to reaffirm myself as this person called Joe
Dispenza. And when I wasn’t around anyone who could help me
recall this personality that the world might know as me, I wasn’t
sure who I was anymore. In fact, I saw that all of my perceived
happiness was really just a reaction to stimuli in the external
world that made me feel certain ways. I then understood that I
was totally addicted to my environment, and I was dependent on
external cues to reinforce my emotional addiction. What a mo-
ment for me. I had heard a million times that happiness comes
from within, but it never hit me like this before.
As I sat on the couch in my house that day, I looked out the
window and an image came to me. I envisioned my two hands,
one above the other, separated by a gap.
148
The Gap
Figure 7A. The gap between “who we really are” and “how we appear.”
The top hand represented how I appeared on the outside, and

the bottom was how I knew myself to be on the inside. In my self-
reflection, it dawned on me that we human beings live in a duality,
as two separate entities—“how we appear” and “who we really are.”
How we appear is the image or the façade that we project to
the world. That self is everything we do in order to show up look-
ing a certain way and to present to others a consistent exterior
reality. This first aspect of the self is a veneer of how we want
everyone to see us.
How we really are, represented by that bottom hand, is how
we feel, especially when we are not distracted by the external en-
vironment. It is our familiar emotions when we are not preoccu-
pied by “life.” It’s what we hide about ourselves.
149
When we memorize addictive emotional states such as guilt,

shame, anger, fear, anxiety, judgment, depression, self-importance,
or hatred, we develop a gap between the way we appear and the way
we really are. The former is how we want other people to see us. The
latter is our state of being when we are not interacting with all of
the different experiences, diverse things, and assorted people at
various times and places in our lives. If we sit long enough with-
out doing anything, we begin to feel something. That something is
who we really are.
Figure 7B. The size of the gap varies from person to person. “Who we really are”
and “how we appear” are separated by the feelings we memorize throughout
different points in our lives (based on past experiences). The bigger the gap,
the greater the addiction to the emotions we memorize.
150
The Gap
Layer by layer, we wear various emotions, which form our

identity. In order to remember who we think we are, we have to
re-create the same experiences to reaffirm our personality and the
corresponding emotions. As an identity, we become attached to our
external world by identifying with everyone and everything, in
order to remind us of how we want to project ourselves to the world.
How we appear becomes the façade of the personality, which
relies on the external world to remember who it is as a “some-
body.” Its identity is completely attached to the environment. The
personality does everything it can to hide how it really feels or to
make that feeling of emptiness go away: I own these cars, I know
these people, I’ve been to these places, I can do these things, I’ve had
these experiences, I work for this company, I am successful. . . . It is who
we think we are in relation to everything around us.
But that is different from who we are—how we feel—without
the stimulation of our outer reality: Feelings of shame and anger
about a failed marriage. Fear of death and uncertainty about the
afterlife, related to the loss of a loved one or even a pet. A sense
of inadequacy due to a parent’s insistence on perfectionism and
achievement at all costs. A sense of stifled entitlement from hav-
ing grown up in circumstances barely above poverty. A preoccu-
pation with thoughts of not having the right body type in order
to look a certain way to the world. These kinds of feelings are what
we want to conceal.
This is who we truly are, the real self hiding behind the image
we are projecting. We can’t face exposing that self to the world,
so we pretend to be someone else. We create a set of memorized
automatic programs that work to cover the vulnerable parts of us.
Essentially, we lie about who we are because we know that societal
mores do not have room for that person. That is the “nobody.”
That is the person whom we doubt others will like and accept.
Particularly when we are younger and are forming our identi-
ty, we are more likely to engage in this kind of masquerade. We see
young people trying on identities like they try on clothes. And in
truth, what teens wear is often a reflection of who they want to be,
more than it reflects who they really are. Ask any mental-health
151
professional who specializes in working with young people, and

she will tell you that one word defines what it is like to be an ado-
lescent: insecurity. As a result, teens and preteens seek comfort in
conformity and in numbers.
Rather than let the world know what you are really like, adopt
and adapt (because everyone knows what happens to those who
are perceived to be different). The world is complex and scary, but
make it less frightening and much simpler by lumping everyone
into groups. Pick your group. Pick your poison.
Eventually, that identity fits. You grow into it. Or at least that’s
what you tell yourself. Along with the insecurity comes a great
deal of self-consciousness. Questions abound: Is this who I really
am? Is this who I really want to be? But it’s so much easier to ignore
those questions than to answer them.
Life Experiences Define Our Identity . . .

Staying Busy Keeps Unwanted Emotions at Bay
All of us have been emotionally scarred from traumatic or dif-

ficult experiences as young people. Early in life, we experienced
defining events, the emotions of which contributed, layer by layer,
to who we became. Let’s face it: we all have been branded by emo-
tionally charged events. As we mentally reviewed the experience
repeatedly, the body began to relive the event over and over, just
by thought alone. We kept the refractory period of emotion run-
ning for so long that we journeyed from a mere emotional reac-
tion to a mood, to a temperament, and ultimately, to a personality
trait.
While we are young, we keep busy doing things that, for a
while, stave off those old, deep emotions, sweeping them under
the rug. It is intoxicating to make new friends, travel to unknown
places, work hard and achieve a promotion, learn a new skill, or
take up a new sport. We seldom suspect that many of these actions
are motivated by feelings left over from certain earlier events in life.
Then we really get busy. We go to school, then possibly college;
we buy a car; we move to a new town, state, or country; we begin
152
The Gap
a career; we meet new people; we get married; we buy a house; we

have kids; we adopt pets; we may get divorced; we work out; we
start a new relationship; we practice a skill or a hobby. . . . We use
everything that we know in the external world to define our iden-
tity, and to distract us from how we really feel inside. And since all
of these unique experiences produce myriad emotions, we notice
that those emotions seem to take away any feelings that we are
hiding. And it works for a while.
Don’t get me wrong. We all reach greater heights from apply-
ing ourselves throughout different periods in our growing years.
In order to accomplish many things in our lifetimes, we have to
push ourselves outside our comfort zones and go beyond familiar
feelings that once defined us. I am certainly aware of this dynamic
in life. But when we never overcome our limitations and continue
carrying the baggage from our past, it will always catch up with
us. And this usually happens starting around our mid-30s (this
can vary greatly from one person to another).
Midlife: A Series of Strategies

to Make Buried Feelings Stay Buried
By our mid-30s or 40s, when the personality is complete, we

have experienced much of what life has to offer. And as a result,
we can pretty much anticipate the outcome of most experiences;
we already know how they’re going to feel before we engage in
them. Because we’ve had several good and bad relationships, we’ve
competed in business or settled into our career, we’ve suffered loss
and encountered success, or we know what we like and dislike, we
know the nuances of life. Since we can predict the likely emotions
ahead of an actual experience, we determine whether we want
to experience that “known” event before it actually occurs. Of
course, all of this is happening behind the scenes of our awareness.
Here is where it gets sticky. Because we can predict the feelings
that most events will bring, we already know what will make our
feelings about who we really are go away. However, when we reach
midlife, nothing can completely take away that feeling of emptiness.
153
You wake up every morning and you feel like the same person.
Your environment, which you relied on so heavily to remove your
pain or guilt or suffering, is no longer taking away those feelings.
How could it? You already know that when the emotions derived
from the external world wear off, you will return to being the
same leopard who hasn’t changed its spots.
This is the midlife crisis that most people know about. Some
try really hard to make buried feelings stay buried by diving fur-
ther into their external world. They buy the new sports car (thing);
others lease the boat (another thing). Some go on a long vacation
(place). Yet others join the new social club to meet new contacts or
make new friends (people). Some get plastic surgery (body). Many
completely redecorate or remodel their homes (acquire things and
experience a new environment).
All of these are futile efforts to do or try something new so that
they can feel better or different. But emotionally, when the novelty
wears off, they are still stuck with the same identity. They return to
who they really are (that is, the bottom hand). They are drawn back
to the same reality they have been living for years, just to keep the
feeling of who they think they are as an identity. The truth is, the
more they do—the more they buy and then consume—the more
noticeable the feeling of who they “really are” becomes.
When we’re trying to escape this emptiness, or when we’re
running from any emotion whatsoever that is painful, it is be-
cause to look at it is too uncomfortable. So when the feeling starts
to get a bit out of control, most people turn on the TV, surf the
Internet, or call or text someone. In a matter of moments we can
alter our emotions so many times . . . we can view a sitcom or a
YouTube video and laugh hysterically, then watch a football game
and feel competitive, then watch the news and be angered or fear-
ful. All of these outer stimuli can easily distract us from those
unwanted feelings inside.
Technology is a great distraction and a powerful addiction.
Think about it: You can immediately change your internal chemis-
try and make a feeling go away by changing something outside of
you. And whatever it was outside of you that made you feel better
154
The Gap
inside of you, you will rely on that thing in order to sidetrack your-
self over and over again. But this strategy doesn’t have to involve
technology; anything momentarily thrilling will do the trick.
When we keep that diversion up, guess what eventually hap-
pens? We grow more dependent on something outside of us to
change us internally. Some people unconsciously delve deeper
and deeper into this bottomless pit, using different aspects of their
world to keep themselves preoccupied—in an effort to re-create
the original feeling from the very first experience that helped
them escape. They become overstimulated so that they can feel
different from how they really are. But sooner or later, everyone
realizes that they need more and more of the same to make them
feel better. This becomes an all-consuming search for pleasure and
ways to avoid pain at all costs—a hedonistic life unconsciously
driven by some feeling that won’t seem to go away.
A Different Midlife: A Time for Facing

Feelings and Letting Go of Illusions
At this time of life, other people who don’t strive to keep their
feelings buried ask some big questions: Who am I? What is my pur-
pose in life? Where am I going? Who am I doing all of this for? What
is God? Where do I go when I die? Is there more to life than “success”?
What is happiness? What does all this mean? What is love? Do I love
myself? Do I love anyone else? And the soul begins to wake up. . . .
These types of questions begin to occupy the mind because we
see through the illusion and suspect that nothing outside of us can
ever make us happy. Some of us ultimately realize that nothing in
our environment is going to “fix” the way we feel. We also recognize
the enormous amount of energy it takes to keep up this projection
of self as an image to the world, and how exhausting it is to keep
the mind and body constantly preoccupied. Eventually we come to
see that our futile attempt to maintain an ideal for others is really
a strategy to make sure that those impending feelings we’ve been
running from never capture us. How long can we juggle, keeping so
many balls in the air, just so our lives don’t come crashing down?
155
Instead of buying a bigger TV or the latest smart phone, these

people stop running from the feeling that they’ve been trying to
make go away for so long, face it head-on, and intently look at it.
When this happens, the individual begins to wake up. After some
self-reflection, she discovers who she really is, what she has been
hiding, and what no longer is working for her. So she lets go of the
façade, the games, and the illusions. She is honest about who she
really is, at all costs, and she is not afraid to lose it all. This person
stops expending the energy she had been putting into keeping an
illusory image intact.
She gets in touch with her feelings and then turns to people in
her life and says: You know what? It doesn’t matter if I don’t make you
happy any longer. I’m through obsessing about how I look or what other
people think about me. I am finished living for everyone else. I want to
be free from these chains.
This is a profound moment in a person’s life. The soul is waking
up and nudging her to tell the truth about who she really is! The
lie is over.
Change and Our Relationships:

Breaking the Ties That Bind
Most relationships are based on what you have in common with

others. Think about this: You meet a person, and immediately the
two of you compare your experiences, as if you both are checking
to see whether your neural networks and emotional memories are
aligned. You say something like this: “I know these ‘people.’ I am
from this ‘place,’ and I lived in these places at these different ‘times’
in my life. I went to this school and studied this subject. I own and
do these ‘things.’ And most important, I’ve had these ‘experiences.’”
Then the other person responds: “I know those ‘people.’ I’ve
lived in those ‘places’ during those ‘times.’ I do these ‘things,’ too.
I had those same ‘experiences.’”
Thus, you can relate to each other. A relationship is then
formed based on neurochemical states of being, because if you
share the same experiences, you share the same emotions.
156
The Gap
Think of emotions as “energy in motion.” If you share the

same emotions, you share the same energy. And just like two
atoms of oxygen that share an invisible field of energy beyond
space and time in order to bond together in a relationship to form
air, you are bonded in an invisible field of energy to every thing,
person, and place in your external life. Bonds between people are
the strongest, though, because emotions hold the strongest ener-
gy. As long as either party doesn’t change, things will be just fine.
Figure 7C. If we share the same experiences, we share the same emotions and the
same energy. Just like two atoms of oxygen bond to form the air we breathe, an
invisible field of energy (beyond space and time) bonds us emotionally.
157
So when our friend in the example in the last section begins

to tell the truth about how she really feels, things begin to get
very uncomfortable. If her friendships have been based upon com-
plaining about life, then she is bonded energetically in her rela-
tionships by the emotions of victimization. If, in a moment of
enlightenment, she now decides to break from that habit of being
herself, she is no longer showing up as that familiar person to
whom everyone could relate. People in her life are using her to re-
mind themselves of who they are emotionally as well. Friends and
family respond: “What is wrong with you today? You’ve hurt my
feelings!” Which translates to: I thought we had a good thing going
here! I used you to reaffirm my emotional addiction in order to remem-
ber who I think I am as a “somebody.” I liked you better the other way.
When it comes to change, our energy is connected to every-
thing that we’ve had an experience with in our outer world. When
we break the addiction of emotion we’ve memorized, or when we
tell the truth about who we really are, doing that takes some real
energy. Just as it takes energy to separate two atoms of oxygen that
are bonded together, it takes energy to break the bonds with the
people in our lives.
So the individuals in this person’s life who have shared the
same emotional bonds with her rally together and say, “She
hasn’t been herself lately. Maybe she’s lost her mind. Let’s get
her to a doctor!”
Now remember that they have been people she shared the
same experiences with; hence, they shared the same emotions.
But now she’s breaking the energetic bonds with everyone and
everything—and even every place—familiar. This is a threatening
moment for everyone who has been playing the same game with
her for years. She’s getting off the train.
So they bring her to the doctor, who gives her Prozac or some
other drug, and in a short time, the person’s former personality
returns. And there she is, projecting her old image to the world,
right back to shaking hands on others’ emotional agreements.
Once more she’s numb and smiling—anything to take the feeling
away. The lesson goes unlearned.
158
The Gap
Yes, the person wasn’t being herself—not the “top-hand” self

that everyone had grown accustomed to. Instead, briefly, she was
the “bottom-hand” self—the one with the past and the pain. And
who can blame those loved ones who insisted on the return to her
former numbed self that “went along to get along”? That new self
emerged as unpredictable, even radical. Who wants to be around
that person? Who wants to be around the truth?
What Really Matters in the End
If you need the environment in order to remember who you

are as a somebody, what happens when you die and the environ-
ment rolls up and disappears? Do you know what goes with it? The
somebody, the identity, the image, the personality (top hand) that
has identified with all of the known and predictable elements in
life, who was addicted to the environment. You could have been
the most successful, popular, or beautiful person, and you could
have had all the wealth you ever needed . . . but when your life
ends and your external reality is taken away, everything outside of
you can no longer define you. It all goes.
What you’re left with is who you really are (bottom hand), not
how you appear. When your life is over and you cannot rely on
your external world to define you, you will be left with that feel-
ing you never addressed. You would not have evolved as a soul in
that lifetime.
For instance, if you had certain experiences 50 years prior that
marked you as insecure or weak and you felt that way about your-
self ever since, then you stopped growing emotionally 50 years
ago. If the soul’s purpose is to learn from experience and gain wis-
dom, but you stayed stuck in that particular emotion, you never
turned your experience into a lesson; you didn’t transcend that
emotion and exchange it for any understanding. While that feel-
ing still anchors your mind and body to those past events, you
are never free to move into the future. And if a similar experi-
ence shows up in your present life, that event will trigger the same
159
emotion and you will act as that person you were 50 years ago.
So your soul says: Pay attention! I’m letting you know that nothing
is bringing you joy. I’m sending you urges. If you keep playing this game,
I’m going to stop trying to get your attention, and you will go back to
sleep. Then I’ll see you when your life is over. . . .
It Always Takes More and More
Most people who do not know how to change think, How

can I make this feeling go away? And if the novelty of accumulat-
ing new things wears off and stops working, what do they do?
They look to bigger things, a whole other layer above where they
were, and their avoidance strategies become addictions: If I take
a drug or drink enough alcohol, that’s going to make this feeling go
away. This external thing will produce an internal chemical change
and make me feel great. I’ll shop a lot, because shopping—even if I
don’t have the money—makes that emptiness go away. I’ll watch por-
nography . . . I’ll play video games . . . I’ll gamble . . . I’ll overeat. . . .
160
The Gap
Figure 7D. When the same people and things in our lives create the same emotions,
and the feeling we are trying to make go away no longer changes, we look for new
people and things, or try going to new places, in an attempt to change how we
feel emotionally. If that doesn’t work, we go to the next level—addictions.
Whatever the addiction, people are still thinking that some

external thing is going to take that internal feeling away. And re-
member: we have this natural propensity to associate an external
thing that’s making that feeling go away with our internal chemi-
cal change. And we like that external thing if it makes us feel good.
So we run away from what feels bad or painful, and we move to-
ward what feels good and comfortable or brings us pleasure.
161
As the excitement people get from their addiction continu-

ally stimulates the pleasure centers in the brain, they get a flood
of chemicals from the thrill of the experience. The problem is
that each time they gamble, binge, or stay up late playing online
games, they need a little bit more the next time.
The reason why people need more drugs or more shopping or
more affairs is that the chemical rush that’s created from those
activities activates the receptor sites on the outside of their cells,
which “turns on” the cells. But if receptor sites are continually
stimulated, they get desensitized and shut off. So they need a
stronger signal, a bit more stimulation, to turn them on the next
time—it takes a bigger chemical high to produce the same effects.
So now you’ve got to bet $25,000 instead of $10,000 because
otherwise, there’s no thrill. Once a $5,000 shopping spree does
nothing for you, you’ve got to max out two credit cards so you can
feel that same rush again. All of this is to make the feeling of who
you really are go away. Everything you do to get the same high,
you have to keep doing more of, with increasing intensity. More
drugs, more alcohol, more sex, more gambling, more shopping,
more TV. You get the idea.
Over time, we become addicted to something in order to ease
the pain or anxiety or depression we live by on a daily basis. Is this
wrong? Not really. Most people do these things because they just
don’t know how to change from the inside. They are only following
the innate drive to get relief from their feelings, and unconsciously
they think their salvation comes from the outside world. It has
never been explained to them that using the outer world to change
the inner world makes things worse . . . it only widens the gap.
And let’s say that our ambition in life is to become success-
ful and to accumulate more things. When we do, we reinforce
who we are, without ever addressing how we really feel. I call this
being possessed by our possessions. We become possessed by material
objects, and those things reinforce the ego, which needs the envi-
ronment to remind itself of who it is.
If we wait for anything outside us to make us happy, then we
are not following the quantum law. We are relying on the outer to
162
The Gap
change the inner. If we are thinking that once we have the wealth
to buy more things, then we will be overjoyed, we’ve got it back-
ward. We have to become happy before our abundance shows up.
And what happens if addicts can’t get more? They feel even
angrier, more frustrated, more bitter, more empty. They may try
other methods—add gambling to drinking, add shopping to TV
and movie escapism. Eventually, though, nothing is ever enough.
The pleasure centers have recalibrated to such a high level that
when there is no chemical change from the outer world, it seems
the addict now cannot find joy in the simplest things.
The point is, true happiness has nothing to do with pleasure,
because the reliance on feeling good from such intensely stimulat-
ing things only moves us further from real joy.
The Bigger Gap—Emotional Addiction
I don’t intend to diminish the severity of the damage caused

by what I’ll loosely refer to here as material addictions—to drugs,
alcohol, sex, gambling, consumerism, and so forth. Those prob-
lems cause great harm to the numerous people who suffer from
them and to those who love and work with such “addicts.” While
many people who experience these and other addictions can use
the steps in these pages to overcome them—since they are a part
of the Big Three—it’s beyond the scope of this book to deal with
these kinds of addictions specifically. But it is imperative to realize
that behind every addiction, there is some memorized emotion
that is driving the behavior.
What is not beyond the scope of this book and is, in fact, its
central purpose is helping people break the habit of being them-
selves, whether they view that self as being an alcoholic; a sexa-
holic; a gambler; a shopaholic; or someone who is chronically
lonely, depressed, angry, bitter, or physically unwell.
In thinking about the gap, possibly you said to yourself: Well,
of course we hide from other people our fears, insecurities, weaknesses,
and dark side. If we gave those things free rein to be fully expressed, we’d
163
likely be beyond anyone else’s caring about us, let alone our caring about
ourselves. In a sense, that’s true. But if we are to break free, it means
we have to confront that true self and bring out into the light that
shadow side of our personality.
The advantage of the system I employ is that you can confront
those darker aspects of yourself without bringing them into the
light of your everyday reality. You don’t have to walk into your
place of work or a family gathering and announce: “Hey, listen up,
everyone! I’m a bad person because for a long time I resented my
parents for having to spend a lot of time with my younger sibling,
while I felt my needs were being neglected. So now I’m a really
selfish person who craves attention and needs instant gratification
in order to stop feeling unloved and inadequate.”
Instead, in the privacy of your own home and your own mind,
you can work on extinguishing negative aspects of self and replac-
ing those characteristics (or at least, metaphorically, cutting way
back on the role they play and allowing them only an occasional,
brief appearance) with more positive and productive ones.
I want you to forget about past events validating the emotions
you’ve memorized that have become part of your personality.
Your problems will never be resolved by analyzing them while
you are still caught up in the emotions of the past. Looking at
the experience or reliving the event that created the problem in
the first place will only bring up the old emotions and a reason to
feel the same way. When you try to figure out your life within the
same consciousness that created it, you will analyze your life away
and excuse yourself from ever changing.
Instead, let’s just unmemorize our self-limiting emotions. A
memory without the emotional charge is called wisdom. Then we
can look back objectively upon the event and see it and who we
were being, without the filter of that emotion. If we take care of
unmemorizing the emotional state (or eliminating it to the best
of our ability), then we gain the freedom to live and think and act
independent of the restraints or constraints of that feeling.
So if a person relinquished unhappiness and got on with his
life—entered into a new relationship, got a new job, moved to a
164
The Gap
new place, and made new friends—and then he looked at that

past event, he would see that it provided the adversity he needed
in order to overcome who he was and become a new person. His
perspective would change, just by seeing that he could actually
overcome the problem.
Closing and even eliminating the gap between who we are and
who we present to the world is likely the greatest challenge we all
face in life. Whether we term this living authentically, conquering
ourselves, or having people “get” us or accept us for who we are,
this is something that most of us desire. Changing— closing the
gap—must begin from within.
Yet far too often, most of us change only when we are faced
with a crisis, trauma, or discouraging diagnosis of some sort. That
crisis commonly comes in the form of a challenge, which may
be physical (an accident, say, or an illness), emotional (the loss of
someone we love, for example), spiritual (for instance, an accumu-
lation of setbacks that has us questioning our worth and how the
universe operates), or financial (a job loss, perhaps). Note that all of
the above are about losing something.
Why wait for trauma or loss to occur and have your ego get
knocked off balance due to that negative emotional state? Clearly,
when a calamity befalls you, you have to act—you can’t take care
of business as usual when you’ve been knocked, as the expression
goes, to your knees.
At those critical moments when we’ve really, really grown
tired of being beaten down by circumstances, we’ll say: This can’t
go on. I don’t care what it takes or how I feel [body]. I don’t care how
long it takes [time]. No matter what’s going on in my life [environ-
ment], I’m going to change. I have to.
We can learn and change in a state of pain and suffering, or
we can do so in a state of joy and inspiration. We don’t have to
wait until we are so uncomfortable that we feel forced to move out
of our resting state.
165
Side Effects of Closing the Gap
As you know, one of the key skills you need to develop is self-
awareness/self-observation. That’s a shortcut definition of what I
mean when I talk about meditation in the next chapter. In medita-
tion, you’re going to look at the negative emotional state that has
had such an impact on your life. You’re going to recognize the
primary state of your personality that drives your thoughts and
behaviors so that you become intimately familiar with every nu-
ance of them. Over time, you’re going to use those powers of ob-
servation to help you unmemorize that negative emotional state.
By doing so, you will surrender that emotion to a greater mind,
closing the gap between who you are and who you have presented
to the world in the past.
Picture yourself standing in a room with arms outstretched,
pushing the opposite walls apart. Do you have any idea how much
energy you would consume if you were trying to keep those walls
from crushing you? Instead of doing that, what if you released
those two walls, took a couple of steps forward (after all, that gap
is kind of like a door, isn’t it?), and walked out of that room and
into a completely new one. What about that other room you left
behind? Well, the walls have come together in such a way that you
can’t ever get back inside it. That gap has closed, and the separate
parts of you have become unified. And what’s going to happen
to all that energy you were expending? Physics states that energy
can’t be created or destroyed; it can only be transferred or trans-
formed. That’s exactly what’s going to happen to you when you
get to the point that no thought, no emotion, no subconscious
behavior goes unnoticed.
You can think of this another way: You’ll be going into the
operating system of the subconscious and bringing all that data
and those instructions into your conscious awareness, to truly see
where those urges and proclivities that have taken control of your
life are located. You become conscious of your unconscious self.
When we break the chains of that bond, we liberate the body.
It is no longer the mind, living in the same past day after day.
When we liberate the body emotionally, we close the gap. When
166
The Gap
we close the gap, we release the energy that was once used to pro-
duce it. With that energy, we now have the raw material we can
use to create a new life.
Figure 7E. As you unmemorize any emotion that has become part of your identity,
you close the gap between how you appear and who you really are. The side effect
of this phenomenon is a release of energy in the form of a stored emotion in the
body. Once the mind of that emotion is liberated from the body, energy is
freed up into the quantum field for you to use as a creator.
Another side effect of breaking the bonds of your emotional ad-

dictions is that this release of energy is like a healthy shot of some
wonderful elixir. Not only are you energized, but you feel something
you likely haven’t felt in quite a while—joy. When you liberate the
167
body from the chains of an emotional dependency, you will feel up-
lifted and inspired. Have you ever taken a long car trip? When you
get out of your vehicle and finally stretch a bit and breathe fresh air,
and the sound of the car’s tires on the pavement or the heater’s fan
or the air conditioner’s whir falls silent, that’s a great feeling. Imag-
ine how much better those new sensations would feel if you’d been
locked in the trunk for 2,000 miles! For a lot of us, that’s exactly
how we’ve been feeling for a significant stretch of time.
Keep in mind that it’s not enough merely to notice how you’ve
been thinking, feeling, and behaving. Meditation requires you to
be more active than that. You also have to tell the truth about
yourself. You have to come clean and reveal what you’ve been
hiding in that shadow part of the gap. You have to drag those
things out into the bright light of day. And when you really see
what you’ve been doing to yourself, you have to look at that mess
and say, This is no longer serving my best interests. This is no longer
serving me. This has never been loving to myself. Then you can make
a decision to be free.
From Victimization to Unexpected Abundance:

How One Woman Closed the Gap
One person who reaped the rewards of facing her life with the
courage of a quantum observer is Pamela, a participant in one of
my seminars. Pamela struggled financially because for two years,
her unemployed ex-husband hadn’t paid the mandated child sup-
port. Frustrated, angry, and feeling victimized, she even reacted
negatively to unrelated situations.
The meditation we did that day was about how the end product
of any experience is an emotion. Because so many of our experi-
ences involve family and friends, we share the resultant emotions
with them. That’s usually a good thing: bonds related to places
we’ve been, things we’ve done—even objects we’ve shared—can
strengthen our connection with people. But the flip side is that we
also share the emotions associated with negative experiences.
168
The Gap
We bond energetically with one another in a place beyond

time and space. Because we are entangled with others (to use
quantum terms) and frequently bond through survival-oriented
emotions, it is almost impossible for us to change when we are
still connected by negative experiences and emotions. Thus, real-
ity stays the same.
In Pamela’s case, her ex-husband’s anxiety, guilt, and feelings
of inferiority about not being able to support his children were
interwoven into the fabric of her state of being, along with her
own emotions of victimization, resentment, and lack. Whenever
opportunity knocked, her victimhood reared its ugly head and
produced an undesirable outcome. Her destructive emotions and
the energy associated with them had virtually frozen her in a
stagnant state of thinking, doing, and being. No matter what she
did to try to change this situation, she and her ex-husband were
bonded together by their mutual negative experiences, emotions,
and energies; and thus none of her efforts ever changed her cir-
cumstances with him.
The workshop helped Pamela realize that she had to break this
bond. She had to let go of the emotions that defined her in her
present reality. She also learned how a cycle of thinking, feeling,
and acting in the same way for years could produce a cascade ef-
fect that might trigger genes for disease—and she didn’t want that
to happen. Something had to give.
I like that phrase, because as Pamela told me afterward, dur-
ing the meditation she recognized the injurious emotions that her
victimization had set in motion—impatience with her kids, com-
plaining and blaming, and feelings of desperation and lack. She
let go of those emotions associated with past experiences, simul-
taneously releasing her self-involved state of being, and gave them
up to the greater mind.
In so doing, Pamela released all of that frozen energy into
the quantum field, closing the gap between who she thought she
was and who she presented to the world. She did this so well—
she started to feel so overjoyed and grateful—that she wanted
abundance for everyone, not just herself. She moved from selfish
169
emotions to selfless emotions. She got up from that meditation a

different person from who she was before it.
Pamela’s energy release signaled the field to begin organizing
outcomes that were just right for the new self she was in the process
of becoming. Almost immediately, she received evidence of this in
two forms.
The first involved her Internet business. When she had pre-
viously tried a promotion, she fretted about the response to it,
constantly checking her website, and saw only mediocre results.
She initiated her second promotion the morning of the workshop,
but was too busy to think about the results during the day. That
evening, she was feeling the positive effects of having let go of the
past. She felt even better when she discovered that she had earned
nearly $10,000 that day from the promotion she’d run!
Pamela received the second piece of evidence three days later
when her caseworker called to report that her ex had sent a check
not just for that month, but for the full $12,000 in back support
payments that he owed. She was beyond pleased to have “made”
nearly $22,000 after doing that meditation. She did nothing in
the physical realm to bring about those results, and couldn’t have
predicted how that money would find its way to her, but she was
enormously grateful that it had.
What Pamela’s story illustrates is the power of letting go of
negative emotions. When we are mired in our timeworn mind-set
and habitual behaviors and perceptions, there’s no way for us to
find solutions to problems rooted in the past. And those problems
(experiences, really) produce powerful energetic emotions. Once
we relinquish those, we experience an enormous release of energy,
and reality magically rearranges itself.
By Moving Out of the Past,

We Can Set Our Sights on the Future
Think about how much of your creative energy is tied up in

guilt, judgment, fear, or anxiety related to people and experiences
170
The Gap
from your past. Imagine how much good you could do by convert-
ing any destructive energy to productive energy. Contemplate what
you could accomplish if you weren’t focused on survival (a selfish
emotion), but instead worked to create out of positive intentions
(a selfless emotion).
Ask yourself: What energy from past experiences (in the form of
limited emotions) am I holding on to that reinforces my past identity
and emotionally attaches me to my current circumstances? Could I use
this same energy and transform it into an elevated state from which to
create a new and different outcome?
Meditating will help you peel away some of the layers, remove
some of the masks you’ve worn. Both of those things have blocked
the flow of that grand intelligence within you. As a result of shedding
those layers, you will become transparent. You are transparent when
how you appear is who you are. And when you live your life that way,
you will experience a state of gratitude, of elevated joy, which I be-
lieve is our natural state of being. As you do this, you begin to move
out of the past so that you can set your sights on the future.
As you remove the veils that block the flow of this intelligence
within you, you become more like it. You become more loving,
more giving, more conscious, more willful—because that is its
mind. The gap closes.
At that stage, you feel happy and whole. You no longer rely on
the external world to define you. The elevated emotions you are
feeling are unconditional. Nobody else and no event can make
you feel that way. You are happy and feel inspired just because of
who you are.
You no longer live in a state of lack or want. And do you know
the funny thing about not wanting or lacking for anything? That’s
when you can really begin to manifest things naturally. Most peo-
ple try to create in a state of lack, unworthiness, separation, or
some other limited emotion rather than from a state of gratitude,
enthusiasm, or wholeness. That’s when the field responds most
favorably to you.
All this starts with recognizing that the gap exists, and medi-
tating on the negative emotional states that have produced that
171
gap and dominated your personality. Unless you are prepared to

look closely at yourself, and assess your propensities with tender
honesty (not beating yourself up for your failings), you will for-
ever be mired in some past event and the negative emotions it
produced. See it. Understand it. Release it. Create with the energy
available to you by taking the mind out of the body and releasing
it into the field.
The Advertising Connection

Please understand that advertising agencies and their corporate
clients fully understand the notion of lack and how it plays a commanding
role in our behavior. They want us to believe that they have the answers
to take away that emptiness, by our identifying with their product.
Advertisers even put famous faces in their ads to subconsciously
plant the seed that the consumer can surely relate to this person as the
“new you.” Feeling bad about yourself? Buy something! Don’t fit in
socially? Buy something! Feeling a negative emotion because of some
sense of loss, separation, or longing? This microwave/big-screen TV/
car/cell phone . . . whatever . . . is just the ticket. You’ll feel better
about yourself, be accepted by society, and have 40 percent fewer
cavities as well! We are all controlled emotionally by this notion of lack.
How My Transformation Began . . .

and Perhaps Some Inspiration for Your Own
I started this chapter by telling you of that moment when I was

sitting on my couch and realized that there was quite a gap between
who I really was and the identity I presented to the world. So I’d like
to close this chapter by telling you the rest of the story. . . .
Around the time this happened, I was traveling frequently,
lecturing to people who had seen me in the movie What the
BLEEP Do We Know!? When I was speaking in front of groups, I
felt really alive, and I’m sure I came across as happy. But in that
moment, I was feeling numb. That’s when it hit me. I had to
show up being how everybody expected me to be, based on how I
172
The Gap
appeared in the movie. I’d started believing I was somebody else,

and I needed the world to remind me of who I thought I was. I
was actually living two different lives. No longer did I want to be
trapped by that.
As I sat alone that morning, I felt my heart beating, and I start-
ed thinking about who was beating my heart. I realized in one
instant that I had distanced myself from this innate intelligence. I
closed my eyes and put all of my attention on it. I started to admit
who I’d been, what I’d been hiding, and how unhappy I was. I
began to surrender some aspects of myself to a greater mind.
I then reminded myself of who I no longer wanted to be. I
decided how I no longer wanted to live based on that same person-
ality. Next, I observed my unconscious behaviors, thoughts, and
feelings that reinforced my old self and reviewed them until they
became familiar to me.
Then I thought about who I did want to be as a new personality
. . . until I became it. Suddenly I began to feel different—joyful.
This had nothing to do with all of those things outside of me; it
was part of an identity that was independent of any of that exter-
nal stuff. I knew that I was on to something.
I had an immediate reaction after that first meditation on the
couch, and it caught my attention, because I didn’t get up as the
same person who had sat down. I stood up and I felt so aware and
so alive. It was like I was seeing so many things for the first time.
Some mask was removed from me, and I wanted more of that.
So I retreated from my life for about six months. I kept up my
clinical practice to some degree, but I canceled all my lectures. My
friends thought I was losing my mind (I was), because What the
BLEEP was at its height, and they reminded me about how much
money I could have been making. But I said I would never walk
onstage again until I was no longer living an ideal for the world,
but one for myself. I didn’t want to lecture again until I was the
living example of everything that I was talking about. I needed to
take time for my meditations and to make true change in my life,
and I wanted to have joy from within me and not from outside of
me. And I wanted that to come across when I lectured.
173
My transformation wasn’t immediate. I meditated every day,

looking at my unwanted emotions, and one by one, I began to
unmemorize them. I started my meditative processes of unlearn-
ing and relearning, and I worked for months to change myself. In
the process, I was intentionally dismantling my old identity and
breaking the habit of being myself.
That’s when I began to feel joyful for no reason. I became hap-
pier and happier, and it had nothing to do with anything outside
me. Today, I make time to meditate every morning because I want
more of that state of being.
}}}
Whatever has drawn you to this book, when you make up

your mind to change, you have to move to a new consciousness.
You must become very clear about what you’re doing, how you’re
thinking, how you’re living, how you’re feeling, and how you’re
being . . . to the point that it isn’t you, and you don’t want to be it
any longer. And that shift has to reach you on a gut level.
What you’re about to learn is what I did, the steps I took in mak-
ing my own personal changes. But take heart—you very well may
have done something similar in your life already. There is just a little
more knowledge to come, related to the meditative process, in order
for you to make this method of change a skill. So let’s get to it.
}}}}
174
CH AP T ER EIGHT
MEDITATION,
DEMYSTIFYING THE
MYSTICAL, AND WAVES
OF YOUR FUTURE
In the previous chapter, I wrote about the need to bridge the

space between who we really are and the image we present to the
world. When we’re able to do that, we can take steps toward free-
ing up the necessary energy to become that ideal self, modeled
after some of the great people in the history of the world, such as
Gandhi and Joan of Arc.
And as I’ve said, one of the keys to breaking the habit of being
yourself is working toward being more observant—whether that
entails being more metacognitive (monitoring your thoughts),
embracing stillness, or focusing more attention on your behaviors
and how elements in your environment might trigger emotional
responses. So the big question here is: How do you do all this?
In other words, how do you become more observant; break
your emotional bonds with the body, the environment, and time;
and close the gap?
175
The answer is simple: meditation. You may have noticed that

up to this point in the book, I have teased you with brief allusions
to meditation as the way to break the habit of being yourself and
begin to create a new life as your ideal self. I told you that the
information in Parts I and II of this book would prepare you to
understand what you will be doing when you apply the medita-
tive steps you will practice in Part III. Now it’s time to explain the
inner workings of the process that I refer to as meditation.
When I use the term meditation, an image of a person seated
cross-legged in front of a shrine at home, a bearded and gowned
yogi sitting in a secluded cave in the Himalayas, or some other vi-
sual may come to mind. That individual may be a representation
of what you understand is the way to “go quiet,” empty the mind,
focus all of one’s attention on a thought, or engage in any of the
other variations of the practice of meditation.
There are a lot of meditative techniques, but in this book, my
wish is to help you produce the most desirable benefit of medita-
tion—being able to access and enter the operating system of the sub-
conscious mind so that you move away from simply being yourself
and your thoughts, beliefs, actions, and emotions, to observing those
things . . . and then once you’re there, to subconsciously reprogram-
ming your brain and body to a new mind. When you move from
unconsciously producing thoughts, beliefs, actions, and emotions and
take control of them through the conscious application of your will,
you can unlock the chains of being your old self to become a new
self. How you get to the point at which you are able to access that op-
erating system and bring the unconscious into your consciousness is
the subject we’ll cover through the rest of this book.
One Definition of Meditation:

Becoming Familiar with Self
In the Tibetan language, to meditate means “to become famil-

iar with.” Accordingly, I use the term meditation as a synonym for
self-observation as well as self-development. After all, to become
familiar with anything, we have to spend some time observing it.
176
Meditation, Demystifying the Mystical, and Waves of Your Future
Again, the key moment in making any change is going from being
it to observing it.
Another way to think of this transition is when you go from
being a doer to a doer/watcher. An easy analogy I can use is that
when athletes or performers—golfers, skiers, swimmers, dancers,
singers, or actors—want to change something about their tech-
nique, most coaches have them watch videotape of themselves.
How can you change from an old mode of operation to a new one
unless you can see what old and new look like?
It’s the same with your old and your new self. How can you
stop doing things one way without knowing what that way looks
like? I frequently use the term unlearning to describe this phase of
changing.
This process of becoming familiar with the self works both
ways—you need to “see” the old and the new self. You have to
observe yourself so precisely and vigilantly, as I’ve described, that
you won’t allow any unconscious thought, emotion, or behavior
to go unnoticed. Since you have the equipment to do this because
of the size of your frontal lobe, you can look at yourself and decide
what you want to change in order to do a better job in life.
Decide to Stop Being the Old You
When you can become conscious of those unconscious as-

pects of the old, habituated self, rooted in the operating system
of the subconscious, you are beginning the process of changing
anything about yourself.
What steps do you normally take when you get serious about
doing something differently? You separate yourself from your ex-
ternal world long enough to think about what to do and not do.
You start becoming aware of many aspects of the old self, and you
begin to plan a course of action related to a new self.
For example, if you want to become happy, the first step is to
stop being unhappy—that is, stop thinking the thoughts that make
you unhappy; and stop feeling the emotions of pain, sorrow, and
bitterness. If you desire to become wealthy, you’ll probably decide
177
to stop doing the things that make you poor. If you want to be
healthy, you’ll have to stop living an unhealthy lifestyle. These
examples are to show you that first, you have to make the decision
to stop being the old you, to such a degree that you make room for
a new personality—thinking, acting, and doing.
Therefore, if you eliminated stimuli from your external world
by closing your eyes and becoming quiet (decreasing your sensory
input), putting your body in a state of stillness, and no longer
focusing on linear time, you could become aware solely of how
you are thinking and feeling. And if you began to pay attention to
your unconscious states of mind and body and became “familiar
with” your automatic, unconscious programs until they became
conscious, would you be meditating?
The answer is yes. To “know thyself” is to meditate.
If you are no longer being that old personality but, instead, are
noticing different aspects of it, wouldn’t you agree that you are
the consciousness observing the programs of that past identity?
In other words, if you consciously observe the old self, you are no
longer being it. As you go from being unaware to being aware, you
are beginning to objectify your subjective mind. That is, by your
paying attention to the old habit of being you, your conscious
participation begins to separate you from those unconscious pro-
grams and give you more control over them.
By the way, if you are successful in consciously restraining those
routine states of mind and body, then “nerve cells that no longer fire
together, no longer wire together.” As you prune away the neurologi-
cal hardware of the old self, you also no longer signal the same genes
in identical ways. You are breaking the habit of being you.
Contemplate a New, Greater Expression of Self
Now let’s take it one step further. Once you have become fa-
miliar with the old self to the extent that no thought, no behavior,
and no feeling will cause you to fall unconsciously into previous
patterns, you might agree that it would be a good idea to begin
to become familiar with a new self. Accordingly, you may ask
178
yourself, What is a greater expression of myself that I would like to be?

If you turn on your frontal lobe and contemplate those aspects
of self, you will begin to make your brain work differently than
your past self. As your frontal lobe (the CEO) entertains that new
question, it looks out over the landscape of the rest of the brain
and seamlessly combines all of your stored knowledge and expe-
riences into a new model of thought. It helps create an internal
representation for you to begin to focus on.
This contemplation process builds new neurological networks.
As you ponder the fundamental question above, your neurons will
begin to fire and wire in new sequences, patterns, and combinations
because you are thinking differently. And whenever you make your
brain work differently, you’re changing your mind. As you plan
your actions, speculate on novel possibilities, conjure up innovative
ways of being, and dream of new states of mind and body, there will
be a moment that the frontal lobe will turn on and lower the vol-
ume to the Big Three. When this happens, the thought(s) you are
thinking will become an internal experience; you will install new
software and hardware programs into your nervous system, and it
will appear that the experience of being your new self has already
been realized in your brain. And if you repeat this process every
day, your ideal will become a familiar state of mind.
One more point here. If you attend so well to the thought you
are focusing on that it literally becomes an experience, then the
end product of that is an emotion. Once that emotion is created,
you begin to feel like your new ideal, and that new feeling will
start to become familiar. Remember that when your body begins
to respond as if the experience is already a present reality, you will
signal your genes in new ways . . . and your body will commence
to change now, ahead of the physical event in your life. Now you
are ahead of time, and most important, you move into a state of
being—mind and body working together. And if you repeat this
process consistently, this state of being will become familiar to
you as well.
179
If you can maintain that modified state of mind and body, in-
dependent of the external environment and the body’s emotional
needs and greater than time, something should show up differ-
ently in your world. That’s the quantum law.
Let’s summarize here. According to our working model of medi-
tation, all you have to do is remind yourself who you no longer want
to “be” until this becomes so familiar that you know your old self—
the thoughts, behaviors, and emotions connected to the old you that
you want to change—to the extent that you “unfire” and “unwire”
the old mind away and no longer signal the same genes in the same
ways. Then, you repeatedly contemplate who you do want to “be.” As
a result, you will fire and wire new levels of mind, to which you will
emotionally and genetically condition the body until they become
familiar and second nature to you. That’s change.
A Second Definition of Meditation:

Cultivating Self
Besides its meaning in Tibetan, to meditate in Sanskrit means

“to cultivate self.” I especially like this definition because of the
metaphorical possibilities it offers—for example, gardening or ag-
riculture. When you cultivate the soil, you take the packed-down
earth that has been lying fallow for a while and you churn it up
with a spade or other implement. You expose “new” dirt and nutri-
ents, making it easier for seeds to germinate and for tender shoots
to take root. Cultivation may also require you to remove plants
from the previous season, attend to weeds that went unnoticed,
and remove any rocks that rose to the surface by natural sifting.
Thus, last season’s plants might represent your past creations
derived from the thoughts, actions, and emotions that define the
old, familiar you. Weeds could signify long-standing attitudes, be-
liefs, or perceptions about yourself that are subconsciously under-
mining your efforts, which you hadn’t noticed because you were
too distracted by other things. And the rocks can symbolize your
many layers of personal blocks and limitations (which naturally
180
rise to the surface over time and block your growth). All these
need tending to so you can make room to plant a new garden in
your mind. Otherwise, if you planted a new garden or crop with-
out proper preparation, it would yield little fruit.
My hope is that you understand by now that it is impossible
to create any new future when you are rooted in your past. You
have to clear away the old vestiges of the garden (of the mind)
before you can cultivate a new self by planting the seeds of new
thoughts, behaviors, and emotions that create a new life.
The other key thing is to ensure that this doesn’t happen hap-
hazardly: we’re not talking about plants in the wild, which scatter
seeds roughshod over the ground, with some tiny percentage of
them eventually coming to fruition. Instead, to cultivate requires
making conscious decisions—when to till the soil, when to plant,
what to plant, how each of the items planted will work in harmony
with the others, how much water and fertilizer to mix in, and so
forth. Planning and preparation are essential to the success of the
endeavor. This requires our daily “mindful attention.”
Similarly, when we talk about someone cultivating an interest
in a particular subject, we mean that he has thoughtfully researched
that area of interest. Also, a cultivated person is someone who has
carefully chosen what to expose herself to and who has amassed a
breadth of knowledge and experience. Again, none of this is done
on a whim, and little is left to chance.
When you cultivate anything, you are seeking to be in con-
trol. And that’s what is required when you change any part of your
self. Instead of allowing things to develop “naturally,” you inter-
vene and consciously take steps to reduce the likelihood of failure.
The purpose behind all of this effort is to reap a harvest. When
you cultivate a new personality in meditation, the abundant yield
you seek to create is a new reality.
Creating a new mind is like cultivating a garden. The manifes-
tations you produce from the garden of your mind will be just like
crops from the earth’s soil. Tend well.
181
The Meditative Process for Change:

Move from the Unconscious to the Conscious
To sum up the meditative process, you have to break the habit

of being yourself and reinvent a new self; lose your mind and cre-
ate a new one; prune synaptic connections and nurture new ones;
unmemorize past emotions and recondition the body to a new
mind and emotions; and let go of the past and create a new future.
Figure 8A. The biological model of change involves transforming the

familiar past to a new future.
182
Let’s look a bit more closely at a few elements of this process.

Obviously, to avoid letting any thought or feeling you don’t
want to experience get past you unchecked, you have to develop
powerful skills of observation and focus. We humans have a lim-
ited ability to focus and to absorb input—but we can be much
better at it than we normally are in our more unconscious state.
To break the habit of being yourself, you would be wise to
select one trait, propensity, or characteristic and focus your at-
tention on that single aspect of your old self that you want to
change. For example, you might begin by asking yourself: When
I feel angry, what are my thought patterns? What do I say to others
and myself? How do I act? What other emotions spring forth from my
being angry? What does anger feel like in my body? How can I become
conscious of what triggers my anger, and how can I change my reaction?
The process of change requires unlearning first, then learn-
ing. The latter is a function of firing and wiring in the brain; the
former means that circuits are trimmed. When you stop thinking
the same way, when you inhibit your habituations and interrupt
those emotional addictions, the old self begins to be neurologi-
cally pruned away.
And if every connection between nerve cells constitutes a mem-
ory, then as those circuits are dismantled, memories of your old
self will go with them. When you think about your former life and
who you used to be, it will be like another lifetime. Where are those
memories now stored? They will be given to the soul as wisdom.
When those thoughts and feelings that used to signal the
body are stopped by your conscious efforts, the liberated energy
from those limited emotions is released into the field. You now
have energy with which to design and create a new destiny.
When we use meditation as a means to change, when we be-
come conscious and aware, familiar with and willing to do what is
necessary to eradicate an undesirable trait and cultivate a desired
one, we’re doing what mystics have been doing for centuries.
Although I take a clearly biological approach to change, so
did the mystics. They just used different terminology to describe
183
the process. The end result is the same—breaking the addiction to

the body, the environment, and time. Only when we make that
separation can we change. Only when we think greater than the
Big Three can we truly live independent of them, and reestablish
dominion over how we think and feel on a daily basis.
For too long, we’ve been running unconscious programs that
have been controlling us. Meditation allows us to reassert control.
Awareness comes first—recognizing when and how those pro-
grammed responses take over is essential. When you move from
the unconscious to the conscious, you begin to close the gap be-
tween how you appear and who you are.
The Waves of Your Future
Since knowledge is, as we’ve seen, the precursor to experience,

having a basic understanding of what happens in the brain dur-
ing meditation will serve you well when you begin to learn and
experience the meditative process coming up shortly in Part III.
You probably know that the brain is electrochemical in na-
ture. When nerve cells fire, they exchange charged elements that
then produce electromagnetic fields. Because the brain’s diverse
electrical activity can be measured, these effects can provide im-
portant information about what we’re thinking, feeling, learning,
dreaming, and creating and how we are processing information.
The most common technology scientists use to record the brain’s
changing electrical activity is an electroencephalograph (EEG).
Research has discovered a wide scope of brain-wave frequen-
cies in humans, ranging from the very low levels of activity found
in deep sleep (Delta waves); to a twilight state between deep sleep
and wakefulness (Theta); to the creative, imaginative state (Alpha);
to higher frequencies seen during conscious thought (Beta waves);
to the highest frequencies recorded (Gamma waves), seen in el-
evated states of consciousness.1
184
To help you better understand your journey into meditation,

I’m going to give you an overview of how each of these states re-
lates to you. Once you know what all of these domains are, you
will be more adept at knowing when you are in the brain-wave
state where the ego tries in vain to change the ego (God knows,
I’ve been there), and when you are in the brain-wave state that is
the fertile ground of true change.
As children grow, the frequencies that predominate in their
brains progress from Delta to Theta to Alpha and then to Beta.
Our job in meditation is to become like a child, moving from Beta
to Alpha to Theta to (for the adept or mystic) Delta. So under-
standing the progression of brain-wave changes during human
development can help demystify the process of how we experi-
ence meditation.
Brain-Wave Development in Children:

From Subconscious to Conscious Mind
Delta. Between birth and two years old, the human brain
functions primarily in the lowest brain-wave levels, from 0.5 to 4
cycles per second. This range of electromagnetic activity is known
as Delta waves. Adults in deep sleep are in Delta; this explains
why a newborn usually can’t remain awake for more than a few
minutes at a time (and why even with their eyes open, young ba-
bies can be asleep). When one-year-olds are awake, they’re still
primarily in Delta, because they function principally from their
subconscious. Information from the outside world enters their
brains with little editing, critical thinking, or judgment taking
place. The thinking brain—the neocortex, or conscious mind—is
operating at very low levels at this point.
185
Theta. From about ages two to five or six, a child begins to

demonstrate slightly higher EEG patterns. These Theta-wave fre-
quencies measure 4 to 8 cycles per second. Children functioning in
Theta tend to be trancelike and primarily connected to their inter-
nal world. They live in the abstract and in the realm of imagination,
and exhibit few of the nuances of critical, rational thinking. Thus,
young children are likely to accept what you tell them. (P.S. Santa
is real.) At this stage, phrases such as the following have a huge
impact: Big boys don’t cry. Girls should be seen and not heard. Your sis-
ter is smarter than you. If you get cold, you’ll catch a cold. These types
of statements go straight to the subconscious mind, because these
slow brain-wave states are the realm of the subconscious (hint, hint).
Alpha. Between ages five and eight, brain waves change again,
to an Alpha frequency: 8 to 13 cycles per second. The analyti-
cal mind begins to form at this point in childhood development;
children start to interpret and draw conclusions about the laws
of external life. At the same time, the inner world of imagination
tends to be as real as the outer world of reality. Children in this
age-group typically have a foot in both worlds. That’s why they
pretend so well. For instance, you may ask a child to pretend that
he is a dolphin in the sea, a snowflake in the wind, or a superhero
coming to the rescue, and hours later, he is still in character. Ask
an adult to do the same, and well . . . you already know the answer.
Beta. From ages 8 to 12 and onward, brain activity increases

to even higher frequencies. Anything above 13 cycles per second
in children is the frontier for Beta waves. Beta goes on and up to
varying degrees from there throughout adulthood, and is repre-
sentative of conscious, analytical thinking.
After age 12, the door between the conscious mind and the
subconscious mind usually closes. Beta is actually divided into
low-, mid-, and high-range Beta waves. As children progress into
their teens, they tend to move from low-range Beta up into mid-
and high-range Beta waves, as seen in most adults.
186
Figure 8B. The progression of brain-wave development from Delta in infancy

to Beta in adulthood. Look at the difference in the three ranges of Beta:
high-range Beta can be twice as high as mid-range Beta.
187
Brain-Wave States in Adults: An Overview
Beta. As you’re reading this chapter, most likely you are in

the everyday waking state of Beta brain-wave activity. Your brain
is processing sensory data and trying to create meaning between
your outer and inner worlds. While you are engaged in this book’s
material, you may feel the weight of your body on your seat, you
may hear music in the background, you may glance up and see
out a window. All of this data is being processed by your thinking
neocortex.
Alpha. Now, let’s say that you close your eyes (80 percent of
our sensory information derives from sight) and purposefully go
inward. Since you are greatly reducing sensory data from the en-
vironment, less information is entering your nervous system. Your
brain waves naturally slow down into the Alpha state. You relax.
You become less preoccupied with the elements in your outer
world, and the internal world begins to consume your attention.
You tend to think and analyze less. In Alpha, the brain is in a
light meditative state (when you practice the meditation in Part
III, you’ll go into an even deeper Alpha state).
On a daily basis, your brain moves into Alpha without much
effort on your part. For example, when you’re learning something
new in a lecture, generally your brain is functioning in low- to
mid-range Beta. You’re listening to the message and analyzing the
concepts being presented. Then when you’ve heard enough or you
particularly like something interesting that applies to you, you
naturally pause and your brain slips into Alpha. You do this be-
cause that information is being consolidated in your gray matter.
And as you stare into space, you are attending to your thoughts
and making them more real than the external world. The moment
that happens, your frontal lobe is now wiring that information
into your cerebral architecture . . . and like magic, you can remem-
ber what you just learned.
188
Theta. In adults, Theta waves emerge in the twilight state or lucid

state, during which some people find themselves half-awake and
half-asleep (the conscious mind is awake, while the body is some-
what asleep). This is the state when a hypnotherapist can access the
subconscious mind. In Theta, we are more programmable because
there is no veil between the conscious and subconscious minds.
Delta. For most of us, Delta waves are representative of deep

sleep. In this realm there is very little conscious awareness, and
the body is restoring itself.
As this overview demonstrates, when we move into slower

brain-wave states, we move deeper into the inner world of the sub-
conscious mind. The reverse is also true: as we move into higher
brain-wave states, the more we become conscious and attend to
the external world.
With repeated practice, these terrains of the mind will begin
to become familiar to you. Just like anything else you persist at,
you will come to notice what each brain-wave pattern feels like.
You’ll know when you are analyzing or thinking too much in Beta;
you’ll observe when you are not present because you are swinging
from the emotions of the past to trying to anticipate a known fu-
ture. You’ll also sense when you are in Alpha or Theta, since you’ll
feel its coherence. In time, you will know when you are there and
when you are not.
189
Figure 8C. A comparison of different brain-wave patterns in adults.
Gamma: The Fastest Brain Waves of All

The fastest documented brain-wave frequencies are Gamma waves,
from 40 to 100 hertz. (Gamma waves are more compressed and have
a smaller amplitude compared to the other four types of brain waves I
have discussed, so although their cycles per second are similar to high-
range Beta, there is not an exact correlation between them.) Having
high amounts of coherent Gamma activity in the brain is usually linked
to elevated states of mind such as happiness, compassion, and even
190
increased awareness, which usually entails better memory formation This

is a heightened level of consciousness that people tend to describe as
“having a transcendent or peak experience.” For our purposes, think of
Gamma as the side effect of a shift in consciousness.
Three Levels of Beta Waves Govern Our Waking Hours
Since we spend most of our conscious waking day with our

attention on the external environment and functioning in Beta,
let’s talk about the three levels of these brain-wave patterns.2 This
understanding will facilitate moving from Beta to Alpha and ulti-
mately to Theta in the meditative state.
1. Low-range Beta is defined as relaxed, interested attention
ranging from 13 to 15 hertz (cycles per second). If you are enjoy-
ing reading a book and are familiar with the material, your brain
would probably be firing in low Beta, because you are paying a
certain degree of attention without any vigilance.
2. Mid-range Beta is produced during focused attention on
sustained external stimuli. Learning is a good example: if I were
to test you on what you read while enjoying that book in low Beta,
you would have to perk up a bit, and thus there would be more
neocortical activity such as analytical thinking. Mid-Beta operates
between 16 and 22 hertz.
With mid-range Beta and even low-range Beta to some extent,
these frequencies reflect our conscious or rational thinking and
our alertness. They are a result of the neocortex taking in stimuli
from the environment through all of our senses and assembling
the information into a package to create a level of mind. As you
can imagine, with this focus on what we’re seeing, hearing,
tasting, feeling, and smelling comes a great deal of complexity
and activity within the brain to produce that level of stimulation.
3. High-range Beta is characterized by any brain-wave pattern
from 22 to 50 hertz. High-Beta patterns are observed during
stressful situations where those nasty survival chemicals are
191
produced in the body. Maintaining this sustained focus in such

a high-arousal state is not the type of focused attention we use
to learn, create, dream, problem solve, or even heal. In truth, we
could say that the brain in high Beta is functioning with too much
focused concentration. The mind is too amped up and the body
is too stimulated to be in any semblance of order. (When you’re
in high Beta, just know for now that you are probably focusing on
something too much and it’s hard to stop.)
High Beta: A Short-Term Survival Mechanism,

a Long-Term Source of Stress and Imbalance
Emergencies always create a considerable need for increased

electrical activity in the brain. Nature has gifted us with the fight-
or-flight response, to help us quickly focus in potentially dan-
gerous situations. The strong physiological arousal of the heart,
lungs, and sympathetic nervous system leads to a dramatic change
in psychological states. Our perception, behaviors, attitudes, and
emotions are all altered. This type of attention is very different
from what we normally use. It causes us to act like a revved-up
animal with a big memory bank. The scales of attention become
tipped toward the external environment, causing an overfocused
state of mind. Anxiety, worry, anger, pain, suffering, frustration,
fear, and even competitive states of mind induce high-range Beta
waves to predominate during the crisis.
In the short term, this serves all organisms well. There is noth-
ing wrong with this narrow, overfocused range of attention. We
“get the job done” because it affords us the ability to accomplish
so many things.
However, if we remain in “emergency mode” for a long time,
high Beta knocks us far out of balance, because maintaining it
requires an immense amount of energy—and because this is the
most reactive, unstable, and volatile of all brain patterns. When
high Beta becomes chronic and uncontrolled, the brain gets juiced
up beyond the healthy range.
192
Unfortunately, high Beta is terribly overutilized by the majority

of the population. We are obsessive or compulsive, insomniac or
chronically fatigued, anxious or depressed, forcibly pushing in all
directions to be all-powerful or hopelessly holding on to our pain
to feel utterly powerless, competing to get ahead or victimized by
our circumstances.
Sustained High Beta Sends the Brain into Disorder
To put this into perspective, think about the normal function-

ing of the brain as part of the central nervous system, which con-
trols and coordinates all other systems of the body: it keeps your
heart beating, digests your food, regulates your immune system,
maintains your respiratory rate, balances your hormones, controls
your metabolism, and eliminates wastes, to name a few. As long
as the mind is coherent and orderly, messages that travel from the
brain to the body through the spinal cord will produce synchro-
nized signals for a balanced, healthy body.
However, many people spend their waking days in a sustained
high-frequency Beta state. To them, everything is an emergency.
The brain stays constantly on a very fast cycle, which taxes the en-
tire system. Living in this thin margin of brain waves is like driv-
ing a car in first gear while simultaneously stepping on the gas.
These people “drive through” their lives without ever stopping to
consider shifting gears into other brain states.
Their continual repetition of survival-based thoughts creates
feelings of anger, fear, sadness, anxiety, depression, competition,
aggression, insecurity, and frustration, among others. People be-
come so caught up in these intoxicating emotions that they try to
analyze their problems from within these familiar feelings, which
only perpetuates more thoughts overfocused on survival. Also, re-
call that we can turn on the stress response by thought alone—the
way we are thinking reinforces the very state of the brain and
body, which then causes us to think the same way . . . and the
loop goes on. It’s the serpent eating its tail.
193
Long-term high Beta produces an unhealthy cocktail of stress

chemicals, which can tip the brain out of balance like a symphony
orchestra out of tune. Parts of the brain may stop coordinating
effectively with other areas; entire regions work separately and
in opposition. Like a house divided against itself, the brain no
longer communicates in an organized, holistic fashion. As stress
chemicals force the thinking brain/neocortex to become more
segregated, we may function like someone with multiple person-
ality disorder, only we’re experiencing it all at once instead of one
personality at a time.
Of course, when disorderly, incoherent signals from the brain
relay erratic, mixed electrochemical messages through the central
nervous system to the rest of the physiological systems, this puts
the body out of balance, upsetting its homeostasis or equilibrium,
and setting the stage for disease.
If we live in this high-stress mode of chaotic brain function for
extended periods, the heart is impacted (leading to arrhythmias or
high blood pressure), digestion begins to fail (causing indigestion,
reflux, and related symptoms), and immune function weakens (re-
sulting in colds, allergies, cancer, rheumatoid arthritis, and more).
All of these consequences stem from an unbalanced nervous
system that is operating incoherently, due to the action of stress
chemicals and high-range Beta brain waves reaffirming the outer
world as the only reality.
Sustained High Beta Makes It Hard to

Focus on Our Inner Self
The stress I’ve been discussing is a product of our addiction to

the Big Three. The problem isn’t that we are conscious and aware,
but that our focus in high Beta is almost exclusively on our envi-
ronment (people, things, places), our bodies’ parts and functions
(I’m hungry . . . I’m too weak . . . I want a better nose . . . I’m fat com-
pared to her . . .), and time (Hurry up! The clock is winding down!).
In high Beta, the outer world appears to be more real than
the inner world. Our attention and conscious awareness primarily
194
focus on everything that makes up the external environment.

Thus, we identify more readily with those material elements: we
criticize everyone we know, we judge the way our bodies look,
we’re overfocused on our problems, we cling to things we own
out of fear that we might lose them, we busy ourselves with places
we have to go, and we’re preoccupied with time. That leaves us
little processing power to pay attention to the changes that we
truly want to make—to go inward . . . to observe and monitor our
thoughts, behavior, and emotions.
It’s difficult for us to focus on our inner reality when we are
overfixating on our outer world. In general, we can’t concentrate
on anything other than the Big Three, we can’t open our minds
beyond the boundaries of our narrow focus, and we obsess about
problems rather than thinking about solutions. Why does it take
such effort to let go of the external and go within? The brain
in high Beta can’t easily shift gears into the imaginary realm of
Alpha. Our brain-wave patterns keep us locked into all those ele-
ments of our outer world as if they are real.
When you are stuck in high Beta, it’s hard to learn: very little new
information can enter into your nervous system that is not equal to
the emotion you are experiencing. The truth is, the problems you’re
so busy analyzing can’t be resolved within the emotion you are ana-
lyzing them in. Why not? Well, your analysis is creating higher and
higher frequencies of Beta. Thinking in this mode causes your brain
to overreact; you reason poorly and think without clarity.
In view of the emotions that grip you, you’re thinking in the
past—and trying to predict the next moment based on the past—
and your brain can’t process the present moment. There’s no room
for the unknown to show up in your world. You’re feeling separate
from the quantum field, and can’t even entertain new possibilities
for your circumstances. Your brain isn’t in creative mode; it’s fixated
on survival, preoccupied with possible worst-case scenarios. Again,
not much information will be encoded into the system that is not
equal to that emergency state. When everything feels like a crisis,
your brain makes survival the priority, not learning or creating. It’s
not a time for growth. It’s a time for survival and emergency.
195
The answer lies outside the emotions you’re wrestling with

and the thoughts you’re overanalyzing, because they keep you
connected to your past—the familiar and the known. Solving
your problems begins with getting beyond those familiar feelings
and replacing your scattered focus on the Big Three with a more
orderly mode of thinking.
High Beta’s Incoherent Signals

Produce Scattered Thoughts
As you can imagine, when the brain is in high Beta and you’re
processing sensory information—involving the environment,
your body, and time—that activity can create a bit of chaos. Along
with understanding that the electrical impulses in your brain
occur in a certain quantity (cycles per second), it’s also important
to be aware of the quality of the signal. Just as the discussion of
quantum creating showed how vital it is to send a coherent signal
into the field to indicate your intended future outcome, the same
coherence is essential to your thinking and your brain waves.
At any one time when you’re in the Beta range of frequen-
cies, one of the Big Three will have more of your attention. If
you’re thinking about being late, your emphasis is on time—that
thought is sending a higher-frequency wave through your neocor-
tex. Of course, you’re also aware of, and therefore sending elec-
tromagnetic impulses related to, your body and the environment.
It’s just that in the case of the latter two, you’re sending different
wave patterns with a lower frequency through the neocortex.
196
Your time-focused brain waves might look like this:
Your environment-focused brain waves might look like this:
Your body-focused brain waves might look like this:
Your fractured attention, caused by trying to focus simultane-

ously on all of the Big Three, would then produce a brain-wave
pattern that might look like this:
As you can see, those three different patterns together during

stress produce an incoherent signal in high-Beta mode. If you’re
anything like me, you’ve had experiences when that last drawing
represents how your thoughts felt: scattered.
197
When we are plugged into all three dimensions—the environ-

ment, the body, and time—the brain tries to integrate their var-
ied frequencies and wave patterns. That takes up an enormous
amount of processor time and space. If we can eliminate our focus
on any one of those, the patterns that emerge will be more coher-
ent, and we’ll be better able to process them.
Figure 8D. In the first picture, the energy is orderly, organized, and rhythmic. When
energy is highly synchronous and patterned, it is profoundly more powerful. The light
emitted by a laser is an example of coherent waves of energy all moving together in
unison. In the second picture, the energy patterns are chaotic, disintegrated, and out
of phase. An example of an incoherent, less powerful signal is the light from an incan-
descent lightbulb.
198
Awareness, Not Analysis,

Permits Entry into the Subconscious
Here is a way for you to know if you’re in Beta state: if you’re

constantly analyzing (I call this “being in analytical mind”), you
are in Beta and you’re not able to enter into the subconscious mind.
The expression “paralysis by analysis” is an apt one here. Well,
that’s what is happening to us when we live most of our lives in
that Beta range. The only time we aren’t there is when we’re sleep-
ing (then we’re in the Delta range of brain-wave activity).
Now you might be thinking, But you said that we needed to be
aware. We need to become familiar with our thoughts, feelings, patterns
of responses, and so forth. Doesn’t that require analysis?
Actually, awareness can exist outside of analysis. When you are
aware, you may think, I’m feeling angry. When you are analyzing,
you go beyond that simple observation to add: Why is this page tak-
ing so long to load? Who designed this stupid website? Why is it that
whenever I’m in a hurry, like now when I’m trying to get a movie list-
ing, the Internet connection is so slow! Awareness, as I mean it to be
practiced here, is simply noting (watching) a thought or feeling and
moving on.
A Working Model of Meditation
Now that we’ve covered some basics about brain waves in chil-
dren and adults, this foundation will provide a working model (see
the next five figures) to help you understand the meditative process.3
Let’s start with Figure 8E on the next page. Thanks to the re-
search into children’s brain-wave patterns, we know that when we
are born, we are completely in the realm of the subconscious.
199
Figure 8E. Let this circle represent the mind. When we are born,
we are totally subconscious mind.
Next, take a look at Figure 8F. Those plus and minus signs rep-
resent how the developing child’s mind learns from positive and
negative identifications and associations that give rise to habits
and behaviors.
Here’s an example of a positive identification: When an infant
is hungry or uncomfortable, she cries out, making an effort to
communicate in order to get her mother’s attention. As the nur-
turing parent responds by feeding the child or changing her dia-
per, the infant makes an important connection between her inner
and outer worlds. It only takes a few repetitions before she learns
to associate crying out with being fed or becoming comfortable. It
becomes a behavior.
A good example of a negative association is when a two-year-
old puts his finger on a hot stove. He learns very quickly to iden-
tify the object he sees externally—the stove—with the pain he is
feeling internally, and after a few tries, he learns a valuable lesson.
200
Figure 8F. In time, we begin to learn by association through different interactions

between our inner world and our outer world, through our senses.
In both examples, we could say that the moment the child

notices an internal chemical change in the body, the brain perks
up and pays attention to whatever it was in the outer environment
that caused this alteration, be it pleasure or pain. These types of
identifications and associations begin to slowly develop many
habits, skills, and behaviors.
As you learned, somewhere around the age of six or seven, as
brain waves change into Alpha, the child begins to develop the
analytical or critical mind. For most children, the analytical mind
usually finishes developing between ages 7 and 12.
201
Meditation Takes Us Beyond Analytical

Mind and into the Subconscious
In Figure 8G, the line that runs across the top of the circle is the
analytical mind, which acts as a barrier to separate the conscious
from the subconscious mind. In adults, this critical mind loves
to reason, evaluate, anticipate, forecast, compare what it knows
to what it’s learning, or contrast knowns and unknowns. For the
most part, when adults are conscious, their analytical minds are
always working, and thus they are functioning in some realm of
Beta waves.
Figure 8G. Between the ages of six and seven, the analytical mind begins to form. It
acts as a barrier to separate the conscious mind from the subconscious mind, and it
usually finishes developing somewhere between 7 and 12 years old.
Now take a look at Figure 8H. Above that line representing the
analytical mind is the conscious mind, which is 5 percent of the
total mind. This is the seat of logic and reasoning, which contrib-
utes to our will, our faith, our intentions, and our creative abilities.
202
The subconscious mind, which makes up about 95 percent of

who we are, consists of those positive and negative identifications
and associations that give rise to habits and behaviors.
Figure 8H. The total mind is made up of 5 percent conscious mind and 95 percent
subconscious mind. The conscious mind primarily operates using logic and reason-
ing, which gives rise to our will, faith, creative abilities, and intentions. The subcon-
scious mind comprises our myriad positive and negative identifications, which give
rise to habits, behaviors, skills, beliefs, and perceptions.
Figure 8I illustrates the most fundamental purpose of med-

itation (represented by the arrow): to get beyond the analytical
mind. When we are in this mind, we cannot truly change. We can
analyze our old self, but we cannot uninstall the old programs and
install new ones.
203
Meditation opens the door between the conscious and sub-

conscious minds. We meditate to enter the operating system of
the subconscious, where all of those unwanted habits and behav-
iors reside, and change them to more productive modes to support
us in our lives.
Figure 8I. One of the main purposes of meditation is to go beyond the conscious
mind and enter the subconscious mind, in order to change self-destructive habits,
behaviors, beliefs, emotional reactions, attitudes, and unconscious states of being.
Meditation Takes Us from Beta into

Alpha and Theta Brain-Wave States
Let’s examine how you can learn to change gears and access
other brain-wave states so you can go beyond your association
with the body, the environment, and time. You can naturally slow
down the high-speed vigilance of the brain and body into a more
relaxed, orderly, systemized pattern of brain waves.
204
Thus, it is quite possible to consciously alter your brain waves

from that high-frequency Beta state into Alpha and Theta (you
can train yourself to move up and down the scale of brain waves).
As you do, you will open doors to true personal change. You tres-
pass beyond the common type of thinking that is fueled by reac-
tions to being in survival mode; you are entering the realm of the
subconscious mind.
During meditation, you transcend the feelings of the body, are
no longer at the mercy of the environment, and lose track of time.
You forget about you as an identity. As you close your eyes, the
input from the outside world is reduced, and your neocortex has
less to think about and analyze. As a result, the analytical mind
begins to become subdued, and electrical activity in the neocortex
quiets down.
Then when you restfully pay attention, concentrate, and focus
in a relaxed manner, you automatically activate the frontal lobe,
which reduces synaptic firing in the rest of the neocortex. There-
fore, you lower the volume to the circuits in the brain that process
time and space. This allows your brain waves to naturally slow
down to Alpha. Now you are moving from a state of survival into
a more creative state, and your brain naturally recalibrates itself to
a more orderly, coherent brain-wave pattern.
One of the later steps of meditation, if you keep practicing, is
to move into the Theta-wave frequency, when your body is asleep
but your mind is awake. This is a magical land. You are now in
a deeper system of the subconscious and able to immediately
change those negative associations to more positive ones.
It’s important to remember that if you have conditioned the
body to become the mind and your body is somewhat asleep while
your mind is awake, you could say that there is no more resistance
from the body-mind. In Theta, the body is no longer in control,
and you are free to dream, change subconscious programs, and
finally create from a totally unobstructed place.
Once the body is no longer running the mind, the servant
is no longer the master and you are working in a realm of true
power. You are like a child again, entering the kingdom of heaven.
205
To Sleep, Perchance to Go Down,

Then Up, the Ladder . . . Naturally
When you go to sleep, you pass though the spectrum of brain-wave
states, from Beta to Alpha to Theta to Delta. Likewise, when you wake up
in the morning, you naturally rise from Delta to Theta to Alpha to Beta,
returning to conscious awareness. When you “come to your senses” from
the netherworld, you remember who you are, the problems in your life,
the person sleeping next to you, the house you own, where you live . . .
and presto! By association, you’re back in Beta as the same you.
Some people fall very quickly through these levels like a steel ball
dropping from the top of a building. Their bodies are so fatigued that
the natural progression down the ladder to the subconscious states
happens too rapidly.
Others cannot shift gears to naturally progress down the ladder
into sleep; they are hyperfocused on the cues in their lives that reinforce
their addictive mental and emotional states. They become insomniacs,
and may take drugs to chemically alter the brain and sedate the body.
Either way, sleep problems may indicate that the brain and the
mind are out of sync.
The Best Times to Meditate: Morning and Evening,

When the Door to the Subconscious Opens
As a result of normal daily changes in brain chemistry (al-

ternately, the brain produces serotonin, primarily a daytime neu-
rotransmitter that makes you alert; and melatonin, the nighttime
neurotransmitter that begins to relax you for sleep), there are two
times when the door to the subconscious mind opens—when you
go to bed at night and when you wake up in the morning. So it is
a good idea to meditate in the morning or evening, because it will
be easier to slip into a state of Alpha or Theta.
I like to wake up early to begin the process, because while I’m
still a bit dreamy, I’m still in Alpha. I personally like to create from
a clean slate.
Others prefer the late evening. They know that the body (which
was in control during the day) is now too tired to “be” the mind.
206
They can create without any effort by drawing out the Alpha phase,
and even entering into Theta, while they are still awake.
Meditation during the middle of the day might be difficult,
especially if you work in a busy office, manage a houseful of kids
who demand your undivided attention, or are involved in ac-
tivities that require heightened concentration. At such times you
might be in middle to high Beta, and it may take more effort to
slip through the door.
Figure 8J. This diagram shows how our brain-wave functions move from the highest
and fastest state of activity (Beta) to the lowest and slowest (Delta). Please take note
that Alpha serves as the bridge between the conscious mind and the subconscious
mind. The lower/slower the brain waves, the more we are in the subconscious mind;
the higher/faster the brain waves, the more we are in the conscious mind.
207
Taking Control of the Progression into Meditation
Inward contemplative practices retrain the mind, body, and

brain to become present, instead of being stressed in anticipation
of some future event you are obsessing about. Meditation also lifts
the anchor of the body-mind out of the past and frees you from
the emotions that keep you hooked to the same familiar life.
The object in meditation is to fall like a feather down from the
top of a building, slowly and steadily. You first train yourself to let
your body initially relax, but keep your mind focused. Once you
begin to master the skill, the ultimate goal is to let your body fall
asleep while your mind stays awake or active.
Here is the progression. If waking consciousness is Beta (from low
to high, depending on your levels of stress), once you sit up straight
to keep your spine erect, close your eyes, take a series of conscious
breaths, and go inward, you will naturally switch from the sympa-
thetic nervous system to the parasympathetic nervous system. You
will change your physiology from the emergency protection system
(fight/fright/flight) to the internal protection system for long-term
building projects (growth and repair). As the body relaxes, your
brain-wave patterns will naturally begin to move to Alpha.
If done properly, meditation will shift your brain to a more
coherent and orderly wave pattern. You will go from focusing on
the Big Three to becoming no body, no thing, and no time. Now you
begin to feel connected, whole, and balanced; and you experience
healthier, elevated emotions of trust, joy, and inspiration.
Orchestrating for Coherence
If our definition of mind is the brain in action or the brain’s activ-

ity when it processes different streams of consciousness, then medita-
tion naturally produces more synchronized, coherent states of mind.4
On the other hand, when the brain is stressed, its electrical
activity will be like an entire orchestra of musical instruments
playing badly. The mind will be out of rhythm, out of balance,
and out of tune.
208
Your job is to play a masterpiece. If you persist with this band

of disorderly, egocentric, self-important members who think that
their individual musical instruments need to be heard above all
others—and if you insist that they work together and follow your
lead—there will come a moment when they will surrender to you
as their leader and will act as a team.
This is the moment when brain waves become more synchronized,
moving from Beta into Alpha and Theta. More individual circuits start
communicating in an orderly fashion and process a more coherent
mind. Your awareness shifts from narrow-minded, overfocused, obses-
sive, compartmentalized, survival thinking to thoughts that are more
open, relaxed, holistic, present, orderly, creative, and simple. This is the
natural state of being we are supposed to live by.
Take a look at coherence or what is also called synchrony, the
state when the brain is working in harmony. Think of it like this:
What syncs together, links together.
Figure 8K. In the first picture, the brain is balanced and highly integrated. Sev-
eral different areas are synchronized, forming a more orderly, holistic commu-
nity of neural networks working together. In the second picture, this brain
is disorderly and imbalanced. Many diverse compartments are no longer
working as a team, and thus the brain is “dis-eased” and disintegrated.
209
The Coherent Brain Sets the Stage for Healing
This orderly, new, synchronized signal to the body from the

brain organizes all of the diverse systems into homeostasis—the
cardiovascular system, digestive system, immune system, and
so on all move into coherence as well. As the nervous system
recalibrates itself, all of the enormous energy that was needed for
survival can now be used for creation. The body begins to heal.
For example, Jose, a man at one of my lectures, told me about
one of his first times doing a meditation back in his 20s. In those
days, he’d had ten olive-sized warts on his left hand. He was so
embarrassed by them that he often hid that hand in his pocket.
One day someone gave Jose a book on meditation. The book
instructed him to simply focus on his breath and allow his mind to
expand beyond the barriers of his body. One night before bed, he
decided to try the process. In a matter of moments he went from an
overfocused, contracted state to a more expanded, open, focused
state. As he vacated his familiar personality and became something
other than his typical thoughts and feelings, he went from the ha-
bitual random thought patterns driven by the familiar ego to a more
expanded sense of self. When this occurred, something shifted.
The next morning when Jose woke up, all ten warts had
completely vanished. Shocked and overjoyed, he looked under the
sheets for evidence of them, but found nothing. He explained that
he didn’t know where the warts went. I told him that they returned
to the quantum field where they came from. I suggested to him that
the universal intelligence that keeps order in his body naturally
had done what it always does—create more order to reflect a more
coherent mind. When his new subjective, coherent mind matched
the objective, coherent higher mind, that greater power within did
the healing for him.
All of this happened because when he got out of the way and
became no body, no thing, outside time—when he forgot about
himself—his focus went from sustained disorder to sustained order
. . . survival to creation . . . contraction to expansion . . . incoherence
210
to coherence. Then the unlimited consciousness restored order in

his body, and he was healed.
Meditation Plus Action: One Woman’s Path Out of Lack
At my workshops, I frequently ask participants to share their

surprising stories of life changes. Monique, a therapist from Mon-
treal, Quebec, recently described her own remarkable experience.
For most of her adult life, Monique had lived unconsciously in
a near-constant state of lack. Not enough money. Not enough en-
ergy. Not enough time to do the things she wanted. Now she was
going through a particularly rough patch: her office rent had risen
considerably (her house couldn’t accommodate an office), she and
her husband couldn’t afford to send their son to the college of his
choice, their washer needed replacing, and the shaky economy
had forced several clients to stop seeing her.
One day, while doing the meditation you will learn in this
book and pondering her life choices, Monique realized that she
couldn’t keep doing what she normally did—hunker down and
weather the storm with a pseudopositive, woe-is-me-but-things-
could-be-worse mentality. She recognized that she’d always made
decisions or sought solutions to problems from a perspective of
lack—lack of time, of money, and of energy. She had memorized
that state of being; lack became her personality. The epitome of
inertia, she tended to “let the chips fall where they may.” Ironical-
ly, Monique had worked with her clients to overcome these very
traits, and to be more proactive and less reactive.
With great resolve, she decided to change her personality. No
longer would she let life trample her and allow things to just hap-
pen to her.
Next, Monique created a template of who she wanted to
be, how she wanted to think, and what she wanted to feel. She
imagined herself as a woman who made all of her choices with
an abundance of energy, time, and money. Most important, her
goal to become this person was as firm as her vision was precise.
211
She knew who she no longer wanted to be; and she had definitive
plans for how her new self would think, feel, and behave.
When we make a decision that strongly and have a clear inten-
tion for what our new reality will be like, the clarity and coher-
ence of those thoughts produces corresponding emotions. As a
result, our internal chemistry changes, our neurological makeup is
altered (we prune old synaptic connections and sprout new ones),
and we even express our genetic code differently.
Monique began to live her life from the perspective of some-
one who had plenty of money, who had abundant energy, and
whose every need was met. She felt wonderful. Certainly, not all
the problems from her catalog of worries went away, but she was
becoming better at living from a different mind-set.
Several weeks after making that firm decision, Monique was
working with her last client of the day. This woman, who had
grown up in France, reminisced how every month, her parents
had purchased a ticket in the French lottery, a tradition that she
had continued.
As Monique drove home that evening, she wasn’t thinking
about the lottery. She’d never played it, believing that with her
limited financial resources, such an expenditure was frivolous.
Stopping for gas, she went inside to pay, and there on the counter
were lottery cards for various games. On impulse, recognizing that
the new Monique who lived in abundance could afford to take a
chance on winning, she purchased a ticket.
By the time Monique had stopped at a local pizzeria for a
carryout dinner and arrived home, the lottery had slipped her
mind. Grabbing the pizza, she discovered that some grease had
soaked through the box, stuck to the lottery card, and stained the
passenger seat. She set the box on the dining table, with the ticket
alongside it. She told her family to start eating without her and
that she’d be in the garage tending to the grease stain. While she
was scrubbing away, her husband came running out.
“You won’t believe it! Your lottery ticket was a winner!”
Now, you’ll recall that when the quantum field responds, it
does so in a way that one couldn’t predict. Perhaps you are think-
ing, Of course she won millions and lived happily ever after.
212
Not exactly.
Monique won $53,000. Was she happy? Astounded is more
like it. The couple owed exactly $53,000 in credit-card and auto-
loan debt.
Monique relayed her excitement in telling us that story, but
she slyly admitted that next time, instead of holding the intention
that all her needs were met, she’d choose to imagine they were
met—and then some.
}}}
What Monique’s story illustrates is the power of creating a new

state of being. She couldn’t do that just by imagining that she was
a new person; she had to put that new self into action. The old
Monique wouldn’t have bought a lottery ticket; her new personality
aligned her behavior to match her objective, and the field responded
in an entirely unexpected yet perfectly appropriate way.
Because Monique developed a new personality who seized
opportunities and acted differently, she experienced new and
better results in her life. New personality, new personal reality.
You don’t have to win the lottery to change your life, of
course. But you do have to make the decision to stop being your
old self, enter into the operating system where those unconscious
programs exist, and then formulate a clear design for a new one.
The Coherent Brain: Takin’ It to the Streets
Before I wrap up this chapter, I want to bring up a subject

I referenced in Evolve Your Brain—namely, Buddhist monks who
were studied at the University of Wisconsin at Madison. These
“super-meditators” could go into a state of coherent brain waves
well beyond what most of us are capable of. When they meditated
on thoughts of loving-kindness and compassion, the coherence of
the signal they were putting out was nearly off the charts.
Every morning during the study, they meditated while re-
searchers monitored their brain-wave activity. After that, they
were sent out onto the campus and into the town to do what they
213
wished—visit museums, go to shops, or what have you. After they

returned to the research center, they underwent brain scans again
without first going back into meditation. Amazingly, despite not medi-
tating throughout the day, and being subjected to the incoherent,
chaotic signals that the external world exposes us all to, they main-
tained the same coherent brain pattern they had achieved in medi-
tation.5
Most of us, when faced with the profusion and confusion of
stimuli that the external world produces, retreat into survival mode
and manufacture the chemicals of stress. Those stress reactions are
like disruptors that scramble the brain’s signals. Instead, our goal is
to become more like those monks. If we can produce coherent sig-
nal patterns—those synchronous waves—every day, we’ll find that
this coherence of signal manifests into something tangible.
In time, if you can repeatedly create internal coherence like
those monks did, you too may walk into the external environment
and no longer suffer the self-limiting effects of its disruptive
stimuli. And because of that, you won’t experience the knee-jerk
reactions that formerly forced you to return to the old, familiar
self that you are so eager to change.
By persisting with meditation and creating coherence within,
you will not only remove a lot of the negative physical conditions
that plague your body, but you can also progress toward that
ideal self you’ve envisioned. Your inner coherence can counteract
negative reactionary emotional states and allow you to unmemorize
the behaviors, thoughts, and feelings that make them up.
Once you’ve gotten to a neutral/empty state, it is far easier
to engage a heightened one like compassion; it is easier to bring
in pure joy or love or gratitude or any of the elevated emotional
states. That’s true because those emotions are already profoundly
coherent. And when you’ve moved through the meditative process
and produce a brain-wave state that reflects this purity, then you
will begin to overcome the body, the environment, and time,
which once produced your self-limiting emotional states. They
will no longer control you; instead, you will control them.
214
Having Embodied Knowledge,

You Are Prepared for Experience
You have now equipped yourself with the knowledge neces-

sary to move on to the meditation discussed in Part III, with full
understanding of what you will be doing and why.
Remember that knowledge is the forerunner to experience. All
the information you have read has been put there to prepare you
for an experience. Once you learn to meditate and apply this to
your life, you should begin to see feedback. In the following sec-
tion you will learn how to put all of this into practice and begin to
make measurable changes in any area of your life.
I’m reminded of the two-stage journey that many climbers
make when they ascend Washington State’s Mount Rainier, the
highest volcano in the contiguous U.S. (14,410 feet). Leaving their
car at the Paradise Jackson Visitor Center (5,400 feet), they first
trek to Camp Muir (10,080 feet). Stopping at this base camp af-
fords them the opportunity to look back at all the ground they’ve
covered, assess what they learned from the preparation and expe-
rience of that hike, receive additional practical training, and rest
overnight. This overview can make all the difference when they
continue on to undertake the climb to Rainier’s majestic peak.
The knowledge you’ve gained has allowed you to ascend to
this point. Now you’re ready to apply everything you’ve learned.
And your newfound wisdom should inspire you to forge ahead to
Part III, where you can master the skills to change your mind, and
thus your life.
So I invite you to pause briefly, take a look back with apprecia-
tion for the information you acquired in Parts I and II, and if you
need to, review any areas you may feel are important . . . then join
me as you make your final preparation for the meditative journey
to your own personal summit.
}}}}
215
PA R T I I I
STEPPING
TOWARD YOUR
NEW DESTINY
CHAPTER NINE
MEDITATIVE
THE
PROCESS:
INTRODUCTION
AND PREPAR ATION
As I stated earlier, the main purpose of meditating is to remove

your attention from the environment, your body, and the pas-
sage of time so that what you intend, what you think, becomes
your focus instead of these externals. You can then change your
internal state independent of the outside world. Meditating is also
a means for you to move beyond your analytical mind so that
you can access your subconscious mind. That’s crucial, since the
subconscious is where all your bad habits and behaviors that you
want to change reside.
Introduction
All the information you have received up to this point has

been intended to help you understand what you will be doing
in this section, as you learn how to use the meditative process to
219
create a new reality. And once you comprehend and repeatedly

execute the “how-to” steps presented here, you can then work on
anything that you want to change in your life. Remind yourself
often that in taking the steps to change, you are pruning away
the habit of being yourself so that you can create a new mind for
your new future. When I do the process you are about to learn, I
want to lose myself in consciousness, dissociate from my known
reality, and be devoid of the thoughts and feelings that define me
as the old self.
In the beginning, the newness of the task you are undertaking
might cause you to feel unsettled or uncomfortable. That’s okay.
It’s just your body, which has become your mind, resisting the
new training process. Understand this before you initiate your dis-
cipline, and relax—each step is designed to be easy to understand
and simple to follow. Personally, I look forward to my meditation
practice as much as anything I do. I find such order, peace, clarity,
and inspiration that I rarely miss a day. It took some time for me
to arrive at this relationship, so please be patient with yourself.
Turning Small Steps into One Easy Habit
Whenever you’ve learned anything new that required your

full attention and committed practice, you probably followed spe-
cific steps during your initial instruction. This makes it easier to
break down the complexities of the skill or task at hand so that
the mind can stay focused without being overwhelmed. In any
endeavor, of course, your goal is to memorize what you’re learning
so that eventually you can do it naturally, effortlessly, and subcon-
sciously. Essentially, you want to make this new skill a habit.
It’s easier to comprehend and execute any new skill when by
repetition, you master one small task or procedure at a time and
then move on to the next. Over time you string each step together
as part of one coordinated process. The sign that you’re on your
way is when all the steps start to look like one easy, fluid motion
and you produce the intended result. That’s your aim in learning
this meditation as a step-by-step process.
220
The Meditative Process: Introduction and Preparation
For example, in learning to hit a golf ball, there are a host of

cues that your mind has to process in order to have your actions
match your intention. Imagine that while you’re preparing to tee
off for the first time, your best friend shouts, “Keep your head
down! Bend your knees! Shoulders square and back erect! Keep
your front arm straight, but loosen your grip! Shift your weight
when you swing! Hit behind the ball, and follow through!” And
my favorite: “Relax!”
All these instructions at once could throw you into a state of
paralysis. What if, instead, you worked on one thing at a time,
following a methodical order? In time, it seems logical that your
swing would look like one motion.
Similarly, if you were learning to cook a French recipe, you
would start by following its individual steps. Do that enough times,
and there would come a moment when you no longer would pre-
pare the recipe as separate steps, but as one continuous process. You
would integrate the instructions into your body-mind, merge many
steps into just a few, and eventually, cook the meal in half the time.
You’d go from thinking to doing—your body memorizes what you
were doing, as well as your mind—and you’d be a cook. That’s what
a procedural memory is. This phenomenon occurs when you do
anything long enough. You begin to know that you know how.
Building a Neural Network for Meditation
Remember that the more knowledge you have, the better pre-
pared you are for a new experience. Every meditation step you
practice will have a meaning to you based on what you learned
earlier in this book; each one is based on a scientific or philosophi-
cal understanding so that nothing is left to conjecture. The steps
are presented in a specific order designed to help you memorize
this process for personal change.
Although I have mapped out a suggested four-week program
for you to learn the entire process, please take as much time as you
need to practice each step until it becomes familiar. The best pace
to set is one that is comfortable, so you never feel overwhelmed.
221
You will begin every session by doing the previous steps you
learned, then practice the new material for that week. Because it’s
more effective to learn some steps together, some weeks will call
for you to practice two or more new steps. Also, I recommend that
you practice each new mindful step, or group of steps, for at least
a week before you move on to the next ones. In a few weeks, you’ll
build quite a neural network for meditation!
Suggested Four-Week Program
Week One (Chapter 10): Every day, do STEP 1:

Induction.
Week Two (Chapter 11): Start every daily session by once

again practicing the first step;
then add STEP 2: Recognizing,
STEP 3: Admitting and Declar-
ing, and STEP 4: Surrendering.
Week Three (Chapter 12): Start every daily session by prac-

ticing STEPS 1 through 4, then add
STEP 5: Observing and Remind-
ing and STEP 6: Redirecting.
Week Four (Chapter 13): Start every daily session by prac-

ticing STEPS 1 through 6, then add
STEP 7: Creating and Rehearsing.
Please take your time and build a strong foundation. If you are
already an experienced meditator and want to do more at once,
that’s fine, but work at following all the instructions and commit-
ting what you will be doing to memory.
When you can concentrate on what you’re doing without let-
ting your thoughts wander to any extraneous stimuli, you will
come to a point when your body actually aligns with your mind.
Now your new skill will become easier and easier to do, thanks to
222
Hebb’s law of firing and wiring. The ingredients of learning, atten-

tion, instruction, and repetitive practice will develop an associated
neural network to reflect your intentions.
Preparation
Preparing Your Tools
The write stuff. Separately from your meditation sessions,

you will read some descriptive text about each step, often accom-
panied by questions and prompts under the heading “Opportu-
nity to Write.” I recommend that you keep a notebook handy to
write down your answers. Then review your responses before you
go into each day’s meditation. That way, your written thoughts
can serve as a road map to prepare you to navigate through the
meditative procedures in which you will access the operating sys-
tem of your subconscious.
Listen up. When you are first learning the meditation steps,
you may want to listen to prerecorded guided sessions. For ex-
ample, you will learn an induction technique that you will use
in every one of your daily sessions, to help you reach the highly
coherent Alpha brain-wave state in preparation for the approach
that is the focus of Chapters 11 to 13. In addition, the steps you
are to learn each week are available for you to follow in a series of
guided meditations.
223
Two Approaches to the Meditation

Meditation Option 1: Wherever you see this headphone icon . . .
. . . guided meditations are available. To listen to these guided sessions,

you can download them for a small fee from www.drjoedispenza
.com and either play them in MP3 format or burn them onto a CD.
Audio CDs are available for purchase on the website as well.
After you read each chapter, then journal your responses in a
notebook, you can listen to the corresponding meditation. Each week, as
you add the next step or steps to those you practiced the previous week,
you can add the next related meditation the following week.
For example, when you hear the Week Two meditation, it will lead
you through the Week One step—which is an induction technique—
then will add the three steps you will practice for Week Two. When you
do the Week Three meditation, you will repeat the steps you learned in
Weeks One and Two, then add the steps for Week Three.
For more information about the meditations, please visit my website.
Meditation Option 2: Alternatively, scripts for these guided

sessions are included in the Appendices so that you can read them until
you memorize the sequence, or dictate them into a recording device.
Appendices A and B provide two techniques for the induction.
Appendix C is the script for the entire meditation, encompassing all of
the steps you will learn in Part III. If you decide to use the Appendix C
script to guide your meditation, then each week, please start with the
steps you learned in previous weeks, then build on them by doing that
week’s meditation.
224
Preparing Your Environment
Location, location, location. You have learned that overcom-

ing your environment is a critical step in breaking the habit of
being yourself. Finding the right environment in which to medi-
tate, one with a minimum of distractions, will really give you a
leg up on defeating the first of the Big Three (we’ll cover the other
two, the body and time, in a moment). Pick a comfortable place
where you can be alone and not be seduced by the addiction of
the external world. Make it secluded, private, and easily accessible.
Go to this place every day, and make it your special location. You
will form a strong connection with this setting. It will represent
where you frequent to tame the distracted ego, overcome the old
self, create a new self, and forge a new destiny. In time you will
truly look forward to being there.
A participant in one event I led told me that she always fell
asleep when she meditated. Our conversation went like this:
“Where do you practice your mindfulness training?”
“In bed.”
“What does the law of association say about your bed and
sleep?”
“I associate my bed with sleep.”
“What does the law of repetition demonstrate about sleeping
in your bed every night?”
“If I sleep in the same place nightly, I am hardwiring an as-
sociation of bed with sleep.”
“Given the fact that neural networks are formed by combin-
ing the law of association with the law of repetition, might you
have formed a neural network to the effect that bed means sleep?
And since neural networks are automatic programs that we uncon-
sciously use every day, does it stand to reason that when you are
on your bed, your body (as the mind) will tell you to automatically
and unconsciously fall into oblivion?”
“Yep. I guess I need a better place to meditate!”
Not only did I suggest that she stay out of bed when she
meditates, but that she find a different place separate from her
225
bedroom. When you want to build a new neural network, it makes

good sense to do your mindfulness practices in a setting that rep-
resents growth, regeneration, and a new future.
And please, do not see this location as a torture chamber in
which you have to meditate. This type of attitude will undermine
your efforts.
Preventing distractions from your environment. Make sure

you won’t be interrupted or distracted by people (a DO NOT DIS-
TURB sign can help) or pets. As much as possible, eliminate sensory
stimuli that could force your mind back to your old personality or
to awareness of the external world, especially to elements of your
familiar environment. Turn off your phone and computer; I know
it’s hard, but those calls, texts, tweets, IMs, and e-mails can wait.
You also don’t want the aroma of coffee brewing or food cooking
to waft into your meditation setting. Ensure that the room is a
comfortable temperature, with no drafts. I usually use a blindfold.
Music. Music can be useful as long as you don’t play selections

that will bring to mind distracting associations. If I play music, I
typically use soft, relaxing, trance-inducing instrumentals or chants
without lyrics. When not listening to music, I often put in earplugs.
Preparing Your Body
Position, position, position. I sit up very straight. My back

is totally vertical, my neck is erect, my arms and legs are rest-
ing poised and still, and my body is relaxed. What about using
a recliner? Just as with sitting in bed, many people fall asleep in
recliners. Sitting upright in a regular chair, limbs uncrossed, is
best. If you prefer to sit on the ground and cross your legs “Indian-
style,” that’s fine, too.
Preventing bodily distractions. In effect, you want to “put

the body away” so that you can focus without needing to pay
it any attention. For example, use the restroom. Dress in loose
226
clothes, remove your watch, drink a little water, and have more
within reach. Take care of any hunger pangs before you begin.
Head nodding vs. nodding off. Since we’re talking about the
body, let me address an issue that may come up in your own medi-
tation practice. Although you are sitting upright, you may find
your head nodding as though you are about to fall asleep. This is
a good sign: you are moving into the Alpha and Theta brain-wave
states. Your body is used to lying down when your brain waves
slow down. When you suddenly “nod” like this, your body wants
to doze off. With continued practice, you’ll become accustomed to
your brain slowing down while you sit upright. The head nodding
will eventually stop, and your body won’t tend to fall asleep.
Making Time to Meditate
When to meditate. As you know, daily changes in brain chem-

istry result in easier access to the subconscious mind just after you
wake up in the morning and before you go to bed at night. These
are the best times to meditate because you can more readily slip
into the Alpha or Theta states. I prefer to meditate around the
same time every morning. If you are really enthusiastic and would
like to meditate at both these times of day, go for it. However, I
suggest that folks just starting out do so once daily.
How long to meditate. Take a few minutes before each day’s

meditation session to review any writing you have done in connec-
tion with the steps you are about to practice—as I said, think of these
notes as your road map to the journey you are about to take. You may
also find it helpful to reread portions of the text—to remind you of
what you’re about to do—before you go into meditation.
While you’re learning the process, every session will start with
10 to 20 minutes for induction. As you add steps, your time frame
should lengthen by about 10 to 15 minutes per step. Over time,
you will move more rapidly through the steps with which you are
already familiar. By the time you learn how to do all those in this
227
process, your daily meditation (including induction) will gener-

ally take 40 to 60 minutes.
If you need to finish by a certain time, set a timer to go off
ten minutes before you must end your session. That will give you
a “heads-up” to complete the session, rather than having to stop
abruptly without bringing what you were doing to a close. And set
aside enough time to meditate so that the clock doesn’t become a
concern. After all, if you are meditating and find yourself think-
ing about your watch, you haven’t overcome time. Essentially, you
may have to wake up earlier or go to bed later in order to carve out
a slot in your day.
Preparing Your State of Mind
Mastering the ego. To be honest, I do have those days where I

battle my ego tooth and nail, since it wants to be in control. Some
mornings as I begin the process, my analytical mind starts think-
ing about flights to catch, meetings with staff, injured patients, re-
ports and articles I need to write, my kids and their complexities,
phone calls I have to make, and random thoughts from nowhere
that pop into my head. I’m obsessing about everything predict-
able in my external life. Typically, my mind, like most people’s, is
either anticipating the future or remembering the past. When that
occurs, I have to settle down and realize that those are all known
associations that have nothing to do with creating something new
in the present moment. If this happens to you, it is your job to go
beyond the tedium of normal thinking and enter into the creative
moment.
Mastering the body. If your body bucks like an unbridled stal-

lion because it wants to be the mind—to get up and do something,
think about someplace it has to go in the future, or remember a
past emotional experience with some person in your life—you must
settle it down into the present moment and relax it. Every time
you do, you are reconditioning your body to a new mind, and
in time, it will acquiesce. It was conditioned by an unconscious
228
mind, and it has to be retrained by you—so love it, work with it,
and be kind to it. It will ultimately surrender to you as its master.
Remember to be determined, persistent, excited, joyful, flexible,
and inspired. When you do so, you are reaching for the hand of
the divine.
Now let’s begin. . . .
}}}}
229
CHAPTER TEN
OPEN THE DOOR TO

YOUR CREATIVE STATE
(Week One)
At an early point in my professional career, I learned about

and eventually taught hypnosis and self-hypnosis. One of the
techniques that hypnosis experts use to get individuals into a so-
called trance is called induction. Simply put, we teach people how
to change their brain waves. All someone has to do in order to be
hypnotized or to hypnotize him- or herself is to move down from
high- or mid-range Beta waves into a more relaxed Alpha or Theta
state. Thus, meditation and self-hypnosis are similar.
I could have included induction with the preparatory infor-
mation in the last chapter, because induction prepares you to
enter a coherent brain-wave state that is conducive to meditation.
By mastering induction, you will build a solid foundation for the
meditative practices you will learn in upcoming steps. However,
unlike those arrangements that you will make before you begin
each day’s meditation, such as turning off your phone and putting
your dog or cat in another room, induction is a step you will include
during the session—in fact, it must be the first step you master, and it
will lead off every session.
231
Just to head off any confusion, after opening each meditative

session with induction, you will not be in what the entertainment
industry misleadingly depicts as a hypnotic trance. You will be
perfectly primed and able to complete all steps in the process that
follows over the next three chapters.
STEP 1: INDUCTION
Induction: Open the Door to Your Creative State
I urge you to spend at least a week of daily sessions, or more

if needed, devoted to practicing induction. Remember that this
process will take up the first 20 minutes of every meditation ses-
sion. You want this to become a familiar and comfortable habit, so
don’t rush through it. Your objective is to “stay present.”
Preparation for induction. In addition to the aspects of prep-

aration I discussed earlier, here are some further tips: First, sit up
straight and close your eyes. As soon as you do so, blocking some
sensory/environmental input from coming in, your brain waves
lessen in frequency, moving toward that desirable Alpha state.
Then surrender, stay present, and love yourself enough to move
through this process. You may find that soothing music aids in
the progression from high Beta to Alpha, although it isn’t neces-
sary to use sounds.
Induction techniques. There are many similar variations on

induction techniques. Whether you use either the Body-Part or
Water-Rising Induction, alternate them on different days, employ
some other method you’ve used in the past, or devise a different
one altogether isn’t important. What is important is that you
move from that analytical Beta state to the sensory state of Alpha,
and focus on the body, which is the subconscious mind and the
operating system, where you can then make the changes you want.
232
Open the Door to Your Creative State
Overview: Body-Part Induction
One induction technique may at first seem contradictory—

you’ll focus attention on your body and environment. Those are
two of the Big Three that you have to overcome, but in this case,
you’re in control of your thoughts about them.
Why is it desirable to focus on the body? Remember, it and the
subconscious mind are merged. So when we become acutely aware
of the body and sensations related to it, we enter the subconscious
mind. We’re in that operating system I’ve mentioned often. In-
duction is a tool that can be used to get into that system.
The cerebellum plays a role in proprioception (awareness of
how our bodies are positioned in space). So in this induction, as
you rest your awareness on different parts of your body in space
and the space around your body in space, you’re using your cer-
ebellum to perform this function. And since the cerebellum is the
seat of the subconscious mind, as you place your consciousness
on where your body is oriented in space, you access your sub-
conscious mind and bypass your thinking brain.
Moreover, induction shuts down the analytical mind by forcing
you into a sensing/feeling mode. Feelings are the language of the
body, which in turn is the subconscious mind, so induction allows
you to use the body’s natural language to interpret and change the
language of the operating system. In other words, if you’re sens-
ing or putting your awareness on different aspects of your body,
you would be thinking less, shifting your analytical thoughts from
past to future less, and broadening your focus more to encompass
a very different scope—not narrowly obsessive, but rather, creative
and open—and you would move from Beta to Alpha.
All of this happens as you move from that narrow-minded range
of attention to an expanded focus on the body and the space around
it. Buddhists refer to this as an open focus, occurring when brain waves
naturally become orderly and synchronized.1 Open focus produces
a new, powerfully coherent signal that allows parts of the brain that
were not communicating with other parts to now do so. That enables
you to produce an extremely coherent signal. While you can measure
that on a brain scan, more important is that you can feel the difference
in the clarity and focus of your thoughts, intentions, and feelings.
233
Body-Part Induction:
The How-to*
Specifically, you will focus on the location or orientation of

your body in space. For example, think about the location of your
head, starting at its top and gradually moving down. As the induc-
tion progresses from body part to body part, sense and become
aware of the space that each occupies. Also sense the density, the
weight (or heaviness), or the volume of space that it occupies. By
focusing your attention on your scalp, then next on your nose,
then your ears, and so on, moving down the body until you’ve fo-
cused on the bottoms of your feet, you will notice some changes.
This movement from part to part, and the emphasis on the spaces
within the spaces, is the key to this.
Next, become aware of the teardrop-shaped area surrounding
your body, and the space it takes up. When you can sense that area of
space around your body, your attention now is no longer on your body.
Now you are not your body, but something grander. This is how you
become less body and more mind—less particle, more energy.
Finally, become aware of the area that the room you are in oc-
cupies in space. Sense the volume that it fills. When you reach this
point, this is when the brain begins to change its disorderly wave
patterns to more balanced and orderly ones.
The Why
We can measure these differences in how you are thinking—

we can view your thought patterns on an EEG to see how you’ve
moved from Beta- to Alpha-wave activity. We’re not interested in
just getting you into an Alpha state of any kind, though; you want
to be in a highly coherent, organized Alpha. That’s why you will
concentrate first on your body and its orientation in space, then
move from those individual parts to the volume or perimeter of
space surrounding the body, and eventually focus your observa-
tion on the entire room. If you can sense that density of space, if
you can notice it and pay attention to it, you will naturally move
*
Condensed; see Appendix A for full version.
234
Open the Door to Your Creative State
from a state of thinking to feeling. When that happens, it’s impos-

sible to maintain the high-Beta state that characterizes the emer-
gency mode of survival and an overfocused condition.
Water-Rising Induction*
Another similar induction technique you can use is to imagine

water moving into the room where you are sitting, then gradually
rising. Observe (sense) the space in which the room is situated, and
the space that the water occupies. At first, the water would rise to
cover your feet; move up the shins to the knees; spill over them
and into your lap; move up your abdomen and chest, covering your
arms, rising to your neck . . . up past your chin, lips, and head . . .
until the water fills the entire room. While some people may not like
the idea of being covered completely by water, others find it sooth-
ingly warm and inviting.
WEEK ONE
GUIDE TO MEDITATION
As a reminder, during your Week One meditations, your job

is to practice the induction technique. If you record this induc-
tion yourself, make certain that you repeat the same questions
that I have provided in my guided-induction instructions in the
Appendices, with their emphasis on words and phrases such as
sense, notice, feel, become aware of, become conscious of, and attend
to. Also, words such as volume, density, perimeter of space, weight of
space, and so forth will help you focus your observation.
*
Condensed; see Appendix B for full version.
235
Instead of moving quickly from one part to another, allow

some time to pass (a good 20 to 30 seconds or more) for those
sensory inputs and the feelings of those parts in space to really
settle in. Roughly, allow about 20 minutes to do the Body-Part
Induction from head to toe, or in the case of the water immersion,
from toe to head. If you have meditated before, you will no doubt
understand that eventually you lose any sense of time passing as
your brain waves diminish in frequency and you move into that
calm and relaxed Alpha state where the inner world is more real
than the outer world.
}}}}
236
CHAPTER ELEVEN
PRUNE AWAY THE HABIT

OF BEING YOURSELF
(Week Two)
During Week Two, it’s time to add three steps in pruning away
the habit of being yourself: recognizing, then admitting and declar-
ing, followed by surrendering. First, read through all these steps and
answer the related questions. Then devote at least a week to daily
meditation sessions in which you first go into induction, then
move through the three steps. Of course, if you need more than
one week to feel competent at all this, that’s fine.
STEP 2: RECOGNIZING
Recognizing: Identify the Problem
The first move necessary in fixing anything is to understand

what is presently not working. You have to know what the prob-
lem is and then name it in order to have power over it.
Many people who have had a near-death experience report
that they underwent a “life review” in which they saw, as if watch-
ing a movie, all of their covert and overt actions, their expressed
237
and suppressed sentiments, their public and private thoughts, and

their conscious and unconscious attitudes. They saw who they
were and how their thoughts, words, and deeds affected everyone
and everything in their lives. Afterward, they typically describe
having a greater understanding about themselves and a desire to
do a better job of living from then on. And as a result, they per-
ceive new possibilities and better ways “to be” in any opportunity.
Having seen themselves from a truly objective point of view, they
clearly know what they want to change.
Recognition is like having a life review every day. Since you
have all of the equipment in your brain to notice who you are
being, why not do this before you die, and, in effect, be reborn
in the same life? With practice, this type of awareness can help
you override what would otherwise be the predetermined destiny
of your brain and body—the automatic, enslaving hardwired pro-
grams of the mind and the memorized emotions that have chemi-
cally conditioned the body.
Only when you are truly conscious and aware do you begin
to wake up from the dream. To become still, quiet, patient, and
relaxed, and then be attentive to the habits of the old-personality
self, disengages your subjective consciousness from overutilized
attitudes and extreme emotional states. You no longer are the
same mind, because you are now freeing yourself from the chains
of the self-centered nature of the ego lost in itself. And when you
see who you have been, by means of the observer’s watchful eye,
you will crave life more, because you will truly desire to make a
greater difference the next day.
As you develop the skills of contemplation and self- observation,
you are cultivating the ability to separate your consciousness from
the subconscious programs that have defined the old self. To move
your consciousness from being the old self to being the observer
of the old self loosens the connection to the old you. And as you
recognize who you have been through the skill of metacognition
(your ability via the frontal lobe to observe who you are being),
for the first time your consciousness is no longer immersed in
238
Prune Away the Habit of Being Yourself
unconscious programs; you are becoming conscious of what was

once unconscious. This is making the first strides toward personal
change.
Begin Your Own Life Review
In order to discover and explore aspects of the old self that

you want to change, it is necessary to pose some “frontal lobe”
questions.
Opportunity to Write
Take some time to ask yourself questions such as these, or any
others that occur to you, and write down your answers:
• What kind of person have I been?

• What type of person do I present to the world? (What is
one side of my “gap” like?)
• What kind of person am I really like inside? (What is the
other side of my “gap” like?)
• Is there a feeling that I experience—even struggle with—
over and over again, every day?
• How would my closest friends and family describe me?
• Is there something about myself that I hide from others?
• What part of my personality do I need to work on
improving?
• What is one thing I want to change about myself?
239
Choose an Emotion to Unmemorize
Next, choose one of your afflictive emotional states and lim-

ited states of mind (the following examples can help you get
started)—one of the habits of being yourself that you want to re-
linquish. Since memorized feelings condition the body to be the
mind, these self-limiting emotions are responsible for your auto-
matic thought processes, which create your attitudes, which influ-
ence your limited beliefs (about self in relationship to everyone or
everything), which contribute to your personal perceptions. Every
one of the emotions listed below originates from the chemicals of
survival, which strengthen the ego’s control.
Pick one emotion that is a big part of who you are (your
chosen emotion may be one that’s not listed below) and that you
want to unmemorize. Remember that this word has meaning to
you because it is a feeling that is familiar to you. It is one aspect
of the self that you want to change. I recommend that you write
down the emotion you came up with, because you will be work-
ing with it throughout this and later steps.
Examples of survival emotions:
Insecurity Shame Sadness

Hatred Anxiety Disgust
Judgment Regret Envy
Victimization Suffering Anger
Worry Frustration Resentment
Guilt Fear Unworthiness
Depression Greed Lack
240
Most people see these examples and say, “Can I pick more than
one?” It is important in the beginning to work with one emotion
at a time. In any case, they are all linked together neurologically
and chemically. For example, have you ever noticed that when
you’re angry, you’re frustrated; when you’re frustrated, you hate;
when you hate, you judge; when you judge, you’re envious; when
you’re envious, you’re insecure; when you’re insecure, you’re
competitive; when you’re competitive, you’re selfish? All of these
emotions are run by the same combined survival chemicals,
which then stimulate related states of mind.
On the other hand, the same is true for elevated states of mind
and emotion. When you’re joyous, you love; when you love, you
feel free; when you’re free, you’re inspired; when you’re inspired,
you’re creative; when you’re creative, you’re adventurous . . . and
so on. All of these feelings are driven by different chemicals that
then influence how you think and act.
Let’s use anger as an example of a recurring emotion you
might choose to work with. As you unmemorize anger, all of the
other self-limiting emotions will incrementally decrease within
you as well. If you become less angry, you’ll be less frustrated,
hateful, judgmental, envious, and so on.
The good news is that you are actually taming the body to
no longer run unconsciously as the mind. Consequently, as you
change one of these destructive emotional states, the body will be
less prone to live out of control, and you will change many other
personality traits.
241
Observe How the Unwanted Emotion

Feels in Your Body
Next, close your eyes and think about how you feel when you
experience that particular emotion. If you can observe yourself
overcome by that emotion, pay attention to how it feels in your
body. There are different sensations that correlate to different
emotions. I want you to become aware of all of those physical
signs. Do you become hot, irritated, jittery, weak, flushed, deflated,
tight? Scan your body with your mind and notice in what area you
feel that emotion. (If you do not feel anything in your body, that’s
okay; just remember what you want to change about yourself.
Your observation is changing it moment by moment.)
Now, become familiar with your body’s present state. Does
your breathing change? Do you feel impatient? Are you physically
in pain, and if so, if that pain had an emotion, what would it be?
Just notice what physiologically is happening in the moment and
don’t try to run from it. Be with it. The host of different feelings in
your body becomes an emotion when you name it as anger, fear,
sadness, or whatever the case may be. So let’s get down to all of
those feelings and physical sensations that create the emotion you
want to unmemorize.
Allow yourself to feel that emotion without being distracted
by anything or anyone. Don’t do anything or try to make it go
away. Almost everything you have done in your life has been to
run from this feeling. You used everything outside of you to try
to make it go away. Be present with your emotion and feel it as
energy in your body.
This emotion has motivated you to appropriate everything
you know in your environment to fashion an identity. Because of
this feeling, you created an ideal for the world instead of an ideal
for yourself.
This feeling is who you really are. Acknowledge it. It is one of
the many masks of your personality that you have memorized. It
started from an emotional reaction to an event in your life, which
242
lingered into a mood, which developed into a temperament, which

created your personality. This emotion has become the memory of
yourself. It speaks nothing about your future. Your attachment to
it means that you are mentally and physically bound by your past.
If emotions are the end product of experiences, then by em-
bracing the same emotion every day, the body is being fooled into
believing that your external world is staying the same. And if your
body is being conditioned to reexperience the same circumstances
in your environment, you can never evolve and change. As long
as you live by this emotion daily, you can only think in the past.
Define the State of Mind

Associated with the Emotion
Next, ask yourself this simple question: “How do I think when

I feel this way?”
Let’s say that you want to change anger as one of your person-
ality traits. Ask yourself, “What is my attitude when I feel anger?”
The answer might be controlling or hateful, or it might be self-
important. By the same means, if you want to overcome fear, you
might have to address the state of mind of feeling overwhelmed,
anxious, or desperate. Suffering might lead to feeling victimized,
depressed, lazy, resentful, or needy.
Now, become aware of or remember your thinking when you
feel this way. What is the state of mind that is powered by this
emotion? This feeling influences everything you do. States of
mind represent an attitude that is driven by the memorized feel-
ings subconsciously anchored in the body. An attitude is a series
of thoughts that are connected to a feeling, or vice versa. It is
the repetitive cycle of thinking and feeling, feeling and thinking.
Therefore, you need to define your neural habit that is influenced
by your particular emotional addiction.
243
Become aware of how you think (your state of mind) when you
are feeling the emotion you want to change. You may pick from the
list below, or add any that are not listed. Your selection will be based
on the unwanted emotion you identified previously, but it’s natural to
be in one or more limiting states of mind relating to that emotion. So
write down one or two that resonate with you, because you will work
with these in upcoming steps.
Examples of limiting states of mind:
Competitive Lacking Controlling

Overwhelmed Overly intellectual Deceptive
Complaining Self-important Conceited
Blaming Shy/timid/introverted Dramatic
Confused Needing recognition Rushing
Distracted Under-/overconfident Needy
Self-pitying Lazy Self-involved
Desperate Dishonest Sensitive/insensitive
Most of your behaviors, choices, and deeds are equal to this feeling.
Therefore, you will think and act in predictable, routine ways. There can be
no new future, just more of the same past. It’s time to remove the colored
lenses and no longer see life through a filter of the past. Your job is to be
with that emotional attitude without doing anything but observing it.
You’ve just identified an unwanted emotion and its corre-

sponding state of mind that you want to unmemorize. But remem-
ber that you still have a couple of steps to read through before you
integrate them all into your daily meditation. . . .
244
STEP 3: ADMITTING AND DECLARING
Admitting: Acknowledge Your True Self

Rather Than the Self You Show to Other People
Allowing yourself to be vulnerable, you move beyond the

realm of your senses and begin to introduce yourself to the uni-
versal consciousness that is the giver of your life. You develop a
relationship with this greater intelligence, telling it who you have
been and what you want to change about yourself, and admitting
what you have been hiding.
Owning up to who we really are and what our past mistakes
have been and asking to be accepted are among the most chal-
lenging things for us to do as humans. Think of how you felt as
a child when you had to fess up to your parents, a teacher, or a
friend. Have those feelings of guilt, shame, and anger changed
now that you’re an adult? Most likely you still experience them,
but maybe not as strongly.
What makes achieving Step 3 possible is knowing that we are
admitting our faults and failures to our higher power and not to
another similarly flawed human. As a result, when we admit to
ourselves and to that universal power, there is:
No punishment
No judgment
No manipulation
No emotional abandonment
No blame
No scorekeeping
No rejection
No loss of love
No damnation
No separation
No banishment
245
All of the preceding acts are derived from the old paradigm of
God, which has been shrunk to the likeness of an insecure man,
completely self-absorbed, steeped in the concepts of good and bad,
right and wrong, positive and negative, success and failure, love
and hate, heaven and hell, pain and pleasure, and fear and more
fear. This traditional model must be addressed, because one must
enter this consciousness with a new consciousness.
This enigma can be called innate intelligence, chi, divine mind, spir-
it, the quantum, the life force, infinite mind, the observer, universal intelli-
gence, the quantum field, invisible power, mother-father life, cosmic energy,
or higher power. Regardless of what name you give it, you must see this
energy as an unlimited source of power within you and around you,
which you utilize and create from throughout your life.
It is the consciousness of intent and the energy of uncondi-
tional love. It is impossible for it to judge, punish, threaten, or
banish anyone or anything because it would be doing those very
things to itself.
It only gives in love, compassion, and understanding. It already
knows everything about you (it’s you who has to make an effort to
know and develop a relationship with it). It has been observing you
from the moment you were created. You are an extension of it.
It only waits in hope, in admiration, and in patience . . . it
only wants you to be happy. And if you are happy being unhappy,
that’s fine, too. That’s how much it loves you.
This self-organizing invisible field is wise beyond comprehension
because it exists through an interconnected matrix of energy
that extends in all dimensions in space and time, past, present,
and future. It records the thoughts, desires, dreams, experiences,
wisdom, evolution, and knowledge from all of eternity. It is an
immense, immaterial, multidimensional field of information. It
“knows” much more than you and I do (even though we think we
know it all). Its energy can be likened to many levels of frequency;
and like radio waves, every frequency carries information. All of
life on a molecular level vibrates, breathes, dances, shimmers,
and is alive; it is completely receptive and malleable to our willful
intentions.
246
Let’s suppose you want joy in your life. So you ask the universe
for it every day. However, you’ve memorized suffering into such a
state of being that you whine all day long, you hold everyone re-
sponsible for the way you feel, you make excuses for yourself, and
you mope around constantly feeling sorry for yourself. Can you
see that you can declare joy all you want, but you are demonstrating
being a victim? Your mind and body are in opposition. You are
thinking a certain way one moment; then you are being some-
thing else the remainder of the day. Hence, can you humbly and
sincerely admit who you have been, what you have been hiding,
and what you want to change about yourself, so that you elimi-
nate unnecessary pain and suffering before you create the related
experiences in your reality? To vacate and lay down your familiar
personality for a brief period of time and knock on the door of the
infinite in a state of joy and reverence is so much more conducive
to change than allowing your personality to be fractured by your
insistent course of destiny, created by who you were repeatedly
“being.” Let’s change in joy instead of changing in pain.
Now, close your eyes and become still. Look into the vastness of
this mind (and into yourself) and begin to tell it who you have been.
Develop a relationship with the greater consciousness that is giving
you life, by honestly and inwardly talking to it. Share with it the details
of those stories that you have carried around with you. Writing down
what comes to you will be useful in later steps.
Examples of what you might admit

to your higher power:
• I am afraid of falling in love because it hurts too much.
• I pretend I am happy, but I am really suffering because I am
lonely.
• I do not want anyone to know that I feel so guilty, so I lie
about myself.
247
• I lie to people so that they like me and so I won’t feel so

unloved and unworthy.
• I can’t stop feeling self-pity. I think, act, and feel this way all
day long because I do not know how else I can feel.
• I have felt like a failure most of my life, so I try extra hard to
be a success.
Now, take a moment and review what you have written and what
you want to admit to this power.
Declaring: Outwardly Acknowledge

Your Self-Limiting Emotion
In this part of the meditation process, you actually speak out

loud who you have been and what you have been hiding about
yourself. You tell the truth about self, put the past to rest, and close
the gap between how you appear and who you really are. You give
up your façade and the constant effort of being someone else. By
declaring the truth about yourself out loud, you are breaking the
emotional ties, agreements, dependencies, attachments, bonds, and
addictions to all those external cues in your present life.
In the workshops that I conduct around the world, this is the
most difficult part of the steps. No one really wants anyone to
know who they really are. They want to maintain how they ap-
pear. However, as you have learned, it takes an enormous amount
of energy to keep up this ongoing image. This is the point where
you want to release that energy.
And remember: since emotions are energy in motion, every-
thing that you’ve experienced and interacted with in your external
life has an energetic emotion attached to it. Essentially, you are
bonded to some person, thing, or place by an energy that exists
beyond time and space. This is how you continually remember
yourself as an ego with a personality, identifying emotionally
with and being tied to everything in your familiar reality.
248
For example, if you hate someone, that hate keeps you emo-
tionally attached to the other person. Your emotional bond is the
energy that keeps this individual in your life so that you can feel
hate and thus reinforce one aspect of your personality. In other
words, you use that person to stay addicted to hatred. By the way,
it should be obvious by now that your hatred is primarily hurting
you. As you release chemicals from your brain to your body, you
truly hate yourself. To speak the truth about yourself out loud in
this step empowers you to become free from hatred and less con-
nected to the person or thing in your external reality that reminds
you of who you have been.
If you recall the gap discussed earlier, you know that most
people rely on the environment to remember themselves as a
“somebody.” Therefore, if you have memorized an emotion as part
of your personality and you are addicted to it, then when you de-
clare who you have been emotionally, you are calling energy back
(releasing it) to you from your emotional bonds with everything
and everyone in your life. This conscious statement by you will
free you from the old self.
In addition, by claiming your limitations and consciously
revealing what you have been hiding, you are freeing the body
from being the mind; and for that reason, you are closing the gap
between how you appear and who you really are. When you ver-
balize who you have been, you also liberate energy stored in your
body. This will become “free energy” for you to use later on in the
meditation to create a new self and life.
Bear in mind that your body will not want to do this very
readily. Your ego automatically hides this emotion because it
doesn’t want anyone to know the truth about itself. It wants to
remain in control. The servant has become the master. But the
master now must let the servant know that he or she has been
delinquent, unconscious, and absent. So it makes sense that your
body will not want to relinquish control, because it does not trust
you. But if you just open your mouth and speak out in spite of the
body’s control, it will begin to feel lighter and relieved, and you
will begin to be back in command.
249
This is how you define who you really are without any as-
sociations to your external environment. You are severing your
energetic bond to the emotional attachment of all of the elements
in the outer world. If admitting is an inner acknowledgment, then
declaration is an outward one.
What Is It That You Want to Declare?
It’s time to merge this part of Step 3 with the previous part.
Remember that you’re building this section into one fluid process.
Using the example of anger, you might say aloud, “I have been an
angry person my whole life.”
Remember the general aim of what you want to declare. In
this part of your meditation for the week, while you are sitting up
with eyes closed, you’ll open your mouth and softly say the emo-
tion that you are declaring: anger.
While you prepare yourself to do this and while you are en-
gaged in verbalizing your declaration, it probably will not feel
good to you. Do it anyway; that’s your body talking to you.
Your end result is that you are inspired, uplifted, and energized.
Make this step simple, easy, and lighthearted. Do not overanalyze
what you have done. Just know that the truth shall set you free.
}}}
Remember that you’re not ready to start your Week Two

meditations yet. In this section, you’ve recognized an unwanted
emotion and its corresponding state of mind that you want to
unmemorize, then you admitted it inwardly and declared it out-
wardly. There’s one more step to read, after which you can put all
four together in your Week Two meditation. . . .
250
STEP 4: SURRENDERING
Surrendering: Yield to a Greater Power and

Allow It to Resolve Your Limitations or Blocks
Surrendering is the final step in this section, in which you are

pruning away the habit of being yourself.
Most of us struggle with the idea of letting go, of allowing
someone or something else to have control. Keeping in mind
whom you are surrendering to—the Source, Infinite Wisdom—
should make this process go much easier.
Einstein said that no problem could be solved from the same
level of consciousness that created it. The limited state of mind of
your personality is responsible for creating your limitations, and
the answer has not come to you . . . so why not go to a grander,
more resourceful consciousness to help you overcome this facet of
yourself? Since all potentials exist in this infinite sea of possibili-
ties, you are humbly asking it to take your limitations from you in
a different way than the mode in which you have been trying to
resolve this issue. Since the best way to transform yourself has not
occurred to you and what you have been doing up to this point
to overcome the problems in your life has not worked out yet, it’s
time to contact a greater resource.
The consciousness of the ego could never see the solution. It
is steeped in the emotional energy of the dilemma; and therefore
it only thinks, acts, and feels equal to that mind. It only creates
more of the same.
Your change will be executed in a way that is unlimited from
the objective mind’s perspective. It sees you from the perspective
of not being you. It perceives potentials that you have not even
thought of because you were too busy being lost in the dream by
responding to life in predictable ways.
However, if you say that you have surrendered to the objective
consciousness’s assistance yet still try to do things your own way, can
you see that it is impossible for it to assist you in changing anything
in your life? By your own free will, you would thwart its efforts.
251
Most of us obstruct this mind because we go back to trying

to resolve our problems by living within the same unconscious,
habitual lifestyle. We get in our own way. In fact, most of us wait
until the ego is driven into the ground to the point that we can
no longer continue “business as usual.” This is when we usually
surrender and receive some type of aid.
You can’t both surrender and try to control the outcome. Sur-
render requires that you give up what you think you know from your
limited mind, especially your belief about how this problem in your
life should be taken care of. To truly surrender is to let go of the ego’s
control; trust in an outcome that you haven’t thought of yet; and
allow this all-knowing, loving intelligence to take over and provide
the best solution for you. You must come to the understanding that
this invisible power is real, is fully conscious of you, and can com-
pletely take care of any aspect of the personality. When you do, it will
organize your life in a way that is just right for you.
When you ask for help by simply releasing to a greater mind
the emotion you have admitted and declared, you won’t have to:
• Bargain
• Beg
• Make deals or promises
• Commit halfway
• Manipulate
• Weasel
• Ask for forgiveness
• Feel guilty or shameful
• Live with regrets
• Suffer from fear
• Provide excuses
Moreover, you won’t have to give your higher mind condi-

tions like “You should . . .” and “It would be better if . . .” You can’t
tell this unlimited grand essence how to go about anything. If you
252
do, you are back to trying to do things your way, and naturally it
will stop helping you so as to allow you your free will. Instead, can
your free will be “Thy will be done”?
Just surrender in . . .
• Sincerity
• Humility
• Honesty
• Certainty
• Clarity
• Passion
• Trust
. . . and then get out of the way.

Joyously give up the emotion you want to let go of to a more
expanded mind, and know that it will do this for you. When your
will matches its will, when your mind matches its mind, and when
your love of self matches its love for you . . . it answers the call.
The side effects of surrendering include:
• Inspiration
• Joy
• Love
• Freedom
• Awe
• Gratitude
• Exuberance
When you feel joy or live in a state of joy, you have already
accepted the future outcome that you want as a reality. When you
live as if your prayers have already been answered, this greater
mind can do what it does best by organizing your life in new and
unusual ways.
253
What if you knew that some issue facing you had been com-
pletely taken care of? What if you were certain that something
exciting or great was about to happen to you? If you knew it with-
out a doubt, there would be no worry, no sadness, no fear, and no
stress. You would be lifted. You would be looking forward to your
future.
If I told you that I was taking you to Hawaii in a week and
you knew that I was serious, wouldn’t you start to get happy in
anticipation? Your body would begin to physiologically respond
ahead of the actual experience. Well, the quantum mind is like a
big mirror—it reflects back to you what you accept and believe as
true. So your outer world is a reflection of your inner reality. The
most important synaptic connection you can make when it comes
to this mind is to know that it is real.
Think about how a placebo works. You know by now that we
have three brains that allow us to evolve from thinking to doing
to being. Often subjects with health issues who are given a sugar
pill that they think is medicine accept the thought that they are
going to get better, begin to act as if they are better, begin to feel
better, and finally are being better. And as a result, the subcon-
scious mind within them, which is connected to the universal
mind all around them, begins to change their internal chemistry
to mirror their new belief about their restored health. The same
principle applies here. Believe that the quantum mind will answer
your call and help you.
If you begin to doubt, become anxious, worry, get discour-
aged, or overanalyze how this assistance might happen, you have
undone everything that you originally accomplished. You got in
your own way. You blocked something greater from helping you.
Your emotions demonstrated that you disbelieved in quantum
possibilities, and therefore you lost your connection to the future
that the divine mind was orchestrating for you.
This is when you have to go back and reinstate a more power-
ful frame of mind. Talk to the quantum mind as if it knows you
very well and loves and cares for you . . . because it does.
254
In anticipation of this conversation, write down some things you
would like to say in your surrender statement.
Examples of surrender statements:

Universal mind within me, I forgive my worries, my
anxieties, and my small-minded concerns, and I give them
to you. I trust that you have the mind to resolve them much
better than I could. Arrange the players in my world so that
doors open for me.
Innate intelligence, I release my suffering and my self-
pity to you. I have mismanaged my inner thoughts and
actions for long enough. I allow you to intervene and pro-
vide a greater life in a way that is just right for me.
Prepare to surrender. Now close your eyes, and begin to be-

come familiar with what you want to say to this greater mind. Re-
view what you have written so that you can take your limitations
to it. The more present you are, the more focused you can become.
As you begin to inwardly recite your prayer, remember that this
invisible consciousness is watchful and aware of you; it notices
everything that you think, do, and feel.
Ask for help, and turn over your unwanted state of mind.
Next, ask the universal consciousness to take this part of you and
reorganize it into something greater. Once you do, then hand it
over to this higher mind. Some people mentally open a door and
pass it through, others hand it over in a note, while some place
it in a beautiful box, then let it dissolve into the higher mind. It
doesn’t matter what you imagine. I just simply let it go.
What matters is your intention—that you feel connected to
a very loving, universal consciousness, and that you begin to
255
become free from your old self with its help. The more purpose-
fully you are able to manage your thoughts and the more you can
feel the joy of being free from this condition, the more you are
matching a greater will, its mind, and its love.
Give thanks. Once you have completed your prayer, remember
to give thanks ahead of the manifestation. When you do, you are
sending a signal into the quantum field that your intention has
already come to fruition. Thankfulness is the supreme state of re-
ceivership.
WEEK TWO
GUIDE TO MEDITATION
Now you’re ready to do your Week Two meditation. Here’s a

suggested way to move through all the steps you’ve learned. If you
feel that you already did any of these actions while you were read-
ing and journaling, just go ahead and repeat them during your
meditations. You may be surprised by the results.
• Step 1: First, go through your induction technique

and continue to become more and more used to this
process to enter the subconscious mind.
• Step 2: Next, by becoming aware of what you want to
change about yourself in mind and body, “recognize”
your own limitations. That is, define a specific
emotion that you want to unmemorize and look at
the associated attitude that is driven by that feeling.
• Step 3: Continuing on, inwardly “admit” to a higher
power within you who you have been, what you want
to change about yourself, and what you have been
hiding. Then, outwardly “declare” what emotion
256
you are releasing so as to free the body from the

mind and break the bonds to the elements in your
environment.
• Step 4: Finally, “surrender” this self-limiting state to a
greater mind and ask that it be resolved in a way that
is right for you.
Practice these individual steps regularly during your sessions,

until they begin to become so familiar to you that they merge into
one smooth step. Then you will be ready to proceed on.
Keep in mind that as you continue to add steps to your medi-
tation process, you will always start by doing the series of four
intentional actions you just learned.
}}}}
257
C H A P T E R T W E LV E
DISM ANTLE THE

MEMORY OF THE
OLD YOU
(Week Three)
Once again, you will read through and perform your writing on
Steps 5 and 6 before you do your Week Three meditation sessions.
STEP 5: OBSERVING AND REMINDING
In this step, you observe the old self and remind yourself who
you no longer want to be.
Just like our working definition of meditation in Part II of
the book, to observe and remember is to become familiar with;
to cultivate the “self”; and to make known what is, in some way,
unknown. Here you will become completely conscious of (by ob-
serving) the specific unconscious or habitual thoughts and actions
that make up that state of mind and body that you named earlier,
in Step 2: Recognizing. Then you will remind yourself about (by
remembering) all of the aspects of the old self that you no longer
259
want to be. You will become familiar with yourself “being” the
old personality—the precise thoughts you no longer want to give
power to, and the exact behaviors you no longer want to engage
in—so you never fall back into being the old self. This frees you
from the past.
What you mentally rehearse and what you physically dem-
onstrate is who you are on a neurological level. The “neurological
you” is made up of the combination of your thinking and actions
on a moment-to-moment basis.
This step is designed to create greater awareness and a better
observation of who you have been (metacognition). As you reflect
and review your old self, you will get clear on who you no longer
want to be.
Observing: Become Conscious of Your

Habitual States of Mind
In Step 2: Recognizing, you have already observed the emo-

tion that drives you. Now I want you to become so familiar with
your specific thoughts and actions derived from the old sensations
that you can catch yourself while you live your life. With repeated
practice, you can become so aware of the old patterns that you
never allow them to manifest to fruition. The end result is that
you stay ahead of the old self so that you have control over it.
So when you start to notice the beginnings of the feeling that
normally drives your unconscious thoughts and habits unfolding
in your day, it has become so familiar to you that the slightest
inkling is now brought to your awareness.
As an example, if you are overcoming a dependency on some
substance such as sugar or tobacco, the more you are able to sense
when the pangs and tugs of the body’s chemical addiction begin,
the sooner you will be able to do battle against them. Everyone
knows when the cravings start to occur. You begin to notice im-
pulses, urges, and sometimes loud screams, which sound like,
“Just do it! Submit! Give in! Go ahead—just this one time!” As you
260
Dismantle the Memory of the Old You
continuously forge onward and upward, in time you can notice

when these cravings come up, and you will be better equipped to
handle them.
The same is true with personal change, except the substance
is not something that exists outside of you. In reality, it is you.
Your feelings and thoughts are actually a part of you. Neverthe-
less, your real objective here is to be so aware of the self-limiting
state of being that you would never let one thought or behavior go
unnoticed by you.
Almost all of what we demonstrate starts with a thought. But
just because you have a thought doesn’t necessarily mean it is
true. Most thoughts are just old circuits in your brain that have be-
come hardwired by your repetitive volition. Thus, you have to ask
yourself, “Is this thought true, or is it just what I think and believe
while I am feeling this way? If I act on this impulse, will it lead me
to the same result in my life?” The truth is, these are echoes from
your past that are connected to strong feelings, which activate old
circuits in your brain and cause you to react in predictable ways.
What automatic thoughts do you think when you feel that emo-
tion you identified in Step 2? It is important to write them down and
memorize the list. To help you recognize your own unique set of self-
limiting thoughts, you may find the following examples helpful.
Examples of limiting automatic thoughts

(your daily, unconscious mental rehearsal):
• I’ll never get a new job.

• No one ever listens to me.
• He always makes me feel angry.
• Everyone uses me.
• I want to call it quits.
261
• Today is a bad day for me, so why bother trying to change it.
• It’s her fault that my life is this way.
• I’m really not that smart.
• I honestly can’t change. Maybe it would be better to start
another time.
• I don’t feel like it.
• My life sucks.
• I hate my situation with ________.
• I’ll never make a difference. I can’t.
• ________ does not like me.
• I have to work harder than most people.
• It’s my genetics. I am just like my mother.
Just as with habitual thoughts, habitual actions also make up

your own unique undesirable states of mind. You are influenced
to behave in memorized ways by the very emotion that has condi-
tioned your body to be your mind. This is who you are when you
go unconscious. You start off with good intentions, and then you
find yourself sitting on the couch eating potato chips with the
remote control in one hand and a cigarette in the other. However,
just a few hours before, you proclaimed that you were going to get
in shape and stop all self-destructive behaviors.
Most unconscious actions are taken to emotionally reinforce
the personality and fulfill an addiction, in order to feel more of
the same way. For example, people who feel guilty on a daily basis
will have to perform certain actions to fulfill their emotional des-
tiny. Most certainly, they will get in trouble in life to feel more
guilt. Many unconscious actions match and thus satisfy who we
are emotionally.
On the other hand, many people exhibit certain habits in
order to temporarily make the feeling they have memorized go
262
away. They look for instant gratification from something outside

of them to momentarily free them from their pain and emptiness.
Being addicted to computer games, drugs, alcohol, food, gambling,
or shopping is used to resolve one’s inner pain and emptiness.
Your addictions create your habits. Since nothing that exists out-
side of you could ever resolve your emptiness on a permanent basis,
invariably you will have to do more of the same activity over again.
After the thrill or the rush wears off a few hours later, you will have
to return to the same addictive tendency once more, but do it longer.
However, when you unmemorize the negative emotion of your per-
sonality, you eliminate the destructive unconscious behavior.
Think about the unwanted emotion you identified. How do you
habitually act when you are feeling this way? You may recognize your
own patterns among the examples below, but be sure to add those
behaviors that are specific to you. Now, write down the unique ways
you behave when you feel that emotion.
Examples of limiting actions/behaviors

(your daily, unconscious physical rehearsal):
• Sulking
• Feeling sorry for yourself by sitting alone
• Eating away depression
• Calling someone to complain about how you feel
• Playing obsessively on the computer
• Picking a fight with someone you love
• Drinking too much and making a fool out of yourself
• Shopping and spending more than you have
• Procrastinating
• Gossiping or spreading rumors
263
• Lying about yourself

• Throwing a temper tantrum
• Treating fellow employees with disrespect
• Flirting with other people when you are married
• Bragging
• Yelling at everyone
• Gambling too much
• Driving aggressively
• Trying to be the center of attention
• Sleeping in every day
• Talking too much about the past
If you are having difficulty coming up with answers, ask your-

self what you think about during various situations in your life, and
inwardly “watch” how you think and respond. You can also inwardly
“look through the eyes” of other people. How would they say they see
you? How do you act?
Reminding: Recall the Aspects of the Old Self

You No Longer Want to Be
Now review and memorize your list. This is an essential part

of meditation. Your goal is “to become familiar with” how you
think and act when this specific emotion is driving you. It is to
remind you how you no longer want to be, and how you were
making yourself so unhappy. This step helps you become aware
of how you unconsciously behave and what you say to yourself
while you’re thinking and feeling, feeling and thinking, so that
you have more conscious control in your waking day.
Executing this step is a work in progress. In other words, if you
sit down every day for a week to focus on this, you will probably
264
find that you continue to modify and refine your list. That’s good.
When you do this step, you enter the operating system of the
“computer” programs in the subconscious mind and throw the
spotlight on them for your review. You ultimately want to become
so familiar with these cognitions that you inhibit them from firing
in the first place. You will prune away the synaptic connections
that made up the old self. And if everywhere that a neurological
connection is formed constitutes a memory, then you are in fact
dismantling the memory of the old you.
Throughout this next week, continue to review the list again
so that you know even better who you no longer want to be. If you
can memorize all these aspects of the old self, you will separate
your consciousness even further from the old self. When your ha-
bitual, automatic thoughts and reactions are completely familiar
to you, they will never slip by unnoticed or unrecognized. And
you will be able to anticipate them before they are initiated. This
is when you are free.
In this step, remember: awareness is your goal.
}}}
You know the drill by now . . . read Step 6 and do your writing;
then you’ll be ready to start your Week Three meditations.
STEP 6: REDIRECTING
Here’s what happens when you use the tools of redirecting:
You prevent yourself from behaving unconsciously. You stop
yourself from activating your old programs, and you biologically
change, causing unfiring and unwiring of nerve cells. Similarly,
you stop the same genes from being signaled in the same ways.
If you’ve struggled with the idea of surrendering control, this
step allows you to more consciously and judiciously take back the
reins in order to break the habit of being yourself. When you be-
come masterful at being able to redirect yourself, you’re building a
solid foundation on which to create your new-and-improved self.
265
Redirecting: Play the Change Game
During your meditations this week, take some of the situa-

tions you came up with in the step just before, and as you picture
them or observe yourself in your mind, tell yourself (out loud),
“Change!” It’s simple:
1. Imagine a situation where you are thinking and

feeling in an unconscious way.
. . . Say “Change!”
2. Become aware of a scenario (with a person, for

example, or a thing) where you could easily fall into
an old behavior pattern.
3. Picture yourself in an event in your life where there is

a good reason to fall short of your ideal.
The Loudest Voice in Your Head
After you remind yourself to stay conscious throughout your

day, as you learned in the previous step, you can now use a tool to
change right in the moment. Whenever you catch yourself in real
life thinking a limiting thought or engaging in a limiting behav-
ior, just say “Change!” out loud. Over time, your own voice will
become the new voice in your head—and the loudest one. It will
become the voice of redirection that you programmed into your
nervous system.
As you repeatedly interrupt the old program, your efforts will
begin to further weaken the connections between those neural
networks that make up your personality. By the principle of Heb-
bian learning, you will unhook the circuits connected to the old
self during your daily life. At the same time, you are no longer epi-
genetically signaling the same genes in the same ways. This is an-
other step so that you will become more conscious. It is developing
266
“conscious control” of yourself.

When you can stop a knee-jerk emotional reaction to some
thing or person in your life, you are choosing to save yourself
from returning to the old you that thinks and acts in such lim-
ited ways. By the same idea, as you gain conscious control over
your thoughts that may be initiated from some stray memory or
association connected with some environmental cue, you will
move away from the predictable destiny in which you think the
same thoughts and perform the same actions, which will create
the same reality. It is a reminder placed by you in your own mind.
As you become aware, redirect your familiar thoughts and
feelings, and recognize your unconscious states of being, you are
also no longer using up your valuable energy. When you are living
in a state of survival, you are signaling your body into emergency
status by knocking it out of homeostasis and thus mobilizing a
lot of energy. Those emotions and thoughts represent a low fre-
quency of energy that is consumed by the body. So when you are
conscious and change them before they make it to the body, then
every time you notice or redirect them, you are conserving vital
energy you may use for creating a new life.
Associative Memories Trigger Automatic Responses
Since staying conscious is crucial to creating that new life, it is

important to understand how associative memories have made it
so difficult for you to stay conscious in the past, and how practic-
ing redirection can help free you from your old self.
Earlier in this book, we saw that Pavlov’s classical-conditioning
experiment with dogs beautifully illustrates why it can be so hard
for us to change. The dogs’ reaction in that experiment—learning
to salivate in response to a bell—is an example of a conditioned
response based on an associative memory.
Your associative memories exist in the subconscious mind.
They are formed over time when the repeated exposure to an ex-
ternal condition produces an automatic internal response in the
body, which then elicits an automatic behavior. As one or two of
267
the senses respond to the same cue, the body reacts without much
of the conscious mind’s involvement. It turns on by a thought or
a memory alone.
By the same token, we live by numerous similar associative
memories in our lives, triggered by so many known identifications
derived from our environment. For instance, if you see someone
you know well, chances are that you are going to respond in au-
tomatic ways without ever consciously knowing it. Seeing that
individual will create an associated memory from some past ex-
perience that is connected to some emotion, which then triggers
an automatic behavior. The chemistry of your body changes the
moment you “think” about him or her in the past memory. A
program runs from the repeated conditioning that you memo-
rized about that person into your subconscious mind. And just
like Pavlov’s dogs, in moments you are physiologically responding
unconsciously. Your body takes over and begins to run you sub-
consciously, based on some past memory.
Your body is now predominantly in control. You’re out of the
driver’s seat consciously because your subconscious body-mind is
now controlling you. What are the cues that cause this to occur
so quickly with you? They can be anything or everything in your
external world. Their source is your relationship to your known
environment; it is your life, which is connected to all of the people
and things you experienced at different times and places.
This is why it is so difficult to stay conscious in the process of
change. You see a person, hear a song, visit a place, remember an
experience, and your body begins to immediately “turn on” from
a past memory. And your associated thought about how to iden-
tify with someone or something activates a cascade of reactions
below the conscious mind that then returns you back to the same
personality self. You think, act, and feel in predictable, automatic,
memorized ways. You subconsciously reidentify with your past
known environment, which then returns you to your known self
living in the past.
When Pavlov continued to ring the bell without the reward of
food being present, in time the dogs’ automatic response lessened
268
because they no longer maintained the same association. We could

say that the dogs’ repeated exposure to the bell without the food
dwindled their neuroemotional response. They stopped salivating
because the bell became a sound without any associative memory.
Catch Yourself Before “Going Unconscious”
As you run through a series of situations in your mind’s eye in

which you stop yourself from being the old self (emotionally), your
repeated exposure to the same stimuli (mentally) will, over time,
weaken your emotional response to that condition. And as you
consistently present yourself to the same motives of the old iden-
tity and notice how you automatically responded, you will become
conscious enough in your life that you catch yourself from going
unconscious. In time, all of those associations that turned on the
old program will become just like the dogs’ experience of the bell
without the food—you no longer knee-jerk back physiologically to
the neurochemical you, connected to familiar people or things.
Thus, your thought about a person who makes you angry or
your interaction with the ex-boyfriend can no longer tug on you
because you’ve mindfully stopped yourself enough times. As you
break the addiction to the emotion, there can be no autonomic
response. It is your conscious awareness in this step that then frees
you from the associated emotion or thought process in your daily
life. Most of the time, these reflexive reactions go by unchecked by
you because you are too busy “being” the old you.
It is important that you rationalize beyond the barometer of
your feelings to understand that these survival emotions are af-
fecting your cells in adverse ways by pushing the same genetic
buttons and breaking down your body. It raises the question: “Is
this feeling, behavior, or attitude loving to myself?”
After I say “Change,” I like to say, “This is not loving to me!
The rewards of being healthy, happy, and free are so much more
important than being stuck in the same self-destructive pattern. I
don’t want to emotionally signal the same genes in the same way
and affect my body so adversely. Nothing is worth it.”
269
WEEK THREE
GUIDE TO MEDITATION
During your Week Three meditations, your aim is to now add

Step 5: Observing and Reminding, then Step 6: Redirecting, to
the previous steps, so that you are doing all six. Steps 5 and 6
will ultimately merge to become one step. Throughout your day,
as limiting thoughts and feelings come up, observe yourself and
automatically say “Change!” out loud; or hear this—instead of the
old voice(s)—as the loudest voice in your head. When that hap-
pens, you will be ready for the creation process.
• Step 1: As usual, begin by doing the induction.

• Steps 2–5: After you recognize, admit, declare, and
surrender, it’s time to continue to address the specific
thoughts and actions that naturally slip past your
awareness. Observe the old you until you become
completely familiar with those programs.
• Step 6: Then, as you are observing the old you while
you are in your meditation, pick a few scenarios in
your life and say “Change!” out loud.
}}}}
270
C H A P T E R T H I RT E E N
CREATE A NEW
M IND FOR YOUR
NEW FUTURE
(Week Four)
STEP 7: CREATING AND REHEARSING
Week Four will be a bit different from previous weeks. First,

as you read and write for Step 7, you will receive knowledge about
creating and instruction on the “how-to” process of using mental
rehearsal. Then you’ll read the Guided Mental-Rehearsal Medita-
tion to follow, to familiarize you with this new process.
Next, it’s time to do what you have learned. Every day this week,
you will practice the Week Four meditation, which includes Steps 1
through 7. As you listen, you will apply the focused attention and
repetition you have employed to create the new you and your new
destiny.
271
Overview: Creating and Rehearsing the New You
Before you begin the final series of steps, I want to point out
that the preceding steps were all designed to help you break the
habit of being yourself so that you could make room both con-
sciously and energetically for reinventing a new self. Up until this
point, you’ve worked at pruning away old synaptic connections.
Now it’s time to sprout new ones, so that the new mind you create
will become the platform of who you will be in your future.
Your previous efforts have facilitated unlearning some things
about your old self. You’ve weeded out many aspects of the old you.
You’ve become familiar with your unconscious states of mind that
represent how you thought, behaved, and felt. Through the practice
of metacognition, you’ve consciously observed the routine, habitu-
al ways your brain fired within the box of your former personality.
The skill of self-reflection has allowed you to separate your free-
willed consciousness from the automatic programs that caused your
brain to fire in the exact same sequences, patterns, and combina-
tions. You’ve examined how your brain has probably been working
for years now. And since the working definition of mind is the brain
in action, you’ve objectively looked at your limited mind.
Creating the New You
Now that you are beginning to “lose” your mind, it’s time to
create a new one. Let’s begin to “plant” a new you. Your daily medi-
tations, contemplations, and rehearsals will be like tending to a gar-
den to yield a greater expression of you. Learning new information
and reading about great people in history who represent your new
ideal is like sowing the seeds. The more creative you are in reinvent-
ing a new identity, the more diverse the fruits you will experience
in your future. Your firm intention and conscious attention will be
like water and sunlight for your dreams in your garden.
As you emotionally rejoice in your new future before it is made
manifest, you cast a safety net and fence protecting your vulner-
able potential destiny from pests and difficult climatic conditions,
272
Create a New Mind for Your New Future
because your elevated energy shields your creation. And by falling

in love with the vision of who you are becoming, you are nurtur-
ing the potential plants and fruit with a miracle fertilizer. Love is
a higher-frequency emotion than those survival emotions that al-
lowed the weeds and pests to come in the first place. To eliminate
the old and make way for the new is the process of transformation.
Rehearsing the New You
Next, it’s time to practice creating a new mind over and over
again until it begins to become familiar to you. As you know, the
more you fire circuits together, the more you wire them into last-
ing relationships. And if you fire a series of thoughts related to a
particular stream of consciousness, it will be easier to produce that
same level of mind the time after that. Therefore, as you repeat the
same frame of mind every day by mentally rehearsing a new ideal
of self, over time it will become more routine, more familiar, more
natural, more automatic, and more subconscious. You will begin
to remember you as someone else.
In the previous steps, you also unmemorized an emotion that
was stored in your body-mind. Now it’s time to recondition your
body to a new mind and signal your genes in new ways.
Your goal in this final step is to master a new mind in the
brain as well as the body. Thus, it becomes so familiar to you that
you are able to reproduce that same level of being at will and make
it look natural and easy. It’s important that you memorize this
new state of mind by thinking in new ways; equally relevant is to
then memorize a new feeling in the body so that nothing in your
outer world can move you from it. This is when you are ready to
create a new future and then live in it. When you rehearse, you
bring the new you out of nothing repeatedly and consistently, so
that you “know how” to call it up at will.
273
Creating: Use Imagination and Invention

to Bring Your New Self into Existence
In this step, you’ll start by asking yourself some open-ended

questions. As you pose questions that cause you to speculate, to
think in different ways than you typically think, and to entertain
new possibilities, this turns on your frontal lobe.
This entire contemplation process is the building method for
making a new mind. You are creating the platform of the new
self by forcing the brain to fire in novel ways. You’re beginning to
change your mind!
Please take time to write down your answers to the following
questions. Then review them, reflect on them, analyze them, and think
about all the possibilities your answers raise.
Questions to turn on your frontal lobe:
• What is the greatest ideal of myself?

• What would it be like to be ________?
• Who in history do I admire, and how did they act?
• Who in my life do I know who is/feels ________?
• What would it take to think like ________?
• Whom do I want to model?
• How would I be if I were ________?
• What would I say to myself if I were this person?
• How would I talk to others if I were changed?
• How or whom do I want to remind myself to be?
274
Your personality consists of how you think, act, and feel. So I’ve
grouped some questions to help you determine more specifically how
you want your new self to conduct itself. Remember, when you come
up with your own answers, then contemplate them, you are installing
new hardware in your brain and signaling your genes to activate in
new ways in your body. (Feel free to continue to list your answers in
your journal if you don’t think you can mentally keep track of them.)
How Do I Want to Think?
• How would this new person (my ideal) think?

• What thoughts do I want to put my energy behind?
• What is my new attitude?
• What do I want to believe about me?
• How do I want to be perceived?
• What would I say to myself if I was this person?
• What states of mind do I want to fire and wire in
my brain?
How Do I Want to Act?
• How would this person act?

• What would he or she do?
• How do I see myself behaving?
• How would I speak as this new expression of self?
• How do I want to live today?
How Do I Want to Feel?
• How would this new self be?

• What would I feel?
• What would my energy be like as this new ideal?
• Can I teach my body what it feels like to be this ideal?
275
}}}
When you meditate to create the new you, your job is to re-
produce the same level of mind every day, to think and feel differ-
ently than you usually do. You should be able to repeat that same
frame of mind at will and make it commonplace. Furthermore,
you have to allow your body to feel that new feeling until you
actually are that new person. In other words, you cannot get up as
the same person who sat down. Transformation must occur in the
here and now, and your energy should be different from when
you started. If you get up as the same person, feeling just as you
did when you started, nothing has really happened. You are still
the same identity.
Therefore, if you say to yourself, “I didn’t feel like it today; I’m
too tired; I have too much to do; I am busy; I have a headache; I’m
too much like my mother; I can’t change; I want to get something
to eat; I can start tomorrow; this doesn’t feel good; I should turn
on the TV and watch the news,” and so on; and if you allow those
subvocalizations to take the stage of the frontal lobe, you will in-
variably get up as the same personality.
You must use your will, intention, and sincerity to go beyond
these urges of the body. You must recognize this banter and chat-
ter as a fight by the old self for control. You must allow it to rebel,
but then bring it back to the present moment, relax it, and then
start over again. And over time, it will begin to trust you to be the
master again.
Rehearsing: Memorize the New You
Now that you’ve contemplated your answers, it’s time to re-

hearse them. Review how you will think, act, and feel as your
new ideal. Let’s be clear here. I don’t want you to become too
mechanistic or rigid. This is a creative process. Allow yourself to
be imaginative, free, and spontaneous. Don’t force your answers
to be one way or another. Don’t try to go through your list in the
same exact way during each meditative session. There are many
different means to arrive at your end.
276
Just think about the greatest expression of yourself and then

remind yourself how you will act. What will you say, how will
you walk, how will you breathe, and how will you feel if you
become that person? What will you say to others and to your-
self? Your goal is to move into a “state of being” and become this
ideal.
For instance, think back to those piano players who mentally
rehearsed piano exercises without touching any keys, and how
they achieved almost the same brain changes as people who physi-
cally played the same scales and chords for the same length of
time. The “mental” players’ daily rehearsal changed their brains to
look like they had already had the experience of physically execut-
ing the activity. Their thoughts became their experience.
If you recall the finger-exercise experiment involving mental
rehearsal, there were also significant physical changes demon-
strated in the body, without the subjects’ ever lifting a finger. In
this step, your daily rehearsals will change your brain and your
body to be ahead of time.
That’s why it’s so important to rehearse—to bring up again—
how you will act as your new self. This is how you biologically
change the brain and body to no longer live in the past but rather
to chart a map to the future. If the body and brain are changed,
then there is physical evidence that you are changed.
Becoming Very Familiar with the New You
This part of Step 7 is about making the leap to get to the “un-
consciously skilled” level of expertise. When you are unconsciously
skilled at something, that means you just do it without having to
place a great deal of conscious thought or attention on the activ-
ity. It’s like going from a novice driver to an experienced one. It’s
like being able to knit without having to consciously will each of
the actions into motion. It’s like the old Nike ad slogan: you are
just doing it.
277
If you are getting bored around this point in the exercise, take
that as a good sign. It means that your new mode of operation is
beginning to become familiar, common, and automatic. You have
to get to this juncture in order to hardwire and embody this in-
formation into long-term memory. You must make an effort to go
beyond your boredom, because each time you engage in your new
ideal, you manage to be more of the new you with less effort. You
engrave your new model of you into a memory system that then
becomes more subconscious and natural. If you keep practicing
it, you won’t have to think about being it. You will have become it.
Bottom line, practice makes perfect. You are training yourself in
this process, like any sport.
If you’re doing rehearsal correctly, then each time you prac-
tice, it should be easier for you to accomplish. Why? Because
you’re primed; you already have those circuits firing in tandem
in your brain, and it’s already warmed up. You also manufactured
the right chemistry, and it’s circulating in your body, selecting a
new genetic expression; your body is naturally in the right state.
In addition, you have restrained and “quieted down” other brain
regions connected to the old you. Consequently, the feelings that
were associated with the old you are less likely to stimulate your
body in the same inherent ways.
Bear in mind that most of the mental-rehearsal exercises that
activate and grow new circuits in the brain involve learning knowl-
edge, getting instruction, paying attention, and repeating the skill
over and over. As you know, learning is making new connections;
instruction is teaching the body “how to” in order to create a new
experience; paying attention to what you are doing is absolutely
necessary to rewire your brain, because it involves your being pres-
ent to the stimuli . . . both physical and mental; and last, repeti-
tion fires and wires long-term relationships between nerve cells.
These are all the ingredients that it takes to grow new circuits and
make a new mind—and this is exactly what you’re doing in your
meditations. Repetition is what I want to emphasize here.
}}}
278
Cathy’s story illustrates every facet of mental rehearsal. A mas-

sive stroke had damaged the language center in her brain’s left
hemisphere, leaving her unable to talk for months. Doctors told
Cathy, a corporate trainer, that she would probably never speak
again. Having read my book and completed one of my workshops,
Cathy refused to accept this devastating prognosis.
Instead, based on knowledge she had learned and instruc-
tion she received, and applying focused attention and repetition,
Cathy mentally rehearsed speaking in front of groups of people.
Every day, she practiced this in her mind. Over a period of sev-
eral months, she demonstrated physical changes in her brain and
body, to the extent that she repaired the language center in her
brain . . . and completely regained her ability to speak. Today
Cathy once again addresses audiences fluently and flawlessly, with
no hesitation.
In your own study of this material, you made some impor-
tant synaptic connections as the precursor for you to have new
experiences. Both of these elements—studying information and
having experiences—evolve your brain. You are also being given
the proper instruction in the unlearning and relearning process of
change. You understand the importance of focus in attending to
both mental and physical activity to mold your brain and change
your body to reflect your efforts. And finally, it is your repeated
efforts to rehearse your new ideal that will produce the same level
of mind and body, over and over again. Repetition will seal long-
lasting circuits and activate new genes for you to revisit the next
day with greater ease. This step is for you to practice reproducing
the same state of being so it gets simpler.
The keys for you to focus on are frequency, intensity, and dura-
tion. That is, the more you do it, the easier it gets. The better your
focus and concentration are, the easier it is for you to tap into that
particular mind the next time. The longer you can linger in the
thoughts and emotions of your new ideal, without letting your
mind wander to extraneous stimuli, the more you will memorize
this new state of being. This step is all about getting into becoming
your new ideal in your waking day.
279
Becoming a New Personality Produces a New Reality
Your goal in this step is to become a new personality, a new

state of being. So if you are a new personality, you are being some-
body else, right? Your old personality, based on how you thought,
felt, and acted, has created the reality that you presently are experi-
encing. In short, how you are as a personality is how you are in your
personal reality. Remember, also, that your personal reality is made
up of how you think, feel, and act. By doing each of those in a new
way, you are creating both a new self and a new reality.
Your new personality should produce a new reality. In other
words, when you are being someone else, you naturally will have a
different life. If you suddenly changed your identity, you would be
another person, and therefore, you would certainly live as some-
one else. If the personality called John became the personality
known as Steve, we could say that John’s life will change because
he is no longer being John but is now thinking, acting, and feel-
ing like Steve.
Here is another example. One time while I was lecturing in
California, a woman approached me in front of the audience with
her hands on her hips, intensely focused, angrily exclaiming,
“How come I’m not living in Santa Fe?!”
I calmly replied, “Because the person who was just talking to
me is the personality who is living in Los Angeles. The personal-
ity who would be living, and is already, in Santa Fe looks nothing
like that.”
Thus, from a quantum perspective, this new personality is the
perfect place to create from. The new identity is no longer emotion-
ally anchored to known situations in your life that keep recycling
the same circumstances; therefore, it is a perfect place from which
to envision a new destiny. This is the place you want to be to call out
a new life. The reason why your prayers were hardly ever answered
in the past is that you were trying to hold a mindful intention while
being lost in lower emotions such as guilt, shame, sadness, unwor-
thiness, anger, or fear connected to the old self. It was those feelings
that were governing your thoughts and attitude.
280
The 5 percent of your mind that is conscious was fighting

against the 95 percent that is the subconscious body-mind. Think-
ing one way and feeling another cannot produce anything tan-
gible. Energetically, that broadcasts a mixed signal to the invisible
web that orchestrates reality. Thus, if you were “being” guilty be-
cause your body memorized the mind of guilt, then you probably
received whatever you were being—situations in your life that
evoked more reasons to feel guilty. Your conscious aim could not
stand up against your being that memorized emotion.
As this new identity, however, you are thinking and feeling
differently than the old identity. You are in a state of mind and
body that now is sending a perfect signal free from your past
memories. For the first time, the lens of your mind is now lifted
above the present landscape to see a new horizon. You are looking
to the future, not your past.
Simply said, you can’t create a new personal reality while you
are still being the old personality. You have to become someone
else. Once you are in a new state of being, now is the time to create
a new destiny.
Creating a New Destiny
This part of the step is where you, as this new state of being,
this new personality, create a new personal reality. The energy
that you released from the body earlier is now the raw ingredient
to create a new future with.
So what do you want? Do you want healing in some area of
your body or your life? Do you want a loving relationship, a more
satisfying career, a new car, a paid-up mortgage? Do you want the
solution to overcoming an obstacle in your life? Is your dream
to write a book, to send your kids to college or go back to school
yourself, to climb a mountain, to learn to fly, to be free from an
addiction? In all of these examples, your brain automatically cre-
ates an image of what you want.
From an elevated state of mind and body; in love, joy, self-
empowerment, and gratitude; in a greater, more coherent energy,
281
here is where you see those images in your mind of what you want
to create in your new life as this new personality. Craft the spe-
cific future events you want to experience, by observing them into
physical reality. Let yourself go and begin to free-associate with-
out analysis. The pictures you see in your mind are the vibrational
blueprints of your new destiny. You, as the quantum observer, are
commanding matter to conform to your intentions.
With clarity, you will hold the image of each manifestation in
your mind for a few seconds, and then let it go into the quantum
to be executed by a greater mind.
Just like the observer in quantum physics, who looks for an
electron and it collapses from a wave of probabilities into an event
called a particle—the physical manifestation of matter—you are
doing the same on a much larger scale. But you are using your
“free energy” to collapse waves of probability into an event called
a new experience in your life. Your energy is now entangled with
that future reality, and it belongs to you. Thus, you are entangled
with it, and it is your destiny.
Finally, give up trying to figure out how or when or where or
with whom. Leave those details to a mind that knows so much
more than you do. And know that your creation will come in a
way that you will least expect, that will surprise you and leave no
doubt that it came from a higher order. Trust that the events in
your life will be tailored to your conscious intentions.
Now you are developing a two-way communication with this
invisible consciousness. It shows you that it noticed you emulating
it as a creator; it speaks to you directly; it demonstrates that it is
responding to you. How does it do all this? It creates and organizes
unusual events in your life; these signify direct messages from the
quantum mind. Now you have a relationship with a supreme, lov-
ing consciousness.
Overview: Guided Mental-Rehearsal Meditation
It’s time to reinvent a new you, by moving into a new state of

being that reflects your new expression of self. After you do so—by
282
priming a new mind and body—then you rehearse that state of

being again. Your efforts to re-create the same familiar state will bio-
logically change your brain and body ahead of the new experience.
Then once you are a new being in your meditation, a new being is a
new personality, and a new personality creates a new personal real-
ity. Here is where you, from an elevated energy, create the specific
events in your life as the quantum observer of destiny. Although
this Guided Mental-Rehearsal Meditation has three parts, when it is
incorporated into your Week Four meditation (as the Guided Medi-
tation in Appendix C), the parts blend seamlessly together.
Guided Mental-Rehearsal Meditation:

Creating the New You
Now close your eyes, eliminate the environment, and let
yourself go by “creating” how you want to live your life.
Your job is to move into a new state of being. It’s time to
change your mind and think in new ways. When you do, you
will emotionally recondition your body to a new mind by sig-
naling new genes in new ways. Let the thought become the ex-
perience, and live that future reality now. Open your heart and
give thanks ahead of the actual experience so much so that
you convince your body to believe that future event is unfolding
now.
Pick a potential in the quantum field, and live it complete-
ly. It is time to change your energy from living in the emotions
of the past to living in the emotions of a new future. You cannot
get up as the same person you were when you sat down.
Remind yourself who you will be when you open your eyes.
Plan your actions with regard to how you will be in your new
reality. Imagine the new you and how you will speak and what
you will say to yourself. Think about what it will feel like to be
this ideal. Conceive of yourself as a new person—doing certain
things; thinking certain ways; and feeling the emotions of joy,
inspiration, love, empowerment, gratitude, and power.
Become so attentive to your intention that your thoughts of
a new ideal become the experience internally, and as you feel
the emotion from that experience, you go from thinking to be-
ing. Remember who and what you really are in your new future.
283
Rehearsing the New You

Now, relax for a few seconds. Then “re-view,” re-create, and
rehearse what you just did; do it over again. Let go and see if
you can do it repeatedly and consistently.
Can you initiate being that new ideal with greater ease than
the last time? Can you bring it out of nothing one more time?
You should naturally be able to recall who you are becoming so
that you know how to call it up at will. Your repeated efforts
will mean doing it so many times that you’ll just “know how”
to. When you move into this new state of being, “memorize the
feeling.” This is a great place to be.
Creating Your New Destiny

Now, it’s time to command matter. From this elevated state
of mind and body, what do you want in your future life?
As you unfold the new self, remember to move into that
state of mind and body that feels invincible, powerful, absolute,
inspired, and overjoyed. Let the pictures come; see them with
certainty, with a knowingness that unifies you to those events
or things. Bond with your future as if it is yours, without any
concern other than expectancy and celebration. Let yourself go
and begin to free-associate without concern. Become empow-
ered by your new sense of self. With clarity, hold the image of
each manifestation in your mind for a few seconds, and then let
it go into the quantum to be executed by a greater mind . . . then
go to the next one . . . keep going . . . this is your new destiny.
Allow yourself to experience that future reality in the present
moment until you convince your body to emotionally believe
that the event is coming to pass now. Open your heart and ex-
perience the joy of your new life before it actually manifests. . . .
Know that where you place your attention is where you
place your energy. The energy that you released from the body
earlier has become the raw materials for you to use to create a
new future. In a state of divinity, true greatness, and gratitude,
create by blessing your life with your own energy, and be the
quantum observer of your future. Become entangled to your new
reality. As you see the images of what you want to experience
in the energy of this new personality, know that those pictures
284
will become the blueprints of your destiny. You are commanding

matter to conform to your intentions. . . . When you finish,
simply let go and know that your future will unfold in a way
that is perfect for you.
WEEK FOUR
GUIDE TO MEDITATION
Now that you have read the text and journaled for Step 7, you
are ready to practice your Week Four meditations. Every day, listen
to (or do from memory) the full Week Four meditation.
A helpful hint: During the Guided Meditation, you may find
yourself feeling so good that you naturally make statements like
these to yourself or out loud: I am wealthy, I am healthy, I am a ge-
nius—because you feel like that in a very real way. That’s great. It
means mind and body are aligned. It’s important for you not to
analyze what you are dreaming. If you do, you will leave the fertile
ground of the Alpha-wave patterns and return back to Beta-wave
patterns, and separate yourself from your subconscious mind. Just
create a new you without any judgment.
Guide to Continuing Your Meditation
You’ve just devoted the past several weeks to learning a medi-

tation practice that can become a lifelong means to help you
evolve and create the life you choose. You also used that new skill
to start pruning away a particular aspect of the old you, and to
begin creating a new self and a new destiny.
285
At this point, many people ask questions such as these:
• How can I continue to get better at the steps and

skills of meditating?
• Once I have mastered this process, should I keep
doing it the same way indefinitely?
• How long should I keep working on the same aspect
of self that I’ve focused on up to now?
• How will I know when I’m ready to peel away
another “layer of the onion”?
• As I keep using this process, how can I decide which
part of my old self to change next?
• Can I use this process to work on more than one
aspect of my personality at a time?
Make This Meditative Process Your Own
If you continue to do all the steps every day, what used to feel
like seven steps will begin to feel simpler, with more of a flow from
step to step. Like anything you have mastered in your life, you will
only get better if you continue to meditate daily.
As for the Guided Meditation and induction techniques, you
might think of them like training wheels on a bicycle. If using
them helped you while you were learning this process, continue
to listen to them for as long as they assist you to move ahead. But
once you’re so familiar with the process that you’ve made it your
own, and you feel that listening to guided instructions is holding
you back, then let them go.
Keep Peeling Away Those Layers
Making periodic adjustments to your meditations is natural

and to be expected, because you aren’t the same person you were
286
when you began. If you keep up the daily sessions, your state of
being will continue to evolve, and thus you will continue to recog-
nize aspects of your old self that you want to change.
Only you can determine when and how quickly you are ready
to move ahead. And as I’ll talk about in the next chapter, your
progress will depend not just on your meditations, but on making
change an integral part of your daily life. But in general, working
on one particular aspect of yourself in your sessions for four to
six weeks will likely bring enough results that you feel an inner
prompting to begin removing another layer of self.
So approximately every month, do some self-reflection. Look
to your life for feedback on what you’re creating, and how you’re
doing. You might revisit the questions in Part III and notice any
that you would now answer differently. Reevaluate how you’re
feeling, who you’ve been “being” in your life, and whether you
still have the attitude you were working on. If that attitude feels
like it has diminished, have you noticed other unwanted emo-
tions, states of mind, or habits that feel more prominent now?
If so, one approach might be to focus on that aspect of your
personality and redo the entire process you just completed. Alter-
natively, you may want to keep working on one area while adding
another.
Once you’ve mastered the basic template for how to meditate,
you can combine the emotions you’re working on in a more uni-
fied way, addressing several aspects of yourself at the same time.
After a lot of practice, I now work on my whole self at once, taking
what I think of as a holistic, nonlinear approach.
Of course, elements of the new destiny you want to create
will surely change as well. When that new relationship or career
change comes into your life, you won’t want to stop there. And
every so often, you may also opt to vary your meditation just to
shake things up a bit. Trust your instincts.
287
Advance Your Understanding Even More
If you haven’t already done so, I invite you to visit my website:

www.drjoedispenza.com. Whenever you feel the need for new
inspiration, here you will find an array of practical tools and tech-
niques to reprogram your thoughts and remove self-destructive
habits to empower you to change from the inside out. Your next
steps might be to:
• Read my first book (and the companion to this one),

Evolve Your Brain: The Science of Changing Your Mind,
to deepen the knowledge that, as you now know, is
the doorway to experience. This book will walk you
through the structures of your brain, teach you how
your thoughts and emotions become hardwired, and
give you the understanding to not only change your
life, but to change you into the person you’ve always
wanted to be.
• Attend one, two, or all three of the workshops I
personally conduct around the world on Breaking the
Habit of Being Yourself.
• Participate in a series of live teleclasses, including
Q & A sessions.
• Broaden the foundation of your knowledge through
the DVDs and audio CDs described on my website.
}}}}
288
C H A P T E R F O U RT E E N
DEMONSTR ATING AND

BEING TR ANSPARENT:
LIVING YOUR NEW
REALIT Y
When you demonstrate change, you’ve memorized an inter-
nal order that is greater than any environmental condition. It’s
keeping your energy up, staying conscious in a new reality, in-
dependent of your body, independent of the environment, and
independent of time. How are you going to be when you walk
into your life? Remind yourself with your family, at your job, with
your children, at lunch tomorrow. Can you maintain this modi-
fied state of being? If you can live your life in the same energy
that you created with, then something different should show up
in your world—that’s the law. When your behaviors match your
intentions, when your actions are equal to your thoughts, when
you’re being someone else, then you are ahead of your time. Your
environment is no longer controlling how you think and feel;
how you think and feel is controlling your environment. That’s
greatness, and it’s always been within you. . . .
289
When how you appear is who you are, you are free from the
enslavement of your past. And when all of that energy now is lib-
erated, the side effect of that freedom is called joy.
Demonstrating: Living as the New You
When your internal neurochemical state is so orderly and co-

herent that no stimulus in your incoherent, external world can
disrupt who you are “being,” then your mind and body are now
working in harmony. You are now a new being. And by memoriz-
ing that state of being—a new personality—your world and your
personal reality will begin to reflect your internal changes. When
your outward expression of self is equal to your inner self, you are
headed to a new destiny.
Can you maintain the change in your life so that your body
does not return to the same mind? Since emotions are stored in
the subconscious memory system, it is your job to consciously
keep your body aligned to your new mind so that nothing in your
environment emotionally hooks you back to the old reality. You
must memorize your new self and insist on being it, so that noth-
ing in your present reality can move you from it.
Remember that when you get up from your meditation, if you
did it properly, you will advance from thinking to being. Once
you are in that state of being, you are more prone to do and think
equal to who you are being.
To Demonstrate Is to “Be It” All Day Long
In a nutshell, demonstration is living as if your prayers have

already been answered. It is rejoicing in your new life with a new
level of expectation and excitement. It is reminding yourself that
you must be in that same state of mind and body that you were in
when you created your new ideal. You cannot create a new person-
ality in your meditation and then live as the old self for the rest of
the day. It would be like eating a really healthy meal in the morn-
ing and then spending the rest of the day snacking on junk food.
290
Demonstrating and Being Transparent: Living Your New Reality
In order for a new experience in reality to happen to you,

you have to match your behavior with your goal; you align your
thoughts and your deeds. You must make choices that are consis-
tent with your new state of being. When you demonstrate, you
physically apply what you have mentally rehearsed, getting the
body involved and making it do what the mind has learned.
Therefore, in order for you to see the signals unfolding in your
life, you must live and be in the same energy that you created
from. Simply put, if you want the universe to begin to talk back
to you in new and unusual ways, the energy and the mind that
you demonstrate in your life must be the same as the energy and
mind of your meditation as that new ideal. This is when you are
connected with or entangled to the energy you created in a di-
mension beyond space and time, and this is how you attract the
new event into your life.
When both aspects of the self are aligned, the “you” living
in the “now life” is the same being you constructed during your
meditation. You are being the future you that existed as a potential
in the quantum field. And when the new self that you created in
your meditation is the exact same electromagnetic signature as
the future you that you are being in your life, you are unified to
that new destiny. When you are physically “being one with the
future you in the now moment” that you dreamed about, you will
experience the bounty of a new reality. There will be a response
from a greater order.
Look Forward to Feedback
The feedback you experience in your life is the result of match-

ing the state of being/energy of your creative process to the state
of being/energy of your demonstrative process. It is “being” that
being you invented in this particular plane of demonstration. You
have to live in that line of time in present physical reality. Thus, if
you maintain that modified state of mind and body the entire day,
something different should show up in your life.
291
And what type of feedback should you begin to witness? Look

forward to synchronicities, opportunities, coincidences, flow, ef-
fortless change, better health, insights, revelations, mystical expe-
riences, and new relationships, to name a few. New feedback then
will inspire you to keep doing what you have been doing.
When external feedback occurs as a result of your internal ef-
forts, you will naturally correlate whatever you were doing inside
of you with whatever happened outside of you. This is a novel
moment in and of itself. It basically shows evidence that you are
now living by the quantum law. You become astonished that the
feedback that you are experiencing is the direct result of the inter-
nal workings of your mind and emotions.
When you correlate what you did in the implicit world with
the explicit manifestation, you will pay attention and remember
whatever you did earlier to produce that effect, and you will do it
again. And when you can connect your inner world with the ef-
fects in the outer world, you are now “causing an effect” instead of
living by cause and effect. You are creating reality.
Here is the test: Can you be the same person in your external
environment that you were being in your internal one, while you
were meditating? Can you be greater than your present environ-
ment, which is connected to your past personality, memories, and
associations? Are you able to cease your routine reactions to the
same situations? Have you conditioned your body and molded
your mind to be ahead of the present reality in front of you?
This is the reason why we meditate. To become someone else
in our lives.
Demonstrate the New-You Plan into

the Equation of Your Life
Remind yourself that during the day, you will keep your en-
ergy up as the new you. Here you are to prompt yourself to stay
conscious at different times in your waking hours. You can prime
yourself to place little notes in consciousness on the canvas of
your life.
292
For example:
I want to give thanks for different aspects of my life while

I take my morning shower. I have to stay on track while I drive
to work, so I’m going to be joyous during the whole trip. How
will I be as this new ideal when I see my boss? Let me remind
myself to take a moment at lunch and remember who I want to
be. When I see my kids this evening, I will be elevated and have
abundant energy, and we’ll truly connect. I want to take a min-
ute while I get ready for bed and remind myself who I am being.
End-of-the-Day Questions
These questions are a simple way to review your display of the

new self when the day is over:
• How did I do today?

• When did I fall from grace, and why?
• Who was it I reacted to, and where?
• When did I “go unconscious”?
• How can I do better the next time that happens?
Before you go to bed, it might be a nice idea to contemplate

where it was during your day that you lost your new ideal. Once
you can see the obvious place in your life that stimulated you to
fall into oblivion, ask yourself these simple questions: “If this situ-
ation happened again, how would I do it differently?” and “What
piece of knowledge or philosophical understanding could I apply
to this circumstance if it arose again?”
Once you can come up with a solid answer and attend to it
with a bit of thoughtfulness, you will be mentally rehearsing a
new element that rounds out another part of you. You will be put-
ting the new neural network into your brain to prepare you for
the event at some future time. This little move will assist you in
upgrading and refining the model of the new-and-improved you.
You then can add that into your morning or evening meditation.
293
Being Transparent: Going from the Inner to the Outer
When you are transparent, how you appear is who you are, and
your internal thoughts and feelings are reflected in your external
environment. Having achieved this state, your life and your mind
are synonymous. It is your final relationship between you and all
of your outward creations. This means that your life reflects your
mind in all arenas. You are your life, and your life is a reflection
of you. If, as quantum physics suggests, the environment is an
extension of the mind, this is when your life reorganizes itself to
reflect your new mind.
Transparency is a state of true empowerment, in which you
have realized (made real) your dream of personal transformation.
You have gained wisdom from experience, and are greater than
the environment and your past reality.
The telltale sign of becoming transparent is that you do not
have many overly analytical or critical thoughts. You wouldn’t
want to think that way. It would take you away from your present
state. Since the side effect of transparency is true joy, more energy,
and freedom of expression, any thought that is connected to an
ego drive would lower the elevated feeling within you.
There Will Come a Moment . . .
When your life begins to unfold with new and wonderful

events, there will come a moment that you will be in awe, wonder,
and utter wakefulness when you realize it was your mind that cre-
ated them. In your rapture, you will look back from this vantage
point at your entire life, and you will not want to change any-
thing. You will not regret any action or feel bad about whatever
has happened to you, because in that moment of your manifesta-
tion, it will all make sense to you. You will see how your past got
you to this great state.
As the result of your efforts, the consciousness of the greater
mind has begun to be your conscious mind; its nature is becom-
ing your nature. You naturally become more divine. This is who
you really are. This is your natural state of being.
294
Equally, as the invisible giver of life begins to move through

you, you will feel more like yourself than you have in a long time.
Those traumas that produced emotional scars knocked your true
personality from its center. You became more complicated, more
polarized, more divided, more inconsistent, and more predictable.
When you unmemorize those survival emotions that naturally
lower the frequency of the mind and the body, you are lifted to a
higher electromagnetic expression, and a greater frequency is now
turning you on. And you free yourself by unlocking the doors to
make room for a greater power to become you.
Finally, it is you and you are it. You are one. And you feel a
coherent energy called love. It is the within that then manifests an
unconditional state.
}}}
Once you connect to and drink from the well of conscious-

ness, you might experience a real paradox. It is quite possible that
there will come such a sense of personal wholeness that you will
find it difficult to want anything. This dichotomy was a veritable
realization for me.
Wants and desires come from lacking something, someone,
someplace, or some time. In being truly connected to this con-
sciousness, I have had moments that it was hard to think about
anything else because I felt so great. I felt so complete that any
thought that would take me away from it would not be worth my
moving from this place.
So the irony is that once you arrive at this space to create from,
you no longer need anything, because the lack and emptiness from
which you desired those things has been eliminated, replaced by
a feeling of wholeness. As a result, you just want to linger in the
feeling of balance, love, and coherence.
This, I feel, is the beginning of true unconditional love. Feel-
ing a sense of love and awe for life without needing anything
from outside of us is freedom. It is no longer being attached to
external elements. It is a feeling that is so coherent that to judge
another or to emotionally react to life and change from this state
295
is compromising self. This is when the greater consciousness that

we are all connected to begins to move out of us, and we begin
to express this through us. We move from human toward divine.
We become more like it. We become more loving, more mindful,
more powerful, more generous, more intentional, more kind, and
healthier. That’s its mind.
Something else amazing begins to occur as well. When you
feel elevated and joyful, you will feel so wonderful that you will
want to share the feeling of what you are experiencing with some-
one. And how do you share such great feelings? You give. You
think, I feel so superb and uplifted that I want you to feel the way I
feel. So here is a gift. And you will begin to give so that others can
feel the gift that you’re expressing from within. You are selfless.
Imagine a world like that.
If, however, you can fashion a new reality from this internal
order of wholeness, you must know that you will be creating from
a state of being in consciousness that is no longer separate from
whatever it is you desire. You are in absolute oneness with your
creation. And if you can slip into it naturally, and forget about
everything that is tied to the old you, you will feel such a sense of
exuberance that you will begin to know that the creation you are
focusing upon is yours. It will feel like hitting a tennis ball in the
sweet spot or parallel parking without mirrors within inches of
the curb. It just feels right. You somehow know.
}}}
This is how I end my daily meditation, and I offer it to you as

a suggestion:
Now close your eyes. Become aware that there is an intel-

ligence that is within you and all around you. Remember that it
is real. Contemplate that this consciousness is noticing you and
is aware of your intentions. Recall that it is a creator that exists
beyond space and time.
296
In your journey past the cravings of the body and the nu-
ances of the ego mind, you have made it to this final step. So if
in fact this consciousness is real and it exists, ask for a sign to
let you know that you made contact with it. Say to the creator,
“If I emulated you in any way as a creator today, send me a
signal in the form of feedback in my world to let me know that
you were noticing my efforts. And bring it in a way that I least
expect, that wakes me up from this dream, and leaves no doubt
that it has come from you, so that I am inspired to do this again
tomorrow.”
Let me remind you of what I stated in the chapter on the quan-

tum. If the feedback comes to you in a way that you could have ex-
pected or predicted, then it is nothing new. Resist the temptation
to ascribe novelty and unpredictability to what you know deep in
your soul to be the familiar. In your new life, you must be startled
and, in a sense, taken unaware—not by what came to you, but by
how it came about.
When you experience surprise, you wake up from the dream,
and the novelty of whatever is happening to you is now so thrill-
ing that it captures all of your attention. You are lifted out of your
normal feelings. To “leave no doubt” means it has to be so cool
and fun that you know that what you are doing is actually work-
ing. You want to know that this unusual event is coming from this
greater mind and that it can’t be anything else.
The Ultimate Experiment
You now have a relationship with the higher consciousness,

because it’s talking back to you, and only you know that what you
are doing within is affecting the “without.” Once you know this,
you should be inspired to do it again the next day. In essence, you
can now use the emotion of the new experience as new energy
with which to create your next outcome. You become like a scien-
tist or an explorer, experimenting with your life and measuring
the results of your efforts.
297
Our purpose in life is not to be good, to please God, to be

beautiful, to be popular, or to be successful. Our purpose, rather,
is to remove the masks and the façades that block the flow of this
divine intelligence and to express this greater mind through us. To
become empowered by our efforts of creativity and to ask greater
questions that will inevitably lead us to a more enriched destiny.
To expect the miraculous instead of the worst-case scenario and
to live as if this power is in favor of us. To ponder the uncommon,
to contemplate our achievements in utilizing this unseen power,
and to open our minds to more expanded possibilities challenges
us to evolve our being, to let more of this mind come through us.
For instance, by your truly healing yourself of some type of
malady, then it should naturally lead to more evolved questions
like: “Can I heal someone else with a touch? And if I accomplish
that feat, is it possible to heal a loved one from a distance?” And
once you master that possibility because you changed the physical
matter in that person, you might ask, “Can I create something out
of nothing?”
How much further can we go? There is no end to this adven-
ture. We are only limited by the questions we ask, the knowledge
we embrace, and our ability to keep an open mind and heart.
}}}}
298
AFTERWORD
Inhabit Self
One of the biggest lies we have come to believe about ourselves

and our true nature is that we are nothing more than physical be-
ings defined by a material reality, devoid of dimension and vital
energy, and separate from God—which I trust you know by now is
within us and all around us. To keep the truth about our real iden-
tity from us is not only enslaving, but it asserts that we are finite
beings living a linear life that lacks real meaning.
The dictum that there are no realms and no life beyond our
physical world and that we have no control over our destiny is not
a “truth” that you and I should ever believe in. It is my desire that
you have become empowered by a bit of knowledge in this work
to help you see who you really are.
You are a multidimensional being who creates your reality.
Helping you accept this idea as your law and new belief has been
my labor in this book. Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself means
that you are going to have to lose your mind and create a new one.
But when we fully lay down the old, familiar life or mind
and start creating the new, there is a moment between the two
worlds that is bereft of anything we know, and most rush back
from this void to the familiar. That place of uncertainty—the
unknown—is what the maverick, the mystic, and the saint know
to be fertile ground.
299
To live in the realm of the unpredictable is to be all potentials

at once. Can you become comfortable in this empty space? If you
can, you are at the nexus of a great creative power, the “I am.”
To biologically, energetically, physically, emotionally, chemi-
cally, neurologically, and genetically change ourselves and to stop
living by the unconscious affirmation that competition, strife,
success, fame, physical beauty, sexuality, possessions, and power
are the be-all and end-all in life is when we break from the chains
of the mundane. I fear that this so-called recipe for ultimate suc-
cess in life has kept us looking outside of ourselves for answers and
true happiness, when the real answers and true joy have always
been within.
So where and how do we find our true self? Do we create a per-
sona that is shaped by associations with the outer environment,
which perpetrates the lie? Or do we identify with something with-
in us that is as real as everything outside us, and create a unique
identity, which has awareness and a mind that we can emulate?
That’s right—it is that infinite resource of information and in-
telligence, personal and universal, that is intrinsic to all human
beings. It is an energetic consciousness that is filled with such co-
herence that when it moves through us, we can only call it love.
When the door opens, its frequency carries such vital information
that it changes who we are from within. This is an experience that
I have humbly learned to live for.
It is my hope that you know that you always have access to
it, if you choose. But if you live life as a materialist, then you will
struggle with its existence. Why? Well, realists will use their senses
to define reality; and if they can’t see it, taste it, smell it, touch
it, or hear it, then it doesn’t exist, right? This duality is a perfect
scheme for keeping people lost in the illusion. Just keep their at-
tention on an outer reality that is ultimately so sensually pleasur-
able or chaotic, and going within will seem too difficult.
Your attention is where your energy is. Put all of your atten-
tion on the external, material world, and that becomes your in-
vestment in reality. On the contrary, command your mindfulness
to unfold a deeper aspect of yourself, and your energy will expand
300
Afterword
that reality. You, as a human being, have the freedom to place

your awareness on anything. To develop your ability to manage
and properly use this abundance of power is the gift. Wherever
you put your thoughts and your awareness becomes your reality.
If you stop believing that thought is real, you will fall back
into materialism and stop doing the work. You’ll simply choose
some emotional addiction or habit for immediate gratification
and then talk yourself out of possibility.
Herein lies the dilemma: The future reality we create in our
minds does not yet provide any sensory feedback, and by the
quantum model, our senses should be the last to experience what
we create. For this reason, many of us make materialism our law
once again, and we go unconscious.
I want to remind you that all things material come from the
invisible field of the immaterial, beyond space and time. Simply
said, by planting seeds in this world, you see that in time they
bear fruit. If you can experience a dream so completely in mind
and emotion within the inner world of potentials, then it has al-
ready happened. So just surrender; it has to sprout into your outer
life. It is the law.
But here is the hardest part of this whole process: making or
taking the time for your precious self to actually do it.
That’s it. We are divine creators. It is what we do when we are
inspired and pressed to know more. But you and I are also crea-
tures of habit. We develop habits for everything. We possess three
brains that allow us to evolve from knowledge to experience to wis-
dom. To make whatever we learn implicit through the repetition
of experience, we can teach the body to become the mind—that is
our definition of a habit.
The problem is that we have developed habits that limit
our true greatness. The survival emotions, which are so addic-
tive, cause us to live with limitation, feeling separate from the
Source, and forget we are creators. In fact, the corresponding states
of mind that correlate with stress truly are the reasons why we
are controlled by our emotions, live by a lower denominator of
energy, and are enslaved by a set of beliefs rooted in fear. These
301
so-called normal psychological states have been accepted by most

as ordinary and common. They are the real “altered states” of con-
sciousness.
Hence, I want to emphasize that anxiety, depression, frustra-
tion, anger, guilt, pain, worry, and sadness—the emotions regu-
larly expressed by billions of people—are why the masses live life
knocked out of balance and altered from the true self. And maybe
the supposed altered states of consciousness achieved in medita-
tion during true mystical moments are actually “natural” human
states of consciousness that we should strive to live by on a regular
basis. I accept that contention as my truth.
It’s time to wake up and to be the living example of the truth.
It’s not enough to espouse these understandings; it’s time to live
them, demonstrate them, and be “at cause” in all areas of our lives.
When you and I “in-body” such ideals as truth, and make them a
habit, then they innately become part of us.
Since we are wired to create habits, why not make true great-
ness, compassion, genius, ingenuity, empowerment, love, aware-
ness, generosity, healing, quantum manifestation, and divinity our
new habits? To remove the layers of personal emotions we decided
to memorize as our identity; to shed our selfish limitations that
we have given such power to; to abandon false beliefs and percep-
tions about the nature of reality and self; to overcome our neural
habituations of destructive traits that repeatedly undermine our
evolution; and to relinquish the attitudes that have kept us from
knowing who we really are . . . are all part of finding the true self.
There is an aspect of the self that is a benevolent being who
waits behind all of those veils. This is who we are when we are not
feeling threatened; fearing loss; trying to please everyone; racing
to succeed and scrambling to get to the top at any cost; regretting
the past; or feeling inferior, hopeless, desperate, or greedy, just to
name a few. When we overcome, and remove whatever stands in
the way of our infinite power and self, we are demonstrating a
noble deed, not only for ourselves but for all of humanity.
302
Afterword
So the greatest habit you will ever break is the habit of being
yourself, and the greatest habit you will ever create is the habit of
expressing the divine through you. That is when you inhabit your
true nature and identity. It is to inhabit self.
}}}}
303
A PPE NDI X A
BODY- PART INDUCTION

(Week One)
Now, can you become aware of the space that your lips occupy in
space, and can you sense the volume of space that your lips are in . . .
in space. . . .1
And now can you sense the space that your jaw occupies in space
. . . can you notice the volume of space that your entire jaw is in . . .
in space. . . .
And now can you feel the space that your cheeks occupy in space
. . . and the density of space that your cheeks take up . . . in space. . . .
And now notice the space that your nose occupies in space. Can you
sense the volume of space that your entire nose is in . . . in space. . . .
And now, can you sense the space that your eyes occupy in
space, and can you feel the volume of space that your eyes are in . . .
in space. . . .
And now can you pay attention to the space that your entire fore-
head occupies in space, all the way to your temples. . . . Can you sense
the volume of space that your entire forehead is in . . . in space. . . .
And now can you notice the space that your entire face occupies in
space. Can you sense the density of space that your entire face is in . .
. in space. . . .
And now can you notice the space that your ears occupy in space.
Can you sense the volume of space that your ears are in . . . in space. . . .
305
And now can you feel the space that your entire head occupies in
space. Can you sense the volume of space that your entire head is in
. . . in space. . . .
And now can you notice the volume of space that the column of
your neck occupies in space. And can you sense the density of space that
your entire neck is in . . . in space. . . .
And now can you notice the space that your entire upper torso oc-
cupies in space; the density of space taken up by your chest, your ribs,
your heart and lungs, all the way to your back and shoulder blades to
your shoulders. . . . Can you sense the volume of space that your entire
upper torso is in . . . in space. . . .
And now can you become conscious of the space that your entire
upper limbs occupy in space, and the weight of space that your upper
extremities are in . . . in space . . . your shoulders, your arms, to your
elbows and forearms; the density of your wrists and hands. Can you
notice the weight of space that your entire limbs are in . . . in space. . . .
And now can you sense the volume of space that your entire lower
torso occupies in space . . . your abdomen, your flanks, to your ribs, all
the way to your lower spine and back. . . . Can you sense the volume of
space that your entire lower torso is in . . . in space. . . .
And now can you feel the density of space that your entire lower
extremities occupy in space . . . to your buttocks, to your groin, to your
thighs, the density of space of your knees, the weight of your shins and
your calves. Can you notice the volume of space that your ankles and
feet down to your toes—your entire lower limbs—occupy . . . in space.
...
And now can you notice the space that your entire body occupies
in space. . . . Can you sense the density of space that your entire body
is in . . . in space. . . .
And now can you sense the space around your body in space,
and can you notice the volume of space that the space around your
body takes up in space, and can you sense the space that that space is
in . . . in space. . . .
And now can you sense the space that this entire room occupies in
space. And can you sense the volume of space that this room takes up,
in all of space. . . .
And now can you sense the space that all of space takes up in space,
and the volume of space that that space is in . . . in space. . . .
}}}}
306
A PPE NDI X B
WATER- RISING
INDUCTION
(Week One)
Your job in this induction is to completely surrender into your

body, let the warm water relax your tissues, and allow yourself to
feel consumed by this liquid. I recommend that you sit up in a
chair with your feet flat on the floor, hands resting on your knees.
Imagine warm water beginning to rise in the room . . . first, as it

covers your feet and ankles, feel the warmth of your feet as they’re im-
mersed in the water. . . .
And allow the water to move higher now, up past your calves and
shins, to right below your knees; and feel the weight of your legs from
your feet to your calves, underwater. . . .
Let yourself relax as the water reaches your knees and rises over
your thighs. . . . As it surrounds your thighs, feel your hands immersed
in this warm water . . . feel the warmth consume your wrists and
forearms. . . .
Now become aware of the soothing water as it encircles your but-
tocks, your groin, and your inner thighs. . . .
And as the water rises all the way up to your waist, feel it sub-
merge your forearms and elbows. . . .
307
As the warm water continues to climb to your solar plexus, notice

it as it moves halfway up your arms. . . .
Now, sense the weight of your body, immersed up to your rib cage
under the warm liquid, and feel it consuming your arms. . . .
And now allow the water to encircle your chest and move across
your shoulder blades. . . .
As the water rises all the way up to your neck, allow it to cover
your shoulders . . . and from your neck down, feel the weight and den-
sity of your body, immersed under this warm liquid. . . .
Now, as the water moves up past your neck, feel the column of
your neck, up to your chin, immersed underwater. . . .
And allow the soothing water to move up over your lips and
around the circumference of the back of your head . . . as it rises over
your upper lip and over your nose, relax and let it consume you, so that
the warmth of the water is now right below your eyes. . . .
Allow the water to rise above your eyes, and feel everything from
your eyes down immersed in this warm liquid. Feel it move up around
your forehead, above the crown of your head; and as the circumference
gets smaller and smaller, allow it to move above your head. . . .
And now surrender into this warm, relaxing water and allow your-
self to feel your body in its weightlessness, embraced by this water. Al-
low your body to feel the density of itself, immersed in this liquid. . . .
Feel the volume of the water around your body and the space
that your body is in, underwater. Let your awareness take in the en-
tire room, submerged underwater. Sense the space that is filled by the
room, consumed by warm water . . . and for a few moments, just feel
your body floating in that space. . . .
}}}}
308
A PPE NDI X C
GUIDED MEDITATION:
PUT TING IT ALL
TOGETHER
(Weeks Two Through Four)
You may wish to lead off this meditation with the Body-Part
Induction in Appendix A, the Water-Rising Induction in Appen-
dix B, or any other method you have used in the past or devised
on your own.
Close your eyes and take a few deep, slow breaths to relax your
mind and body. Breathe in through your nose and out through your
mouth. Make your breaths long, slow, and steady. Rhythmically inhale
and exhale until you move into the present. When you are in the mo-
ment, you are entering a world of possibility. . . .
Now, there is a powerful intelligence within you that is giving you
life, which loves you so much. When your will matches its will, when
your mind matches its mind, when your love for life matches its love for
you, it always responds. It will move in you and all around you, and you
will see evidence in your life as a result of your efforts. To be greater than
your environment, to be greater than the conditions in your life, to be
309
greater than the feelings that are memorized in the body, to think greater
than the body, to be greater than time . . . means that you are tugging
on the garment of the divine. Your destiny, then, is a reflection of, a
co-creation with, a greater mind. Love yourself enough to do this. . . .
Week Two
Recognizing. Now, you cannot create a new future while holding

on to the emotions of the past. What was the emotion that you wanted
to unmemorize? Remember what that emotion feels like in your body.
. . . And recognize the familiar state of mind that is driven by that
emotion. . . .
Admitting. It’s time to turn to the power within you, introduce

yourself to it, and tell it what you want to change about yourself. Begin
to admit to it who you have been, and what you have been hiding. In
your mind, talk to it. Remember that it is real. It already knows you. It
doesn’t judge you. It only loves. . . .
Say to it, “Universal consciousness within me and all around me,
I have been ________, and I truly want to change from this limited
state of being. . . .”
Declaring. It’s time to free the body from the mind, to close the
gap between how you appear and who you are, to liberate your energy.
Release your body from the familiar emotional bonds, which keep you
connected to every thing, every place, and everyone in your past and
present reality. It is the moment to free up your energy. I want you to
say the emotion you want to change, out loud, and liberate it from
your body as well as your environment. Say it now. . . .
Surrendering. And now it’s time to surrender this state of being

to a greater mind and to ask it to resolve this in a way that is right
for you. Can you relinquish control to a greater authority that already
has the answers? Surrender to this infinite mind and understand that
this intelligence is absolutely real. It only waits in admiration and in
willingness. It only responds when you ask for help. Surrender your
limitation to an all-knowing intelligence. Simply open the door, give
it up, and let go completely. Let it take your limitation from you. “In-
finite mind, I give you my ________. Take it from me and resolve this
emotion into a greater sense of wisdom. Free me from the chains of my
past.” Now, just feel how you would feel if you knew this mind was
taking this memorized emotion from you. . . .
310
Appendix C
Week Three
Observing and Reminding. Now let’s make sure that no

thought, no behavior, no habit that causes you to return back to the
old self goes unnoticed by you. To make sure, let’s become conscious of
those unconscious states of mind and body—how did you used to think
when you felt that way? What did you say to yourself? What voice did
you believe that you no longer want to accept as your reality? Observe
those thoughts. . . .
Begin to separate yourself from the program. How did you once
behave? How did you speak? Become conscious of those unconscious
states to such an extent that they would never go unnoticed by you
again. . . .
To begin to objectify the subjective mind, to begin to observe the
program, means you are no longer the program. Awareness is your
goal. Remind yourself who you no longer want to be, how you no lon-
ger want to think, how you no longer want to behave, and how you
no longer want to feel. Become familiar with all aspects of the old
personality, and just observe. With firm intention, make a choice to
no longer be that person, and let the energy of your decision become a
memorable experience. . . .
Redirecting. Now it’s time to play the “Change Game.” I want

you to imagine three scenarios in your life where you could start to feel
like the old self again, and when you do, I want you to say “Change!”
out loud. First, imagine that it is morning and you are in the shower,
and as you are getting ready for your day, all of a sudden you notice
that familiar feeling just starting to come up. And the moment you
notice it, you say “Change!”—that’s right, you change it. Because liv-
ing by that emotion is not loving to you. And it is no use signaling
the same genes in the same way. And nerve cells that no longer fire
together, no longer wire together. You control that. . . .
Next, I want you to see yourself in the middle of the day. You are
driving down the road, and suddenly, that familiar feeling that drives
those familiar thoughts starts to come up, and what do you do? You
say, “Change!” That’s right, you change. Because the rewards of being
healthy and happy are so much more important than returning back
to the old self. And by the way, living by that emotion has never been
loving to you. And every time you change your state, you know that
nerve cells that no longer fire together, no longer wire together, and you
no longer turn on the same genes in the same ways. . . .
Now I want you to play the Change Game one more time. I want
you to see yourself getting ready for bed, and you are pulling the covers
back, and as you start to get into bed, you notice that familiar feeling
coming up, which is tempting you to behave as the old personality, and
311
what do you do? You say, “Change!” That’s right. Because nerve cells
that no longer fire together, no longer wire together. Signaling that gene
in that way is not loving to you, and nobody and nothing is worth it.
You control that. . . .
Week Four
Creating. Now, what is the greatest expression of yourself that

you can be? How would a great person think and act? How would such
an individual live? How would he or she love? What does greatness
feel like? . . .
I want you to move into a state of being. It is time to change your
energy and broadcast a whole new electromagnetic signature. When
you change your energy, you change your life. Let the thought become
the experience, and let that experience produce an elevated emotion
so that your body begins to emotionally believe that the future you is
already living now. . . .
Allow yourself to turn on new genes in new ways; signal the body
emotionally ahead of the actual event; allow yourself to fall in love
with the new ideal; open your heart and begin to recondition your body
to a new mind. . . .
Let the inward experience become a mood, then a temperament,
and finally a new personality. . . .
Move into a new state of being. . . How would you feel if you were
this person? You can’t get up as the same person who sat down. You
have to feel so much gratitude that your body begins to change ahead
of the actual event, and accept that the new ideal already is you. . . .
Become it. . . .
To be empowered—to be free, to be unlimited, to be creative, to
be genius, to be divine—that is who you are. . . .
Once you feel this way, memorize this feeling; remember this
feeling. This is who you really are. . . .
Now let go and release it into the field for a moment; just let
go. . . .
Rehearsing. Now, like those piano players who changed their

brains and the finger exercisers who changed their bodies, let’s do it
again. Can you create your new self out of nothing one more time? . . .
Let’s fire and wire a new mind and recondition the body to a new
emotion. Become familiar with a new state of mind and body. What
is the greatest expression of your self? Allow yourself to begin to think
like this ideal again. . . .
What would you say to yourself, how would you walk, how would
you breathe, how would you move, how would you live, what would
312
Appendix C
you feel? Allow yourself to emotionally feel like this new self, so much
so that you begin to move into a new state of being. . . .
It is time to change your energy again and remember what it feels
like to be this person. Expand your heart. . . .
Who do you want to be when you open your eyes? You are signaling
new genes in new ways. Feel empowered once again. Move into a new
state of being; a new state of being is a new personality; a new personal-
ity creates a new personal reality. . . .
This is where you create a new destiny. From this elevated state of
mind and body, it is time to command matter as a quantum observer
of your new reality. Feel invincible, powerful, inspired, and overjoyed.
...
From this new state of being, form a picture of some event you
want to experience and let the image become the blueprint of your
future. Observe that reality and allow the particles, as waves of prob-
ability, to collapse into an event called an experience in your life. See it,
command it, hold it, and then move to the next picture. . . .
Let your energy now become entangled to that destiny. That future
event has to find you because you created it with your own energy.
Let yourself go and create the future you want in certainty, trust, and
knowingness. . . .
Do not analyze; do not try to figure out how it is going to hap-
pen. It is not your job to control the outcome. It is your task to create,
and leave the details to a greater mind. As you see your future as the
observer, simply bless your life with your own energy. . . .
From a state of gratitude, be one with your destiny from a new
state of mind and body. Give thanks for a new life. . . .
Feel how you will feel when these things manifest in your life,
because living in a state of gratitude is living in a state of receivership.
Feel like your prayers are already answered. . . .
Finally, it is time to turn to that power within you and ask it for
a sign in your life: if today you emulated this greater mind as a creator
who is observing all of life into form, and you made contact with it,
and it has been observing your efforts and intentions, then it should
show cause in your life. Know that it is real, that it exists, and that you
now have a two-way communication with it. Ask that this sign from
the quantum field come in a way that you would least expect, that
surprises you and leaves no doubt that this new experience has come
from universal mind, so that you are inspired to do it again. I want you
now to ask for a sign. . . .
And now move your awareness back to a new body in a new en-
vironment and in a whole new line of time. And when you are ready,
bring your awareness back up to Beta. Then you can open your eyes.
}}}}
313
ENDNOTES
Introduction
1. Bohr, Niels, “On the constitution of atoms and molecules.” Philosophical

Magazine, 26: 1–24 (1913). If you really want to split the hairs of the subatomic
world, the volume of an atom (roughly 1 angstrom, or 10−10 meters in diameter)
is about 15 orders of magnitude larger than the volume of the nucleus (roughly
1 femtometer, or 10−15 meters in diameter)—meaning the atom is roughly
99.9999999999999 percent empty space. Although the electron cloud around the
nucleus accounts for most of the atom’s area, this cloud is mostly empty space,
and the electrons within it are minuscule to begin with. The highly dense nucleus
contains most of the mass of the atom. The relative size of an electron in refer-
ence to the nucleus would be like the volume of a pea compared to an SUV, and
the perimeter of the electron cloud relative to the SUV would be about the size of
Washington State.
Chapter 1
1. For example, see Amit Goswami, Ph.D., The Self-Aware Universe (New York: Jer-
emy P. Tarcher, 1993). Also, the “Copenhagen interpretation” of quantum theory
developed by Niels Bohr, Werner Heisenberg, Wolfgang Pauli, and others says,
among other things, that “reality is identical with the totality of observed phe-
nomena (which means reality does not exist in the absence of observation).” See:
Will Keepin, “David Bohm,” available at: http://www.vision.net.au/~apaterson/
science/david_bohm.htm.
2. Leibovici, Leonard, M.D., “Effects of remote, retroactive intercessory prayer on

outcomes in patients with bloodstream infection: randomised controlled trial.”
BMJ (British Medical Journal), vol. 323: 1450–1451 (22 December 2001).
3. McCraty, Rollin, Mike Atkinson, and Dana Tomasino, “Modulation of DNA

conformation by heart-focused intention.” HeartMath Research Center, Institute
of HeartMath, Boulder Creek, CA, publication no. 03-008 (2003).
4. Christ Returns—Speaks His Truth (Bloomington, IN: AuthorHouse, 2007).
315
Chapter 2
1. Hebb, D. O., The Organization of Behavior: A Neuropsychological Theory (Mahwah,

NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc., 2002).
2. Pascual-Leone, A., et al., “Modulation of muscle responses evoked by trans-

cranial magnetic stimulation during the acquisition of new fine motor skills.”
Journal of Neurophysiology, vol. 74(3): 1037–1045 (1995).
Chapter 3
1. Szegedy-Maszak, Marianne, “Mysteries of the Mind: Your unconscious is mak-

ing your everyday decisions.” U.S. News & World Report (28 February 2005). Also
see: John G. Kappas, Professional Hypnotism Manual (Knoxville, TN: Panorama
Publishing Company, 1999). My first exposure to this concept was in 1981 when
I studied hypnosis with John Kappas at the Hypnosis Motivation Institute. Back
then, he stated the subconscious was 90 percent of the mind. Recently, scientists
are estimating that it’s about 95 percent. Either way, it is still a lot.
2. Sapolsky, Robert M., Why Zebras Don’t Get Ulcers (New York: Henry Holt and
Company, 2004). Sapolsky is a leading expert on stress and its effects on the
brain and body. Also see: Joe Dispenza, Evolve Your Brain: The Science of Changing
Your Mind (Deerfield Beach, FL: Health Communications, Inc., 2007). In addi-
tion, emotional addiction is a concept taught at Ramtha’s School of Enlighten-
ment; see JZK Publishing, a division of JZK, Inc., the publishing house for RSE, at:
http://jzkpublishing.com or http://www.ramtha.com.
3. Church, Dawson, Ph.D., The Genie in Your Genes: Epigenetic Medicine and the New
Biology of Intention (Santa Rosa, CA: Elite Books, 2007).
4. Lipton, Bruce, Ph.D., The Biology of Belief (Carlsbad, CA: Hay House, 2009).
5. Rabinoff, Michael, Ending the Tobacco Holocaust (Santa Rosa, CA: Elite Books, 2007).
6. Church, Dawson, Ph.D., The Genie in Your Genes: Epigenetic Medicine and the New
Biology of Intention (Santa Rosa, CA: Elite Books, 2007).
7. Murakami, Kazuo, Ph.D., The Divine Code of Life: Awaken Your Genes and Dis-
cover Hidden Talents (Hillsboro, OR: Beyond Words Publishing, 2006).
8. Yue, G., and K. J. Cole, “Strength increases from the motor program: compari-
son of training with maximal voluntary and imagined muscle contractions.” Jour-
nal of Neurophysiology, vol. 67(5): 1114–1123 (1992).
9. Cohen, Philip, “Mental gymnastics increase bicep strength.” New Scientist (21
November 2001).
316
Endnotes
Chapter 4
1. Dispenza, Joe, Evolve Your Brain: The Science of Changing Your Mind (Deerfield
Beach, FL: Health Communications, Inc., 2007).
2. Goleman, Daniel, Emotional Intelligence (New York: Bantam Books, 1995). See
also: Daniel Goleman and the Dalai Lama, Destructive Emotions: How Can We Over-
come Them? (New York: Bantam Books, 2004).
Chapter 5
1. Bentov, Itzhak, Stalking the Wild Pendulum: On the Mechanics of Consciousness

(Rochester, VT: Destiny Books, 1988). See also: Ramtha, A Beginner’s Guide to Creat-
ing Reality (Yelm, WA: JZK Publishing, 2005). The quantum model of reality states
that every “thing” or “no thing” is waves of information vibrating at different
frequencies. It makes sense, then, that the slower the vibration, the more dense
matter is, and vice versa. The emotions of stress lower our vibrations to be more
matter and less energy.
2. Wallace, B. Alan, Ph.D., The Attention Revolution: Unlocking the Power of the
Focused Mind (Boston: Wisdom Publications, Inc., 2006).
3. Robertson, Ian, Ph.D., Mind Sculpture: Unlocking Your Brain’s Untapped Potential
(New York: Bantam Books, 2000). See also: Andrew Newberg, Eugene D’Aquili,
and Vince Rause, Why God Won’t Go Away: Brain Science and the Biology of Belief
(New York: Ballantine Books, 2001).
4. From a conversation with Rolin McCraty, Ph.D., Director of Research, Heart-

Math Research Center, Boulder Creek, California, in October 2008 about his
research relating to the movement of energy from the body to the brain through
the heart during coherence. See: Rollin McCraty, et al., “The coherent heart:
heart-brain interactions, psychophysiological coherence, and the emergence of
system-wide order.” Integral Review, vol. 5(2) (December 2009).
Chapter 6
1. Dispenza, Joe, Evolve Your Brain: The Science of Changing Your Mind (Deerfield
Beach, FL: Health Communications, Inc., 2007).
Chapter 8
1. Laibow, Rima, “Medical Applications of NeuroFeedback,” in Introduction to

Quantitative EEG and Neurofeedback, by James Evans and Andrew Abarbane (San
Diego: Academic Press, 1999). See also: Bruce Lipton, Ph.D., The Biology of Belief
(Carlsbad, CA: Hay House, 2009).
317
2. Fehmi, Les, Ph.D., and Jim Robbins, The Open-Focus Brain: Harnessing the Power
of Attention to Heal Mind and Body (Boston: Trumpeter Books, 2007).
3. Kappas, John G., Ph.D., Professional Hypnotism Manual (Knoxville, TN: Panora-
ma Publishing Company, 1999).
4. Murphy, Michael, and Steven Donovan, The Physical and Psychological Effects
of Meditation: A Review of Contemporary Research with a Comprehensive Bibliography,
1931–1996, 2nd edition (Petaluma, CA: Institute of Noetic Sciences, 1997).
5. Lutz, Antoine, et al., “Long-term meditators self-induce high-amplitude gamma

synchrony during mental practice.” PNAS (Proceedings of the National Academy of
Sciences), vol. 101(46): 16369–16373 (16 November 2004). Also, I had a wonderful
conversation with Richard Davidson in April 2008 at the Mayo Clinic during the
“Mind and Life” conference in Rochester, Minnesota.
Chapter 10
1. Fehmi, Les, Ph.D., and Jim Robbins, The Open-Focus Brain: Harnessing the Power
of Attention to Heal Mind and Body (Boston: Trumpeter Books, 2007).
Appendix A
1. In the Body-Part Induction, there is a reason why I say the words in space re-
peatedly: According to EEG monitoring that took place while subjects were led
through guided meditation, the subjects transitioned into the Alpha brain-wave
state when they were guided to become aware of the space that their bodies oc-
cupy in space and the volume that that space takes up in space. That wording
and those instructions produced functional differences in subjects’ brain-wave
patterns that were immediately noticeable. See: Fehmi, Les, Ph.D., and Jim Rob-
bins, The Open-Focus Brain: Harnessing the Power of Attention to Heal Mind and Body
(Boston: Trumpeter Books, 2007).
}}}}
318
INDEX
Note: Page numbers in italics denote illustrations.
Actin protein, 76, 79 high, 191–197

Adrenal gland, 56, 57, 60, 98 low, 191
Alpha waves during meditation, 196, 197, 205–206, 207,
in adults, 188, 190 227–228
during Body-Part Induction, 233 mid-range, 191
in children, 185, 187, 201 mind/thoughts and, 195–197
coherence of, 234 qualities of, 184
during meditation, 188, 205–206, 207, 223, stress and, 192–194, 197
231, 232 subconscious mind and, 199
qualities of, 184, 185 survival mode and, 192, 193, 195, 235
Atoms, 8, 9, 10, 11 time and, 197
Autonomic nervous system, 86–87, 88, 98 Body. See also Body-mind; Body-Part Induction
Beta waves and, 196, 197
Being, state of in creative mode, 119
affecting health, 75 emotions and, 58, 60–62
body and, 18, 24, 58–59, 143, 144, 179–180 glands in, 56, 60
brain and, 134–135, 136 going beyond, 94–95, 106, 204, 276
cerebellum and, 130 habits and, 62–63
consciousness and, 294, 295–296 hormones influencing, 54, 55, 56–57
in creative mode, 115, 134–136, 213, ligands’ role in, 56
281–282 during meditation, 205, 226–227, 228–229
desires in, 295–296 memories running, 62–63, 64
electromagnetic field and, 20–21, 22, 312 mind/thoughts and, 71, 82–83, 87, 133–
emotions and, 58, 70, 89, 90, 117 134, 247
identity in, 143, 277, 280, 281, 282–283 state of being and, 18, 24, 58–59, 143, 144,
maintaining, 289, 290–291, 292–293 179–180
meditation and, 141–144, 143, 312 stress affecting, 99–102, 107–108, 192
memories and, 59, 284, 290 subconscious mind and, 62, 85, 88, 233
mental rehearsal and, 293 in survival mode, 97, 101, 119
mind/thoughts and, 18, 24, 58–59, 143, Body-mind. See also Body; Mind/thoughts
144, 179–180 emotions in, 273
neurochemicals influencing, 58 meditation and, 208
progression of, 139, 140 memories of, 221
quantum field and, 21, 22, 26 in past, 88
reality in, 143 resistance of, 205
Beta waves subconscious, 62, 71, 268, 281
in adults, 187, 188, 190, 202 Body-Part Induction, 233–235, 236, 305–306.
body and, 196, 197 See also Body
during Body-Part Induction, 233 Brain
in children, 186, 187 cerebellum in, 126, 129–130, 136, 138, 139,
environment and, 195, 196, 197 143, 233
frequency of, 190 changing, 50–51, 52
319
chemicals in. See Neurochemicals quantum field and, 26, 32, 102, 110
environment and, 41–42 state of being and, 294, 295–296
frontal lobe in. See Frontal lobe time and, 32
hardwiring of, 45–46, 51, 52, 61, 113–114 universal, 29, 245, 255, 310
ligands’ role in, 56 universal intelligence and, 28–29, 30
limbic/emotional, 126, 128–129, 136, 139, Cortisol, 57
143 Cosmology, 4
meditation and, xxii, 184 Creative mode
memories and, 43, 128, 136–137 body in, 119
neocortex in, 126, 127, 136, 139, 143, 185, consciousness and, 110, 296
188, 191 emotions in, 115, 117
neural networks in, 127, 128, 132, 133, 225, frontal lobe and, 110–111, 112–114,
226, 293 115–116
neuroplasticity of, 125 identity in, 118, 280–283
state of being and, 134–135, 136 metacognition and, 111–112
three functions of, 126, 131–133, 136, 137, mind/thoughts in, 112–114, 115, 119
139, 146, 254, 301 state of being in, 115, 134–136, 213,
waves. See Brain waves 281–282
Brain waves. See also Specific waves Curie, Marie, 47
changing, 231
coherence of, 22–23, 193, 196–197, 198, Delta waves, 184, 185, 187, 190, 207
208, 209, 233 Descartes, René, 6–7
electromagnetic field of, 185, 196 Digestive gland, 56
energy and, 8, 12–13 DNA, 19–20, 54, 74, 79
function of, 13, 14
Edison, Thomas, 47
Cells EEG (electroencephalograph), 184, 186, 234
activities of, 53–54 Ego. See Identity
dysregulation of, 78 Einstein, Albert, 8, 11, 251
muscle, 76 Elastin protein, 76, 79
nerve, 55, 183, 184 Electromagnetic field
receptor sites on, 53–54, 64, 66, 68, 162 of brain waves, 185, 196
skin, 76 emotions and, 20–21
stomach, 76 measuring, 184
Collagen protein, 76, 79 meditation affecting, 144, 291, 295
Collapse of wave function, 13, 14 mind/thoughts and, 20–21
Conditioned response, 88 nerve cells producing, 184
Conscious mind potentials, 21
analytical/critical aspect of, 202, 203–204 projecting strong, 23
aspects of, 202–203 quantum field and, 21, 144, 145
body and, 71, 87 state of being and, 20–21, 22, 312
in children, 186, 202 time and, 21
meditation and, 204 Electrons/particles
memories and, 61 behavior of, 12–13
memorized emotions and, 129 cloud, 10
neocortex and, 126, 127, 185 collapse of the wave function and, 13, 14
in present moment, 88 disappearing, 12–13
subconscious behavior and, 62, 63, 64, 65, observer affecting, 14
281 potential of, 14–16
Theta waves and, 189 Elevated emotions
Consciousness body/mind aligning for, 20, 134
affecting energy, 15 frequency of, 103, 107, 117
creative mode and, 110, 296 of future experiences, 93, 146
of intention, 246 gratitude and, 26
love and, 29 neurochemicals and, 241
mind/thoughts and, 43
objective/subjective aspects of, 29
320
Index
Emotions causing disease, 75

addictions and, 104–105, 109, 135, 148, genes and, 76–77, 79–80
150, 160–163, 161, 269 going beyond, 47, 49, 51, 94–95, 110, 204
affecting genes, 78–82, 100, 107, 112, 118, habits and, 46
128, 269, 312 identity and, 43, 148, 151, 159
Beta waves and, 195 meditation and, 205, 225–226
body and, 58, 60–62 memories and, 41–42
Body-Part Induction technique and, 233 mind/thoughts and, 42, 43, 44
changing, 40, 59, 70, 266 quantum field and, 44, 47
coherence and, 23–24, 144, 145 stress and, 99–100
confronting, 156 survival mode and, 97, 101
in creative mode, 115, 117 Enzymes, 76
electromagnetic field and, 20–21 Epigenetics, 74, 77–78
elevated. See Elevated emotions
energy and, 157, 158, 248 Fight-or-flight response, xxi, 98, 99, 100, 104.
gratitude and, 25–26 See also Stress
hormones influencing, 55 Free will, 7, 29, 78, 251
identity traits and, 89, 90 Frontal lobe
ignoring, 152–155 creative mode and, 110–111, 112–114,
influencing body, 58, 60–62 115–116
influencing genes, 78–82 metacognition and, 111–112, 238
meditation and, 265–269, 270, 311 mind/thoughts and, 51, 115–116, 132, 188
memories and. See Memorized emotions in neocortex, 127
mind/thoughts and, 19–20, 57–60, 58, neural networks and, 112, 113, 114, 115,
70–71, 87, 142, 179, 243–244 132, 141, 205
moods and, 89, 90 self-awareness and, 177, 179, 238, 239
negative, 29–30, 65–69, 70–71, 149–150, Future. See also Time
169, 240, 244, 263–264 creating, 182, 273
neurochemicals and, 66, 68, 71–72, 87, 107, experiencing moments of, 32, 80, 90–91,
128, 212, 249 93, 145, 146
quantum field and, 47, 80 genes and, 77–78, 80–82, 179
refractory period of, 89, 90, 150, 152 mental rehearsal influencing, 50–52, 83
sharing, 156–158, 157 past becoming, 25, 43, 91, 92–93
state of being and, 58, 70, 89, 90, 117 resistance of, 73–74
subconscious, 290 stress affecting, 91, 93, 99, 100, 101
survival mode and, 102–103, 105, 240–243 visions and, 47–49, 93–94, 146
temperament and, 89, 90
transparency in, 294 Gamma waves, 184, 190
unconscious, 87 Gandhi, Mahatma, 47, 48, 49
unmemorizing, 164–165, 166, 167, Genes
169–170, 174, 273 behavior-dependent, 77
Energy changing, 77–79
Albert Einstein view of, 8 creating disease, 74–75, 108–109
atoms and, 10 deterioration of, 79
brain waves and, 8, 12–13 emotions/thoughts affecting, 78–82, 100,
closing the gap and, 166 107, 112, 118, 128, 269, 312
consciousness affecting, 15 environment and, 76–77, 79–80
emotions and, 157, 158, 248 epigenetics and, 74, 77–78, 266
Isaac Newton view of, 7 experience-dependent, 77
meditation and, 291 future and, 77–78, 80–82, 179
observation affecting, 14, 18, 39 meditation affecting, 144, 265, 283,
quantum field and, 27–28, 44 311–312
releasing, 167, 169–170, 183, 210, 248, 249, mental rehearsal affecting, 278, 279
284 modifications of, 76–77, 134
Environment producing proteins, 76–77
Beta waves and, 195, 196, 197 quantum field and, 83
brain and, 41–42 stress and, 77, 81, 100
321
God, 7, 155, 246 Joan of Arc, 47, 49

Gratitude, 25–26, 36, 118, 146, 313 Journaling
Habits on automatic thoughts, 261–262
addictions and, 263 description of, 223, 224
automatic, 92 on life review, 239
body and, 62–63 on negative emotions/behavior, 240, 244,
changing, 51, 69 263–264
creating, 45, 61–62 on new identity, 274, 275
environment and, 46 on self-awareness, 247–248
of mind/thoughts, 260–264 on surrendering, 255
positive/negative identification and,
200–201, 203 King, Martin Luther, Jr., 47
Healing, 19–20, 210, 298 Knowledge, 127, 133–134, 137, 138, 139, 184,
Health, 74–75, 78, 106–109, 194, 210 215, 288
Heart coherence, 19
HeartMath Research Center, 19, 20 Leibovici, Leonard, 17
Hebb’s law, 45, 124, 223, 266 Life review, 237, 238, 239
Hormones, 54, 55, 56–57, 100, 102, 116 Ligands, 54, 55, 56
Hypnosis, 231 Love, 29, 103, 246, 295
Hypothalamus, 55, 68
Identity Matter
addictions and, 160–163, 161 Albert Einstein view of, 8
changing, 70, 211–213 atoms and, 9–10
creating reality, 47, 212–213, 242, 280–283 mind/thoughts and, 3, 6–7, 44
in creative mode, 118, 280–283 observation affecting, 14, 18, 39
cultivating new, 180–181 particles and. See Particles
environment and, 43, 148, 151, 159 quantum field and, 27–28
façade of, 149, 151–152, 156, 248 René Descartes view of, 7
formation of, 61 Meditation
gap. See Identity gap admitting problems and, 245, 310
journaling on new, 274, 275 affecting electromagnetic field, 144, 291,
after life, 159 295
self-awareness and, 111–112 affecting genes, 144, 265, 283, 311–312
selfishness of, 105–106 Alpha waves during, 188, 205–206, 207,
in state of being, 143, 277, 280, 281, 223, 227, 231, 232
282–283 Beta waves during, 196, 197, 205–206, 207,
survival mode affecting, 101–105 227–228
traits, 89, 90, 107, 152 body during, 205, 226–227, 228–229
body-mind and, 208
Identity gap brain and, xxii, 184
addictions and, 163–165 coherent mind in. See Mind/thoughts,
closing, 165–170, 167, 172–173, 248 coherent
environment supporting, 148–149 conscious mind and, 204
midlife crisis and, 161 declaration step in, 248–250, 256, 270, 310
negative emotions and, 149–150 distractions during, 226
Induction technique, 223, 224, 231–236, 256 energy and, 291
Intention environment and, 205, 225–226
consciousness of, 246 guided, 223, 224, 235, 256, 270, 283–286,
emotions and, 83, 212 309–313
experiment using, 19–20 heart opening for, 145
meditation and, 276 induction technique and, 223, 224, 231–
mind/thoughts and, 19–20, 49 236, 256, 270, 286, 305–308
process of, 25, 139 intention and, 276
success of, 280 mental rehearsal and, 141, 283–284,
312–313
mind/thoughts during, 210, 213–214, 223,
228
322
Index
monks practicing, 213–214 experiences and, 49–52, 82

observing emotions/thoughts and, 260– meditation and, 141, 283–284, 312–313
264, 270, 311 of new identity, 273, 313
preparation for, 223, 225–229 new neural networks from, 52
process of, xxiv, 141, 180, 182–184, 208 process of, 49–52, 278–279
purpose of, xxiii, 203–204, 219, 292 state of being and, 293
quantum field and, 144, 210 Metacognition, 111–112, 238, 272
recognizing issues step in, 237–244, 256, Midbrain. See Brain, limbic/emotional
270, 310 Midlife crisis, 153–155, 161
redirecting emotions/thoughts and, 265– Mind/thoughts. See also Body-mind
269, 270, 311 analytical/critical, 201, 202–204, 233
remembering negative emotions/thoughts, Beta waves and, 195–197
264–265, 270, 311 body and, 71, 82–83, 87, 133–134, 247
self-awareness step in, 245–248, 256 change and, 34–35, 40, 124
self-observation and, 176, 178 coherence of. See Mind/thoughts, coherent
state of being and, 141–144, 143, 312 conscious. See Conscious mind
subconscious mind and, 204 consciousness and, 43
success in, 143–144, 292 consequences of, 4, 6
surrendering in, 251–256, 257, 270, 310 creating reality, 3, 4, 42, 45, 47–48
Theta waves during, 205–206, 207, 227, 231 in creative mode, 112–114, 115, 119
time and, 206–207, 227–228 electromagnetic field and, 20–21
transformations in, 276 emotions and, 19–20, 57–60, 58, 70–71, 87,
types of, 176 142, 179, 243–244
unmemorizing emotions and, 168, environment and, 42, 43, 44
171–172, 174 frontal lobe and, 51, 115–116, 132, 188
Melatonin, 206 going beyond, 202–204, 210, 219, 228
Memories habits of, 260–264
associative, 267–268 intention and, 19–20, 49
of body-mind, 221 knowledge and, 127, 136, 137, 139
brain and, 43, 128, 136–137 matter and, 3, 6–7, 44
creating reality, 42–43, 44–45, 60–62 during meditation, 210, 213–214, 223, 228
declarative, 128, 136, 137 mental rehearsal and. See Mental rehearsal
emotions and. See Memorized emotions negative, 29–30
limbic/emotional brain and, 128 new, 273
nondeclarative, 130, 136, 137 observation of, 260–264, 270, 311
running body, 62–63, 64 outcomes and, 49
senses and, 43, 71 positive, 71
state of being and, 59, 284, 290 quantum field and, xx, 14, 47, 83
subconscious mind and, 43, 71 René Descartes view of, 7
Memorized emotions repetitive. See Mind/thoughts, repetition of
body and, 64 state of being and, 18, 24, 58–59, 143, 144,
in body-mind, 273 179–180
examples of, 108–109 stress and, 98–101
gratitude and, 146 subconscious. See Subconscious mind
in past, 71–73, 86, 88–90, 261 subjective, xx
process of, 86–88, 150 transparency in, 294
redirecting, 266 unconscious, 63, 112, 178, 182, 262, 269
state of being and, 70, 89, 117 Mind/thoughts, coherent. See also
stopping, 65, 240–243 Synchronicity
Mental rehearsal. See also Mind/thoughts, body and, 193
repetition of brain waves in, 22–23, 197
affecting genes, 278, 279 in meditation, 208–209, 210, 213–214, 223
changing brain and body, 51–52, 82–84, new reality and, 144
130, 143, 277 in quantum field, 196
creative process of, 276–277 Mind/thoughts, repetition of. See also Mental
examples of, 50, 51, 82–83, 277, 279, 312 rehearsal
323
attitude and, 243 memorized emotions and. See Memorized

body and, 61 emotions, in past
creating reality, 40–41 mind/thoughts and, 43, 44–45
Hebb’s law and, 45 quantum field and, 30, 85
neural networks and, 52, 142, 261 stress and, 99
state of being and, 142 thoughts and feelings influencing, 17–18
unconscious, 61 Pavlov’s dogs, 87–88, 267, 268
Moods, 89, 90, 107, 152, 243 Peak experiences, 94
Myosin protein, 76, 79 Personality. See Identity
Pineal gland, 56
Near-death experience, 237–238 Pituitary gland, 55, 56
Neurochemicals Prayer, 17–18
addictions and, 162 Present moment, xxi, 85, 88, 92, 93–94, 145,
affecting body and mind, 56, 57–60 284. See also Time
cause and effect of, 54 Proprioception, 233
emotions and, 66, 68, 71–72, 87, 107, 128,
212, 249 Quantum field
limbic brain and, 129 accessing, 33–34
neuropeptides and, 54, 55, 56, 57 atoms and, 10, 11
neurotransmitters and, 54, 55, 56, 57 consciousness and, 26, 32, 102, 110
state of being and, 58 electromagnetic field and, 21, 144, 145
survival mode and, 191 emotions and, 47, 80
Neuropeptides. See Neurochemicals, energy and, 27–28, 44
neuropeptides entanglement and, 16–17, 284
Neurotransmitters. See Neurochemicals, environment and, 44, 47
transmitters feedback from, 30–31, 254, 297
Newtonian universe (Isaac Newton) genes and, 83
atoms and, 9 identity creating in, 280, 283
controlling results in, 24–25, 30, 102, 144 interconnectedness in, 16–17, 26
mechanistic, 7 matter and, 27–28
quantum field and, 8, 31 meditation and, 144, 210
mind/thoughts and, xx, 14, 47, 83
Observation nonlocal connection and, 16
affecting energy and matter, 14, 18, 39 observation and, 14–15, 39, 43, 46, 109, 117
developing, 183 outcomes and, 24–26, 29–30, 31
effect, 14 present moment and, 85, 145
of emotions, 242, 270 senses and, 31–32
of future experience, 32 state of being and, 21, 22, 26
during induction technique, 235 time and, 33
during meditation, 235, 270 universal intelligence and, 26–28, 210
of mind/thoughts, 260–264, 270, 311
quantum field and, 14–15, 39, 43, 46, 109, Reality
117 changing, 4, 22, 40
of self, 111–112, 132, 166, 175–178, 195, collapse of the wave function and, 14
238. See also Self-awareness duality in, 7
Open focus, 233 future, 47–49
identity creating, 47, 212–213, 242,
Parasympathetic nervous system, 208 280–283
Particles. See Electrons/particles memories creating, 42–43, 44–45, 60–62
Past. See also Time mind/thoughts creating, 3, 4, 42, 45, 47–48
becoming future, 25, 43, 91, 92–93 nature of, 5–6, 11, 26, 32
Beta waves and, 195–196 pure potential of, 14–16
body-mind in, 88 in state of being, 143
changing, 182 Rein, Glen, 19
environment and, 76–77
324
Index
Self. See Identity Temperament, 89, 90, 107, 152, 243

Self-awareness, 111–112, 177, 179, 184, 199, Theta waves
233, 245–248, 265. See also Observation, of in adults, 189, 190
self in children, 185, 187
Senses conscious mind and, 189
going beyond, 47, 49, 245 during meditation, 205–206, 207, 227, 231
memories and, 43, 71 qualities of, 184, 185
mind/thoughts and, 201 Thoughts. See Mind/thoughts
overcoming, 34 Thymus gland, 56
quantum field and, 31–32 Thyroid gland, 56
reality and, 102, 106 Time. See also Future; Past; Present moment
time and, 33 Beta waves and, 196, 197
Serotonin, 206 consciousness and, 32
Sexual gland, 56 electromagnetic field and, 21
Spontaneous remissions, xv going beyond, 16–17, 32–33, 85, 94–95,
Stress. See also Fight-or-flight response 106, 110, 157
affecting future, 91, 93, 100, 101 gratitude and, 25–26
anticipating, 93, 101, 208 during meditation, 206–207, 227–228
Beta waves and, 192–194, 197 prayer experiment and, 17–18
genes and, 77, 81, 100 present moment overcoming, 85
health and, 75, 78, 107 quantum entanglement and, 16–17
hormones and, 102, 116 quantum field and, 33
response, 98–101, 104, 106, 117, 193 senses and, 33
in survival mode, 97 universal intelligence and, 28
Subconscious mind Transcendent moments, 94
aspects of, 203 Transparency, 167, 171, 294
associative memories in, 267
automatic programs in, 65, 124 Universal intelligence, 26–28
autonomic nervous system and, 86–87 alignment with, 29
Beta waves and, 199 consciousness and, 28–29, 30
body and, 62, 85, 88, 233 manifesting and, 35–37
cerebellum and, 126 quantum field and, 26–28, 210
in children, 185, 186, 199–200, 202 relationship with, 245–247
emotions and, 290 time and, 28
meditation and, 204
past and, 86, 88 Wallace, William, 47
Survival mode Water-Rising Induction, 235, 307–308
affecting identity, 101–105 Wisdom, 136, 138, 159, 164, 294, 301
Beta waves and, 192, 193, 195, 235
body in, 97, 101, 119
emotions and, 102–103, 105, 240–243
energy in, 267
environment and, 97, 101
mind/thoughts in, 119
stress and, 97, 101
of time, 97
Sympathetic nervous system, 98, 208
Synchronicity, 31, 210, 292. See also Mind/
thoughts, coherent
325
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
What makes our dreams become a reality (aside from the top-
ics I’ve discussed in this book) are the people we surround our-
selves with who share in our vision, who subscribe to a similar
purpose, who support us in the simplest ways, who demonstrate
accountability, and who are truly selfless. I have been fortunate
during this creative process to have wonderful and competent
people in my life. I would like to introduce you to those individu-
als and show tribute to them.
First, I want to acknowledge the folks at Hay House who have
supported me in innumerable ways. Many kind thanks to Reid
Tracy, Stacey Smith, Shannon Littrell, and Christy Salinas. I ap-
preciate your trust and confidence in me.
Next, I want to express my sincere gratitude to Alex Freemon,
my Hay House project editor, for your honest feedback, your en-
couragement, and your expertise. Thank you for being so kind
and thoughtful. To Gary Brozek and Ellen Fontana, for contribut-
ing to my work in your own ways.
I also want to thank Sara J. Steinberg, my personal editor, for
taking the journey with me again. We’ve grown together once
more. Bless your soul for being so caring, gentle, and committed.
You are a gift to me.
I want to acknowledge John Dispenza for effortlessly creating
the cover design. You always make it look so simple. To the talent-
ed Laura Schuman, for creating such beautiful graphics and art for
the interior of the book. Thanks to Bob Stewart, for also contribut-
ing to the cover art with such patience, skill, and selflessness.
326
Acknowledgments
Thank you, Paula Meyer, my amazing personal assistant,

who has the ability to juggle a thousand elephants while always
staying completely present. I appreciate your attention to detail.
Also, heartfelt thanks go to the rest of the Encephalon team. To
Chris Richard for such tender support; to Beth and Steve Wolfson,
I appreciate the way you both have aligned with my work; to
Cristina Azpilicueta, for your meticulous and refined production
skills; and to Scott Ercoliani, for always keeping a high standard
of excellence.
I also want to acknowledge the staff at my clinic. I am so hon-
ored to work with Dana Reichel, my office manager, who has a
heart as big as the moon and has grown with me in so many ways.
And among the rest of my team, a big thanks to Dr. Marvin Kuni-
kiyo, Elaina Clauson, Danielle Hall, Jenny Perez, Amy Schefer,
Bruce Armstrong, and Ermma Lehman.
I also am very inspired by the people around the world who
have embraced these ideas, from whatever source, and applied
them to their life. Thank you for repeatedly putting your mind
into possibility.
In addition, I want to extend a warm and genuine thank-you
to Dr. Daniel Amen for his earnest contribution in the Foreword
to the book.
I want to also mention my mother, Fran Dispenza, who has
taught me to be strong, clearheaded, loving, and filled with deter-
mination. Thanks, Mom.
And to my children, I can’t express how you have taught me
unconditional love by allowing me the time and space to write an-
other book while also lecturing around the world. You have given
me such consistent support in so many selfless ways. Thank you
for showing me such virtue.
Finally, this book has been dedicated to my love, Roberta Brit-
tingham. You still remain the most amazing person I have ever
met. Thank you for being such a light. You are grace, nobility, and
love packaged into one beautiful woman.
}}}}
327
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
Joe Dispenza, D.C., studied biochemistry at Rutgers Universi-

ty. He also holds a Bachelor of Science degree with an emphasis in
neuroscience, and received his Doctor of Chiropractic degree from
Life University in Atlanta, Georgia, graduating magna cum laude.
Dr. Joe’s postgraduate training has been in neurology, neuro-
science, brain function and chemistry, cellular biology, memory
formation, and aging and longevity. He is an honorary member
of the National Board of Chiropractic Examiners, the recipient of
a Clinical Proficiency Citation for clinical excellence in doctor-
patient relationships from Life University, and a member of Pi
Tau Delta, the international chiropractic honor society.
Dr. Joe has lectured in more than 24 countries on six conti-
nents, educating thousands about the role and function of the
human brain and how to reprogram their thinking through sci-
entifically proven neurophysiological principles. As a result, many
individuals have learned to reach their specific goals and visions by
eliminating self-destructive habits. His simple yet powerful teach-
ing approach creates a bridge between true human potential and
the latest scientific theories of neuroplasticity. Dr. Joe explains how
thinking in new ways, as well as changing beliefs, can literally
rewire one’s brain. His work is founded in his total conviction that
within every person on this planet is the latent potential of great-
ness and unlimited abilities.
328
About the Author
Dr. Joe’s first book, Evolve Your Brain: The Science of Changing
Your Mind, connects the subjects of thought and consciousness
with the brain, mind, and body. It explores “the biology of
change.” In other words, when we truly change our minds, there
is physical evidence of change in the brain.
As an author of several scientific articles on the close relationship
between the brain and the body, Dr. Joe explains the roles played
by brain chemistry and neurophysiology in physical health and
disease. His latest DVD release of Evolve Your Brain: The Science of
Changing Your Mind looks at the ways in which the human brain
can be harnessed to affect reality through the mastery of thought,
and he has created an educational and inspiring CD series in
which he answers some of the questions he is most commonly
asked. In his research into spontaneous remissions, Dr. Joe has
found similarities among people who have experienced so-called
miraculous healings, showing that they have actually changed
their minds, which then changed their health.
One of the scientists, researchers, and teachers featured in
the award-winning film What the BLEEP Do We Know!?, Dr. Joe
has made additional guest appearances in the theatrical director’s
cut as well as the extended Quantum Edition DVD set, What the
BLEEP!? Down the Rabbit Hole, along with the new docudrama The
People vs. The State of Illusion. He also serves as an editorial advisor
of Explore! magazine.
When not traveling and writing, Dr. Joe is busy seeing pa-
tients at his chiropractic clinic near Olympia, Washington. He can
be contacted at: www.drjoedispenza.com.
}}}}
329
Hay House Titles of Related Interest
YOU CAN HEAL YOUR LIFE, the movie, starring Louise Hay & Friends
(available as a 1-DVD program and an expanded 2-DVD set)
Watch the trailer at: www.LouiseHayMovie.com
THE SHIFT, the movie, starring Dr. Wayne W. Dyer

(available as a 1-DVD program and an expanded 2-DVD set)
Watch the trailer at: www.DyerMovie.com
}}}
AWAKENING TO THE SECRET CODE OF YOUR MIND: Your Mind’s

Journey to Inner Peace, by Dr. Darren R. Weissman
THE BIOLOGY OF BELIEF: Unleashing the Power of Consciousness,

Matter & Miracles, by Bruce H. Lipton, Ph.D.
THE DIVINE MATRIX: Bridging Time, Space, Miracles, and Belief,

by Gregg Braden
THE END OF SUFFERING AND THE DISCOVERY OF HAPPINESS:

The Path of Tibetan Buddhism, by His Holiness the Dalai Lama
EVERYTHING YOU NEED TO KNOW TO FEEL GO(O)D,

by Candace B. Pert, Ph.D., with Nancy Marriott
POWER UP YOUR BRAIN: The Neuroscience of Enlightenment,

by David Perlmutter, M.D., F.A.C.N., and Alberto Villoldo, Ph.D.
POWER vs. FORCE: The Hidden Determinants of Human Behavior,

by David R. Hawkins, M.D., Ph.D.
SOUL-CENTERED: Transform Your Life in 8 Weeks with Meditation,

by Sarah McLean
WISHES FULFILLED: Mastering the Art of Manifesting,

by Dr. Wayne W. Dyer
All of the above are available at your local bookstore,

or may be ordered by contacting Hay House (see next page).
We hope you enjoyed this Hay House book. If you’d like to receive our
online catalog featuring additional information on Hay House books
and products, or if you’d like to find out more about the
Hay Foundation, please contact:
Hay House, Inc., P.O. Box 5100, Carlsbad, CA 92018-5100

(760) 431-7695 or (800) 654-5126
(760) 431-6948 (fax) or (800) 650-5115 (fax)
www.hayhouse.com® • www.hayfoundation.org
}}}
Published and distributed in Australia by: Hay House Australia Pty.

Ltd., 18/36 Ralph St., Alexandria NSW 2015 Phone: 612-9669-4299
Fax: 612-9669-4144 • www.hayhouse.com.au
Published and distributed in the United Kingdom by:

Hay House UK, Ltd., Astley House, 33 Notting Hill Gate, London W11 3JQ
Phone: 44-20-3675-2450 • Fax: 44-20-3675-2451 • www.hayhouse.co.uk
Published and distributed in the Republic of South Africa by:

Hay House SA (Pty), Ltd., P.O. Box 990, Witkoppen 2068
Phone/Fax: 27-11-467-8904 • www.hayhouse.co.za
Published in India by: Hay House Publishers India, Muskaan Complex,

Plot No. 3, B-2, Vasant Kunj, New Delhi 110 070 • Phone: 91-11-4176-
1620 Fax: 91-11-4176-1630 • www.hayhouse.co.in
Distributed in Canada by: Raincoast Books,

2440 Viking Way, Richmond, B.C. V6V 1N2 • Phone:
1-800-663-5714 • Fax: 1-800-565-3770 • www.raincoast.com
}}}
Take Your Soul on a Vacation
Visit www.HealYourLife.com® to regroup, recharge, and reconnect

with your own magnificence.Featuring blogs, mind-body-spirit news,
and life-changing wisdom from Louise Hay and friends.
Visit www.HealYourLife.com today!

Free e-newsletters
from Hay House, the Ultimate
Resource for Inspiration
Be the ﬁrst to know about Hay House’s dollar deals, free downloads,
special offers, afﬁrmation cards, giveaways, contests, and more!
Get exclusive excerpts from our latest releases and

videos from Hay House Present Moments.
Enjoy uplifting personal stories, how-to articles, and

healing advice, along with videos and empowering
quotes, within Heal Your Life.
Have an inspirational story to tell and a passion for

writing? Sharpen your writing skills with insider
tips from Your Writing Life.
Sign Up Get inspired, educate

yourself, get a complimentary
Now! gift, and share the wisdom!
http://www.hayhouse.com/newsletters.php
Visit www.hayhouse.com to sign up today!
HealYourLife.com
Heal Your Life One Thought at a Time . . .
(DESIGNER: After this page, insert the Mind Your
Bodyon Louise’s
ad and All-New Website!
the HealYourLife.com ad. If there’s only
room for one, put in Mind Your Body ad. If space
allows, this Hay House info page should go 4 pages
from the back, the two ads should face each other,
“Life is bringing me everything
and the last page should be blank)
I need and more. ”
— Louise Hay
Come to HEALYOURLIFE.COM today and meet the world’s

best-selling self-help authors; the most popular leading in-
tuitive, health, and success experts; up-and-coming inspi-
rational writers; and new like-minded friends who will share
their insights, experiences, personal stories, and wisdom so
you can heal your life and the world around you . . . one
thought at a time.
Here are just some of the things

you’ll get at HealYourLife.com:
• DAILY AFFIRMATIONS
• CAPTIVATING VIDEO CLIPS
• EXCLUSIVE BOOK REVIEWS
• AUTHOR BLOGS
• LIVE TWITTER AND FACEBOOK FEEDS
• BEHIND-THE-SCENES SCOOPS
• LIVE STREAMING RADIO
• “MY LIFE” COMMUNITY OF FRIENDS
PLUS:
FREE Monthly Contests and Polls
FREE BONUS gifts, discounts,
and newsletters
Make It Your Home Page Today!

www.HealYourLife.com®
THINK GREATER!
Lose Your Mind and Create a New One!
ONLINE COMPANION COURSE
with Dr. Joe Dispenza

Based on the Best-Selling Book
Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself
WEEK 1: Overcoming the Environment, the Body, and Time
WEEK 2: Three Brains: Thinking to Doing to Being
WEEK 3: The Quantum You and the Gap
WEEK 4: Meditation, Demystifying the Mystical,

and Waves of Your Future
In order to change, you must be greater than the body.

Learn proven skills that will help you focus your attention;
move into a new state of being; and rewrite your automatic
habits, attitudes, and other unwanted subconscious programs
to create the life you want to live!
As an added bonus, when you purchase this course,

you’ll also receive an 18-page companion workbook
and a downloadable meditation from Dr. Joe!
Register for This Online Course Today

at www.hayhouse.com/onlineevents

Dispenza Breaking The Habit of Being Yourself

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dispenza Breaking The Habit of Being Yourself

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dispenza Breaking The Habit of Being Yourself

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Praise for Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself

“Dr. Joe Dispenza wants to empower you to let go of negative

“Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself is a powerful blend of leading-edge science

“We’re in the midst of an unparalleled new era of personal growth, in which a

Dr. Joe Dispenza

HAY HOUSE, INC.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Tradepaper ISBN: 978-1-4019-3809-3

Printed in the United States of America

Foreword by Daniel G. Amen, M.D. .............................................................xi

PART I: The Science of You

Chapter 1: The Quantum You .............................................................. 3

Chapter 2: Overcoming Your Environment ....................................... 39

Chapter 3: Overcoming Your Body .................................................... 53

Chapter 4: Overcoming Time .............................................................. 85

Chapter 5: Survival vs. Creation ......................................................... 97

PART II: Your Brain and Meditation

Chapter 6: Three Brains: Thinking to Doing to Being ..................... 123

Chapter 7: The Gap ............................................................................ 147

Chapter 8: Meditation, Demystifying the Mystical,

PART III: Stepping Toward Your New Destiny

Chapter 9: The Meditative Process: Introduction

Afterword: Inhabit Self ............................................................................. 299

Your brain is involved in everything you do, including how you

and wisdom, as he did in the award-winning film What the BLEEP

• Brain injuries can ruin people’s lives;

SPECT scans have also taught us that as a society, we need to have

One of the most exciting lessons I have learned is that people

— Daniel G. Amen, M.D.,

However, upon my extensive examination of their inner jour-

Go Beyond Knowing . . . to Knowing How

Many readers of my first book, Evolve Your Brain: The Science of

Breaking the Habit of Being Yourself is a product of one of my

True empowerment comes when we start to look deeply at our

Change as a Choice, Instead of a Reaction

It seems that human nature is such that we balk at changing

Part I: The Science of You

Our exploration will start with an overview of philosophical

In Chapters 2 through 4, we will look at what it means to

you think and feel, your external environment is patterning cir-

— Chapter 3: Overcoming Your Body continues to look

— Chapter 4: Overcoming Time examines how we either

— Chapter 5: Survival vs. Creation illustrates the distinction

things or people in your environment, and your obsession with

Part II: Your Brain and Meditation

— In Chapter 6: Three Brains: Thinking to Doing to Being,

— Chapter 7: The Gap explores how to break free from the

— Part II concludes with Chapter 8: Meditation, Demysti-

Part III: Stepping Toward Your New Destiny

All of the information in Parts I and II is provided in order to

By the way, did your mind balk when I mentioned that

fruits of their efforts in the form of changes that serve as feedback

When you know that you know “how” to do something, you’re

THE QUANTUM YOU

embraced the notion that our thoughts produce tangible effects

To Change Your Life, Change Your

In fact, as you begin to embrace this new outlook, your very

Always Matter, Never Mind?

Connecting the dots between the outer, physical world of the